ΠαÏÎ»Î¿Ï á¼ÏιÏÏολὴ ÏÏá½¸Ï ÎολοÏÏαεá¿Ï
A B K min. Copt. have the superscription ÏÏá½¸Ï ÎολαÏÏαεá¿Ï . So Matth. Lachm. and Tisch. Comp. on Colossians 1:2 .
CHAPTER 1
Colossians 1:1 . The arrangement ΧÏιÏÏοῦ ἸηÏοῦ (Lachm. Tisch.) has preponderant testimony in its favour, but not the addition of ἸηÏοῦ after ΧÏιÏÏοῦ in Colossians 1:2 (Lachm.).
Colossians 1:2 . ÎολοÏÏαá¿Ï ] K P, also C and × in the subscription, min. Syr. utr. Copt. Or. Nyss. Amphiloch. Theodoret, Damasc. et. al. have ÎολαÏÏαá¿Ï . Approved by Griesb., following Erasm. Steph. Wetst.; adopted by Matth. Lach. Tisch. 7. The Recepta is supported by B D E F G L × , min. Vulg. It. Clem. Chrys. Theophyl. Tert. Ambrosiast. Pelag. The matter is to be judged thus: (1) The name in itself correct is undoubtedly ÎολοÏÏαί , which is supported by coins of the city (Eckhel, Doctr. num. III. p. 107) and confirmed by Herod. vii. 30 (see Wessel. and Valck. in loc.); Xen. Anab. i. 2. 6 (see Bornem. in loc.); Strabo, xii. 8, p. 576; Plin. N. H. v. 32. (2) But since the form ÎολαÏÏαί has so old and considerable attestation, and is preserved in Herodotus and Xenophon as a various reading, as also in Polyaen. viii. 16, and therefore a mere copyist’s error cannot be found in the case the more especially as the copyists, even apart from the analogy which suggested itself to them of the well-known κολοÏÏÏÏ , would naturally be led to the prevalent form of the name ÎολοÏÏαί , we must assume that, although ÎολοÏÏαί was the more formally correct name, still the name ÎολαÏÏαί was also (vulgarly) in use, that this was the name which Paul himself wrote, and that ÎολοÏÏαá¿Ï is an ancient correction. If the latter had originally a place in the text, there would have been no occasion to alter the generally known and correct form of the name.
After ÏαÏÏá½¸Ï á¼¡Î¼á¿¶Î½ , Elz. (Lachm. in brackets) has καὶ ÎºÏ ÏÎ¯Î¿Ï á¼¸Î·Ïοῦ ΧÏιÏÏοῦ , in opposition to B D E K L, min. vss. and Fathers. A complementary addition in accordance with the openings of other epistles, especially as no ground for intentional omission suggests itself (in opposition to Reiche, Comm. crit. p. 351 f.).
Colossians 1:3 . καὶ ÏαÏÏί ] Lachm. and Tisch. 7: ÏαÏÏί . So B C*, vss. and Fathers, while D* F G, Chrys. have Ïá¿· ÏαÏÏί . Since, however, Paul always writes á½ ÎÎµá½¸Ï ÎºÎ±á½¶ ÏαÏá½´Ï Ïοῦ ÎºÏ ÏÎ¯Î¿Ï ( Rom 15:6 ; 2 Corinthians 1:3 ; 2 Corinthians 11:31 ; Ephesians 1:3 ; also 1 Corinthians 15:24 ; Ephesians 5:20 ), and never á½ ÎÎµá½¸Ï á½ ÏαÏá½´Ï Ï . κ . or á½ ÎÎµá½¸Ï ÏαÏá½´Ï Ï . κ ., the Recepta, which has in its favour A C** D*** E K L P × , min. Vulg. and Fathers, is with Tisch. 8 to be retained. The καί was readily omitted in a mechanical way after the immediately preceding Îεοῦ ÏαÏÏÏÏ .
Instead of ÏεÏί , Lachm. reads á½ÏÎÏ , which is also recommended by Griesb., following B D* E* F G, min. Theophyl. Not attested by preponderating evidence, and easily introduced in reference to Colossians 1:9 (where á½ÏÎÏ stands without variation).
Colossians 1:4 . Instead of ἣν á¼ÏεÏε (which is recommended by Griesb., adopted by Lachm. and Tisch.), Elz. Matth. Scholz have Ïήν merely, but in opposition to A C D* E* F G P × , min. vss. (including Vulg. It.) Fathers. If Ïήν were originally written, why should it have been exchanged for ἣν á¼ÏεÏε ? On the other hand, ἣν á¼ÏεÏε , as it could be dispensed with for the sense, might easily drop out, because the word preceding concludes with the syllable HN, and the word following ( Îµá¼°Ï ), like á¼ÏεÏε , begins with E. The grammatical gap would then, following Ephesians 1:15 , be filled up by Ïήν .
Colossians 1:6 . καὶ á¼ÏÏι ] καί is wanting in A B C D* E* P × , min. and some vss. and Fathers; condemned by Griesb., omitted by Lachm. and Tisch. 8. But, not being understood, this καί , which has the most important vss. and Fathers in its favour, was omitted in the interest of simplicity as disturbing the connection.
καὶ αá½Î¾Î±Î½Ïμενον ] is wanting in Elz. Matth., who is of opinion that Chrys. introduced it from Colossians 1:10 . But it is so decisively attested, that the omission must be looked upon as caused by the homoeoteleuton, the more especially as a similar ending and a similar beginning here came together (ONKA).
Ver 7. ÎºÎ±Î¸á½¼Ï ÎºÎ±Î¯ ] καί is justly condemned by Griesb. on decisive evidence, and is omitted by Lachm. and Tisch. A mechanical repetition from the preceding.
á½Î¼á¿¶Î½ ] ABD*GF × *, min.: ἡμῶν ; approved by Griesb., adopted by Lachm. But since the first person both precedes and follows ( ἡμῶν ⦠ἡμá¿Î½ ), it was put here also by careless copyists.
Colossians 1:10 . After ÏεÏιÏαÏá¿Ïαι , Elz. Tisch. 7 have á½Î¼á¾¶Ï , against decisive testimony; a supplementary addition.
Îµá¼°Ï Ïὴν á¼ÏίγνÏÏιν ] Griesb. Lachm. Scholz. Tisch. 8 have Ïá¿ á¼ÏιγνÏÏει . So A B C D* E* F G P × , min. Clem. Cyr. Maxim. But it lacks the support of the vss., which (Vulg. It. in scientia Dei) have read the Recepta Îµá¼°Ï Ï . á¼Ïίγν . attested by D*** E** K L and most min., also Theodoret, Dam. Theophyl. Oec., or with × ** and Chrys. á¼Î½ Ïá¿ á¼ÏιγνÏÏει . The latter, as well as the mere Ï á¿Í á¼Ïιγν ., betrays itself as an explanation of the difficult Îµá¼°Ï Ï . á¼Ïίγν ., which, we may add, belongs to the symmetrical structure of the whole discourse, the participial sentences of which all conclude with a destination introduced by Îµá¼°Ï .
Colossians 1:12 . ἱκανÏÏανÏι ] Lachm.: καλÎÏανÏι καὶ ἱκανÏÏανÏι , according to B, whilst D* F G, min. Arm. Aeth. It. Didym. Ambrosiast. Vigil. have καλÎÏανÏι merely. Looking at the so isolated attestation of καλ . κ . ἱκαν ., we must assume that καλÎÏανÏι was written on the margin by way of complement, and then was in some cases inserted with καί , and in others without καί substituted for ἱκανÏÏ .
Instead of á¼¡Î¼Î±Ï , Tisch. 8 has á½Î¼á¾¶Ï ; but the latter, too weakly attested by B × , easily slipped in by means of the connection with εá½ÏÎ±Ï .
Colossians 1:14 . After á¼ÏÎ¿Î»Ï ÏÏ . Elz. has διὰ Ïοῦ αἵμαÏÎ¿Ï Î±á½Ïοῦ , against decisive testimony; from Ephesians 1:7 .
Colossians 1:16 . Ïá½° á¼Î½ Ïοá¿Ï οá½Ïανοá¿Ï καὶ Ïά ] Lachm. has erased the first Ïά and bracketed the second. In both cases the Ïά is wanting in B × *, Or.; the first Ïά only is wanting in D* E* F G P and two min. But how easily might TA be absorbed in the final syllable of Ïάν TA; and this would then partially involve the omission of the second Ïά ! The assumption that the final syllable of ÏάνÏα was written twice would only be warranted, if the omitting witnesses, especially in the case of the second Ïά , were stronger.
Colossians 1:20 . The second δἰ αá½Ïοῦ is wanting in B D* F G L, min. Vulg. It. Sahid. Or. Cyr. Chrys. Theophyl. and Latin Fathers. Omitted by Lachm. It was passed over as superfluous, obscure, and disturbing the sense.
Colossians 1:21 . Instead of the Recepta á¼ÏοκαÏήλλαξεν , Lachm., following B, has á¼ÏοκαÏηλλάγηÏε . D* F G, It. Goth. Ir. Ambrosiast. Sedul. have á¼ÏοκαÏαλλαγÎνÏÎµÏ . Since, according to this, the passive is considerably attested, and the active á¼ÏοκαÏήλλαξεν , although most strongly attested (also by × ), may well be suspected to be a syntactic emendation, we must decide, as between the two passive readings á¼ÏοκαÏηλλάγηÏε and á¼ÏοκαÏαλλαγÎνÏÎµÏ , in favour of the former, because the latter is quite unsuitable. If the Recepta were original, the construction would be so entirely plain, that we could not at all see why the passive should have been introduced.
Colossians 1:22 . After θανάÏÎ¿Ï , A P × , min. vss. Ir. have αá½Ïοῦ , which Lachm. has admitted in brackets. It is attested so weakly, as to seem nothing more than a familiar addition.
Colossians 1:23 . Ïá¿ before κÏίÏει is, with Lachm. and Tisch., to be omitted, following A B C D* F G × , min. Chrys.
Instead of Î´Î¹Î¬ÎºÎ¿Î½Î¿Ï , P × have κήÏÏ Î¾ κ . á¼ÏÏÏÏÎ¿Î»Î¿Ï . A gloss; comp. 1 Timothy 2:7 . In A all the three words κήÏÏ Î¾ κ . á¼Ï . κ . δίακ . are given.
Colossians 1:24 . νῦν ] D* E* F G, Vulg. It. Ambrosiast. Pel. have á½ Ï Î½á¿¦Î½ . Rightly; the final syllable of Î´Î¹Î¬ÎºÎ¿Î½Î¿Ï in Colossians 1:23 , and the beginning of a church-lesson, co-operated to the suppression of á½ Ï , which, however, is quite in keeping with the connection and the whole progress of the discourse.
After Ïαθήμ . Elz. has Î¼Î¿Ï , against decisive testimony.
á½ á¼ÏÏιν ] C D* E, min.: á½ Ï á¼ÏÏιν . So Lachm. in the margin. A copyist’s error.
Colossians 1:27 . The neuter Ïί Ïὸ ÏλοῦÏÎ¿Ï (Matth. Lachm. Tisch.) is attested by codd. and Fathers sufficiently to make the masculine appear as an emendation: comp. on 2 Corinthians 8:2 .
á½ Ï á¼ÏÏιν ] A B F G P, min. (quod in Vulg. It. leaves the reading uncertain): á½ á¼ÏÏιν . So Lachm. A grammatical alteration, which, after Colossians 1:24 , was all the more likely.
Colossians 1:28 . After διδάÏκ ., ÏάνÏα á¼Î½Î¸ÏÏÏον is wanting in D* E* F G, min. vss. and Fathers. Suspected by Griesb., but is to be defended. The whole καὶ διδάÏκ . ÏάνÏα á¼Î½Î¸ÏÏÏ . was omitted owing to the homoeoteleuton (so still in L, min. Clem.), and then the restoration of the words took place incompletely.
After ΧÏιÏÏá¿· Elz. has ἸηÏοῦ , against decisive testimony.
καὶ ΤιμÏθ .] see on 2 Corinthians 1:1 ; Philippians 1:1 . Here also as subordinate joint-author of the letter , who at the same time may have been the amanuensis , but is not here jointly mentioned as such (comp. Romans 16:22 ). See on Philippians 1:1 .
á½ á¼Î´ÎµÎ»ÏÏÏ ] see on 1 Corinthians 1:1 ; referring, not to official (Chrys.: οá½ÎºÎ¿á¿¦Î½ καὶ αá½Ïá½¸Ï á¼ÏÏÏÏÎ¿Î»Î¿Ï ), but generally to Christian brotherhood.
Ïοá¿Ï á¼Î½ Îολ . á¼Î³ . κ . Ï . λ .] to the saints who are in Colossae . To this theocratic designation, which in itself is not as yet more precisely defined (see on Romans 1:7 ), is then added their distinctively Christian character: and believing brethren in Christ . Comp. on Ephesians 1:1 . á¼Î³Î¯Î¿Î¹Ï is to be understood as a substantive, just as in all the commencements of epistles, where it occurs (Romans 1:7 ; Romans 1:0 Cor.; 2 Cor.; Eph.; Phil.); and á¼Î½ ΧÏιÏÏá¿· is closely connected with ÏιÏÏ . á¼Î´ ., with which it blends so as to form one conception (hence it is not Ïοá¿Ï á¼Î½ Χ .), expressly designating the believing brethren as Christians , so that á¼Î½ Χ . forms the element of demarcation, in which the readers are believing brethren, and outside of which they would not be so in the Christian sense. Comp. on 1 Corinthians 4:17 ; Ephesians 6:21 ; in which passages, however, ÏιÏÏÏÏ is faithful , a meaning which it has not here (in opposition to Baumgarten-Crusius, Ewald, Dalmer), because everywhere in the superscriptions of the Epistles it is only the Christian standing of the readers that is described. No doubt á¼Î½ ΧÏιÏÏá¿· was in itself hardly necessary; but the addresses have a certain formal stamp. If á¼Î³Î¯Î¿Î¹Ï is taken as an adjective : “the holy and believing brethren” (de Wette), á¼Î½ ΧÏιÏÏá¿· being made to apply to the whole formula, then ÏιÏÏοá¿Ï coming after á¼Î³Î¯Î¿Î¹Ï (which latter word would already have , through á¼Î½ Χ ., its definition in a Christian sense, which, according to our view, it still has not ) would be simply a superfluous and clumsy addition, because á¼Î³Î¯Î¿Î¹Ï would already presuppose the ÏιÏÏοá¿Ï .
The fact that Paul does not expressly describe the church to which he is writing as a church (as in 1 Cor.; 2 Cor.; Galatians 1:0 and 2 Thess.) has no special motive (comp. Rom., Eph., Phil.), but is purely accidental. If it implied that he had not founded the church and stood in no kind of relation to it as such , and especially to its rulers (de Wette, by way of query), he would not have written of a ÎαοδικÎÏν á¼ÎºÎºÎ»Î·Ïία (Colossians 4:16 ). Indeed, the principle of addressing as churches those communities only which he had himself founded, is not one to be expected from the apostle’s disposition of mind and wisdom; and it is excluded by the inscription of the Epistle to the Ephesians (assuming its genuineness and destination for the church at Ephesus), as also by Philippians 1:1 (where the mention of the bishops and deacons would not compensate for the formal naming of the church). It is also an accidental matter that Paul says á¼Î½ ΧÏιÏÏá¿· merely, and not á¼Î½ Χ . ἸηÏοῦ (1 Cor.; Eph.; Phil.; 2 Thess.), although Mayerhoff makes use of this, among other things, to impugn the genuineness of the epistle; just as if such a mechanical regularity were to be ascribed to the apostle!
ÏάÏÎ¹Ï á½Î¼á¿Î½ κ . Ï . λ .] See on Romans 1:7 .
Colossians 1:3 f. Thanksgiving for the Christian condition of the readers, down to Colossians 1:8 . ε á½ ÏαÏιÏÏο Í Ï Î¼ÎµÎ½ ] I and Timothy; plural and singular alternate in the Epistle (Colossians 1:23-24 ; Colossians 1:28-29 ff., Colossians 4:3 ); but not without significant occasion.
καὶ ÏαÏÏá½¶ κ . Ï . λ .] who is at the same time the Father, etc. See on Ephesians 1:3 .
ÏάνÏοÏε ] belongs to εá½ÏÎ±Ï ., as in 1 Corinthians 1:4 ; 1 Thessalonians 1:2 ; 2 Thessalonians 1:3 ; Philemon 1:4 , and not to ÏεÏá½¶ á½Î¼ . ÏÏοÏÎµÏ Ï . (Chrysostom, Oecumenius, Theophylact, Erasmus, Luther, Castalio, Beza, Calvin, Grotius, Bengel, and many others, including Böhmer, Olshausen, Dalmer) a connection opposed to the parallel Ephesians 1:16 , as well as to the context, according to which the thanksgiving is the main point here , and the prayer merely a concomitant definition; and it is not till Colossians 1:9 that the latter is brought forward as the object of the discourse, and that as unceasing . This predicate belongs here to the thanking , and in Colossians 1:9 to the praying , and ÏεÏá½¶ á½Î¼á¿¶Î½ ÏÏοÏÎµÏ Ï . words which are not, with Bähr, to be separated from one another (whereby ÏÏοÏÎµÏ Ï . would unduly stand without relation) is nothing but a more precise definition of ÏάνÏοÏε : “ always ( each time , Philippians 1:4 ; Romans 1:10 [11] ), when we pray for you .”
á¼ÎºÎ¿ÏÏανÏÎµÏ Îº . Ï . λ .] with reference to time; after having heard , etc. Comp. Colossians 1:9 . In that, which Paul had heard of them, lies the ground of his thanksgiving. The ÏίÏÏÎ¹Ï is faith (Romans 1:8 ; 1 Thessalonians 1:3 ; 2 Thessalonians 1:3 ) not faithfulness (Ewald), as at Philemon 1:5 , where the position of the words is different. That Paul has heard their faith praised , is self-evident from the context. Comp. Ephesians 1:15 ; Philemon 1:5 .
á¼Î½ Χ . Ἰ .] on Christ , in so far, namely, as the faith has its basis in Christ . See on Mark 1:15 ; Galatians 3:26 ; Ephesians 1:13 ; Ephesians 1:15 . As to the non-repetition of Ïήν , see on Galatians 3:26 .
ἫΠá¼Î§ÎΤΠ] Paul so writes, not by joining on immediately ( Τá¿Î á¼ÎÎÎ ÎÎ Îá¼¸Ï Î ÎÎΤÎÏ Î . Τ . Î . ), nor yet by the mere repetition of the article, as in Ephesians 1:15 (so the Recepta , see the critical remarks), because he has it in view to enter more fully upon this point of á¼Î³Î¬Ïη , and indeed definitely upon the reason why they cherished it .
[11] For a like use of á¼ÎµÎ¯ , see Stallbaum, ad Plat. Rep. p. 360 A.
Colossians 1:5 . Îιὰ Ïὴν á¼Î»Ïίδα κ . Ï . λ .] on account of the hope , etc., does not belong to εá½ÏÎ±Ï . Colossians 1:3 (Bengel, “ex spe patet, quanta sit causa gratias agendi pro dono fidei et amoris;” comp. Bullinger, Zanchius, Calovius, Elsner, Michaelis, Zachariae, Storr, Rosenmüller, Hofmann, and others), because the ground for the apostolic thanksgiving at the beginnings of the Epistles, as also here at Colossians 1:4 , always consists in the Christian character of the readers (Romans 1:8 ; 1 Corinthians 1:4 ff.; Ephesians 1:15 ; Philippians 1:5 ; 1Th 1:3 ; 2 Thessalonians 1:3 ; 2 Timothy 1:5 ; Philemon 1:5 ), and that indeed as a ground in itself , [12] and therefore not merely on account of what one has in future to hope from it; and, moreover, because εá½ÏαÏιÏÏεá¿Î½ with ÎÎÎ and the accusative does not occur anywhere in the N. T. It is connected with ἫΠá¼Î§ÎΤΠΠ. Τ . Î . , and thus specifies the motive ground of the love; for love guarantees the realization of the salvation hoped for. So correctly, Chrysostom, Theodoret, Oecumenius, Theophylact, Erasmus, Calvin, Estius, Steiger, Bleek, and others. The more faith is active through love, the richer one becomes Îµá¼°Ï ÎεÏν (Luke 12:21 ), and this riches forms the contents of hope. He who does not love remains subject to death (1 John 3:14 ), and his faith profits him nothing (1 Corinthians 13:1-3 ). It is erroneous to refer it jointly to ÏίÏÏÎ¹Ï , so as to make the hope appear here as ground of the faith and the love; so Grotius and others, including Bähr, Olshausen, and de Wette; comp. Baumgarten-Crusius and Ewald. For ἣν á¼ÏεÏε (or the Rec . Ïήν ) indicates a further statement merely as regards Τá¿Î á¼ÎÎÎ ÎÎ ; and with this accords the close of the whole outburst, which in Colossians 1:8 emphatically reverts to Τá¿Î á½Îá¿¶Î á¼ÎÎÎ ÎÎ .
The á¼ÎÎ ÎÏ is here conceived objectively (comp. á¼Î»Ï . βλεÏομÎνη , Romans 8:24 ): our hope as to its objective contents , that which we hope for. Comp. Job 6:8 ; 2Ma 7:14 , and see on Romans 8:24 and Galatians 5:5 ; Zöckler, de vi ac notione voc . á¼Î»ÏÎ¯Ï , Giss. 1856, p. 26 ff.
Τá¿Î á¼Î ÎÎÎÎÎ . á½Îá¿Î á¼Î Τ . Îá½Î¡ . ] What is meant is the Messianic salvation forming the contents of the hope (1 Thessalonians 5:8 ; Romans 5:2 ; Romans 8:18 ff.; Colossians 3:3 f.), which remains deposited , that is, preserved, laid up (Luke 19:20 ), in heaven for the Christian until the Parousia, in order to be then given to him. [13] On á¼Ïοκ . comp. 2 Timothy 4:8 ; 2Ma 12:45 ; Kypke, II. p. 320 f.; Loesner, p. 360; Jacobs, ad Ach. Tat . p. 678. Used of death, Hebrews 9:27 ; of punishments, Plat. Locr . p. 104 D, 4Ma 8:10 . As to the idea, comp. the conception of the treasure in heaven (Matthew 6:20 ; Matthew 19:21 ; 1 Timothy 6:19 ), of the reward in heaven (see on Matthew 5:12 ), of the ÏολίÏÎµÏ Î¼Î± in heaven (see on Philippians 3:20 ), of the κληÏονομία ÏεÏηÏημÎνη á¼Î½ οá½Ïαν . (1 Peter 1:4 ), and of the βÏαβεá¿Î¿Î½ Ïá¿Ï á¼Î½Ï κλήÏεÏÏ (Philippians 3:14 ).
ἣν ÏÏοηκοÏÏαÏε κ . Ï . λ .] Certainty of this hope, which is not an unwarranted subjective fancy, but is objectively conveyed to them through the word of truth previously announced. The ÏÏÏ in ÏÏοηκοÏÏαÏε (Herod, viii. 79; Plat. Legg vii. p. 797 A; Xen. Mem . ii. 4. 7; Dem. 759. 26, 955. 1; Joseph. Antt . viii. 12. 3) does not denote already formerly , whereby Paul premises se nihil allaturum novi (Calvin and many), but must be said with reference to the future , to which the hope belongs; hence the sense imported by Ewald: where with the word of truth began among you (Mark 1:15 ), is the less admissible. The conception is rather, that the contents of the á¼Î»ÏÎ¯Ï , the heavenly salvation, is the great future blessing, the infallible pre-announcement of which they have heard . As previously announced , it is also previously heard .
Ïá¿Ï á¼Î»Î·Î¸ÎµÎ¯Î±Ï is the contents of the λÏÎ³Î¿Ï (comp. on Ephesians 1:13 ); and by Ïοῦ εá½Î±Î³ ., the á¼Î»Î®Î¸ÎµÎ¹Î± , that is, the absolute truth, is specifically defined as that of the gospel , that is, as that which is announced in the gospel . Both genitives are therefore to be left in their substantive form (Erasmus, Heinrichs, Baumgarten-Crusius, and many others understand Ïá¿Ï á¼Î»Î·Î¸ . as adjectival: sermo verax; comp. on the contrary, on á¼Î»Î®Î¸ . Ïοῦ εá½Î±Î³Î³ ., Galatians 2:5 ; Galatians 2:14 ), so that the expression advances to greater definiteness. The circumstantiality has something solemn about it (comp. 2 Corinthians 9:4 ); but this is arbitrarily done away, if we regard Ïοῦ εá½Î±Î³Î³ . as the genitive of apposition to Ïá¿· λÏγῳ Ïá¿Ï á¼Î»Î·Î¸ . (Calvin, Beza, and many others, including Flatt, Bähr, Steiger, Böhmer, Huther, Olshausen, de Wette, Hofmann); following Ephesians 1:13 , Paul would have written Ïá¿· εá½Î±Î³Î³ÎµÎ»Î¯á¿³ .
[12] In opposition to the view of Hofmann, that Paul names the reason why the news of the faith and love of the readers had become to him a cause of thanksgiving.
[13] It is erroneous to say that the Parousia no longer occurs in our Epistle. It is the substratum of the á¼Î»Ïá½¶Ï á¼Ïοκ . á¼Î½ Ï . οá½Ï . Comp. Colossians 3:1 ff. (in opposition to Mayerhoff, and Holtzmann, p. 203 f.).
Colossians 1:6 . In what he had just said, ἣν ÏÏοηκοÏÏαÏε ⦠εá½Î±Î³Î³ÎµÎ»Î¯Î¿Ï , Paul now desires to make his readers sensible of the great and blessed fellowship in which, through the gospel, they are placed, in order that they may by this very consciousness feel themselves aroused to faithfulness towards the gospel, in presence of the heretical influences; á¼Ïειδὴ μάλιÏÏα οἱ Ïολλοὶ á¼Îº Ïοῦ κοινÏÎ½Î¿á½ºÏ á¼Ïειν ÏÎ¿Î»Î»Î¿á½ºÏ Ïῶν δογμάÏÏν ÏÏηÏίζονÏαι , Chrysostom. Comp. Oecumenius: ÏÏÎ¿Î¸Ï Î¼Î¿ÏÎÏÎ¿Ï Ï Î±á½ÏÎ¿á½ºÏ ÏεÏá½¶ Ïὴν ÏίÏÏιν Ïοιεῠá¼Îº Ïοῦ á¼Ïειν ÏάνÏÎ±Ï ÎºÎ¿Î¹Î½ÏνοÏÏ .
Îµá¼°Ï á½Î¼á¾¶Ï ] not á¼Î½ á½Î¼á¿Î½ , because the conception of the previous arrival predominates; 1Ma 11:63 . Often so with ÏαÏεá¿Î½Î±Î¹ in classical authors (Herod. i. 9, vi. 24, viii. 60; Polyb. xviii. 1.1; comp. Acts 12:20 ). See Bornemann and Kühner, ad Xen. Anab. i. 2. 2; Bremi, ad Aeschin . p. 320; and generally, Nägelsbach, z. Ilias , p. 158 f., Exodus 3:0 . Observe, moreover, the emphasis of Ïοῦ ÏαÏÏνÏÎ¿Ï : it is there! it has not remained away; and to the presence is then added the bearing fruit .
ÎºÎ±Î¸á½¼Ï ÎºÎ±á½¶ á¼Î½ ÏανÏá½¶ Ï . κÏÏμῳ ] A popular hyperbole. Comp. Romans 1:8 ; Acts 17:6 , and see Colossians 1:23 . The expression is neither arbitrarily to be restricted, nor to be used against the genuineness of the Epistle (Hilgenfeld), nor yet to be rationalized by “as regards the idea ” (Baumgarten-Crusius) and the like; although, certainly, the idea of the catholicity of Christianity is expressed in the passage (comp. Romans 10:18 ; Mark 14:9 ; Mark 16:15 ; Matthew 24:14 ).
καὶ á¼ÏÏι καÏÏÎ¿Ï . κ . Ï . λ .] Instead of continuing: καὶ καÏÏοÏοÏÎ¿Ï Î¼ÎÎ½Î¿Ï Îº . Ï . λ ., Paul carries onward the discourse with the finite verb, and thus causes this element to stand out more independently and forcibly: [14] “ and it is fruit-bearing and growing ” (see Maetzner, ad Lycurg. Leocr . p. 108; Heindorf, ad Plat. Soph . p. 222 B; Winer, p. 533 [E. T. 717]), by which is indicated the fact, that the gospel, wherever it is present, is also in course of living dynamical development , and this state of development is expressed by á¼ÏÏι with the participle. This general proposition based on experience: καὶ á¼ÏÏι καÏÏÎ¿Ï . κ . αá½Î¾Î±Î½ ., is then by ÎÎÎá¿ºÏ Î . á¼Î á½Îá¿Î confirmed through the experience found also among the readers; so that Paul’s view passes, in the first clause ( Ïοῦ ÏαÏÏνÏÎ¿Ï â¦ ÎºÏÏμῳ ), from the special to the general aspect, and in the second, from the general to the special. With ÎÎΡΠÎΦÎΡ . (not occurring elsewhere in the middle ) is depicted the blissful working in the inward and outward life (comp. Galatians 5:22 ; Ephesians 5:9 ); and with αá½Î¾Î±Î½Ïμ . the continuous diffusion , whereby the gospel is obtaining more and more adherents and local extension. Comp. Theodoret: καÏÏοÏοÏίαν Ïοῦ εá½Î±Î³Î³ . κÎκληκε Ïὴν á¼ÏÎ±Î¹Î½Î¿Ï Î¼Îνην ÏολιÏείαν · αá½Î¾Î·Ïιν δὲ Ïῶν ÏιÏÏÎµÏ ÏνÏÏν Ïὸ Ïλá¿Î¸Î¿Ï . Huther and de Wette groundlessly refrain from deciding whether Îá½Î . is intended to refer to the outward growth or to the inward (so Steiger), or to both . See Acts 6:7 ; Acts 12:24 ; Acts 19:20 . Comp. Luke 13:19 ; Matthew 13:32 . The μᾶλλον ÏÏηÏίζεÏθαι , which Chrysostom finds included in αá½Î¾ ., is not denoted , but presupposed by the latter. Comp. Theophylact. The figure is taken from a tree , in which the καÏÏοÏοÏία does not exclude the continuance of growth (not so in the case of cereals).
[14] If καί is not genuine, as Bleek, Hofmann, and others consider (see the critical remarks), the passage is to be translated: as it also in the whole world is fruit-hearing, by which Paul would say that the gospel is present among the readers in the same fruit-bearing quality which it developes on all sides. But in that case the following ÎºÎ±Î¸á½¼Ï ÎºÎ±á½¶ á¼Î½ á½Î¼á¿Î½ would necessarily appear as very superfluous. No doubt we might, after the preceding ÏαÏÏνÏÎ¿Ï , take the á¼ÏÏί , with F. Nitzsch, as equivalent to ÏάÏεÏÏι (see Stallb. ad Plat. Phaed. p. 59 B); and to this comes also the punctuation in Tisch. 8, who puts a comma after á¼ÏÏίν . But how utterly superfluous would this á¼ÏÏί then be!
Colossians 1:7 f. ÎαθÏÏ ] not quandoquidem (Flatt, comp. Bähr), but the as of the manner in which . So, namely, as it had just been affirmed by á¼Î½ á¼Î»Î·Î¸ÎµÎ¯á¾³ that they had known the divine grace, had they learned it (comp. Philippians 4:9 ) from Epaphras . Notwithstanding this appropriate connection, Holtzmann finds in this third καθÏÏ a trace of the interpolator.
Nothing further is known from any other passage as to Epaphras the Colossian (Colossians 4:12 ); according to Philemon 1:23 , he was ÏÏ Î½Î±Î¹ÏμάλÏÏÎ¿Ï of the apostle. That the latter circumstance is not mentioned in our Epistle is not to be attributed to any special design (Estius: that Paul was unwilling to make his readers anxious). See, on the contrary, on Colossians 4:10 . Against the identity of Epaphras with Epaphroditus , see on Philippians 2:25 . The names even are not alike (contrary to the view of Grotius and Ewald, who look upon Epaphras as an abbreviation); á¼ÏαÏÏá¾¶Ï and the corresponding feminine name á¼ÏαÏÏÏ are found on Greek inscriptions.
ÏÏ Î½Î´Î¿ÏÎ»Î¿Ï ] namely, of Christ (comp. Philippians 1:1 ). The word, of common occurrence, is used elsewhere by Paul in Colossians 4:7 only.
á½ Ï á¼ÏÏιν κ . Ï . λ .] This faithfulness towards the readers, and also, in the sequel, the praise of their love , which Epaphras expressed to the apostle, are intended to stir them up “ne a doctrina, quam ab eo didicerant, per novos magistros abduci se patiantur,” Estius. The emphasis is on ÏιÏÏÏÏ .
á½Ïá½²Ï á½Î¼á¿¶Î½ ] for, as their teacher, he is the servant of Christ for them, for their benefit . The interpretation, instead of you (“in prison he serves me in the gospel,” Michaelis, Böhmer), would only be possible in the event of the service being designated as rendered to the apostle ( διάκονÏÏ Î¼Î¿Ï á¼Î½ ΧÏιÏÏá¿· , or something similar). Comp. Philemon 1:13 . Even with Lachmann’s reading, á½Ï . ἡμῶν (Steiger, Olshausen, Ewald), it would not be necessary to take á½ÏÎÏ as instead; it might equally well be taken as for in the sense of interest, as opposite of the anti-Pauline working (comp. Luke 9:50 ). The present á¼ÏÏί (Paul does not put ἦν ) has its just warrant in the fact, that the merit, which the founder of the church has acquired by its true instruction, is living and continuous , reaching in its efficacy down to the present time. This is an ethical relation, which is quite independent of the circumstance that Epaphras was himself a Colossian (in opposition to Hofmann), but also makes it unnecessary to find in á¼ÏÏι an indirect continuance of Epaphras’ work for the Colossians (in opposition to Bleek).
ὠκαὶ δηλÏÏÎ±Ï Îº . Ï . λ ] who also (in accordance with the interest of this faithful service) has made us to know; comp. 1 Corinthians 1:11 . The á¼Î³Î¬Ïη is here understood either of the love of the Colossians to Paul (and Timothy), as, following Chrysostom, most, including Huther, Bleek, and Hofmann, [15] explain it, or of the brotherly love already commended in Colossians 1:4 (de Wette, Olshausen, Ellicott, and others). But both these modes of taking it are at variance with the emphatic position of á½Î¼á¿¶Î½ (comp. 1 Corinthians 9:12 ; 2 Corinthians 1:6 ; 2 Corinthians 7:7 ; 2 Corinthians 8:13 , et al .), which betokens the love of the readers to Epaphras as meant. There had just been expressed, to wit, by á½Ì Ïá½²Ï á½Î¼á¿¶Î½ , the faithful, loving position of this servant of Christ towards the Colossians , and correlative to this is now the love which he met with from them , consequently the counter-love shown to him, of which he has informed the apostle. A delicate addition out of courtesy to the readers.
á¼Î½ ÏνεÏμαÏι ] attaches itself closely to á¼ÎÎÎ ÎÎ , so as to form one idea, denoting the love as truly holy not conditioned by anything outward, but divinely upheld which is in the Holy Spirit as the element which prompts and animates it; for it is the fruit of the Spirit (Galatians 5:22 ; Romans 15:30 ), οὠÏαÏκικὴ , á¼Î»Î»á½° ÏÎ½ÎµÏ Î¼Î±Ïική (Oecumenius). Comp. ΧÎΡᾺ á¼Î Î Î ., Romans 14:17 .
[15] Who, at the same time, makes the á¼Î½ ÏνεÏμαÏι suggest the reference, that the á¼Î³Î¬Ïη took place in a manner personally unknown which must have been conveyed in the context.
REMARK.
Since á¼Ïʼ á¼§Ï á¼¡Î¼ÎÏÎ±Ï á¼ ÎºÎ¿ÏÏαÏε κ . Ï . λ ., Colossians 1:6 , refers the readers back to the first commencement of their Christianity, and ÎºÎ±Î¸á½¼Ï á¼Î¼Î¬Î¸ÎµÏε á¼Ïὸ á¼ÏαÏÏá¾¶ κ . Ï . λ ., Colossians 1:7 , cannot, except by pure arbitrariness, be separated from it as regards time and regarded as something later, it results from our passage that Epaphras is to be considered as the first preacher of the gospel at Colossae, and consequently as founder of the church . This exegetical result remains even if the Recepta ÎºÎ±Î¸á½¼Ï ÎºÎ±Î¯ is retained. This καί would not, as Wiggers thinks (in the Stud. u. Krit . 1838, p. 185), place the preaching of Epaphras in contradistinction to an earlier one, and make it appear as a continuation of the latter (in this case ÎºÎ±Î¸á½¼Ï ÎºÎ±á½¶ á¼Ïὸ á¼ÏαÏÏ . á¼Î¼Î¬Î¸ÎµÏε or ÎºÎ±Î¸á½¼Ï á¼Î¼Î¬Î¸ÎµÏε καὶ á¼Ïὸ á¼ÏαÏÏ . would have been employed); but it is to be taken as also, not otherwise , placing the á¼Î¼Î¬Î¸ÎµÏε on a parity with the á¼ÏÎγνÏÏε . This applies also in opposition to Vaihinger, in Herzog’s Encykl . iv. p. 79 f.
Colossians 1:9 . Intercession , down to Colossians 1:12 .
διὰ ÏοῦÏο ] on account of all that has been said from á¼ÎºÎ¿ÏÏανÏÎµÏ in Colossians 1:4 onward: induced thereby, we also cease not , etc. This reference is required by á¼Ïʼ á¼§Ï á¼¡Î¼ÎÏÎ±Ï á¼ ÎºÎ¿ÏÏαμεν , which cannot correspond to the δηλÏÏÎ±Ï á¼¡Î¼á¿Î½ , belonging as that does merely to an accessory thought, but must take up again (in opposition to Bleek and Hofmann) the á¼ÎºÎ¿ÏÏανÏÎµÏ which was said in Colossians 1:4 . This resumption is emphatic , not tautological (Holtzmann).
καὶ ἡμεá¿Ï ] are to be taken together , and it is not allowable to join καί either with διὰ ÏοῦÏο (de Wette), or even with ÏÏοÏÎµÏ Ï . (Baumgarten-Crusius). The words are to be rendered: We also (I and Timothy), like others , who make the same intercession for you, and among whom there is mentioned by name the founder of the church, who stood in closest relation to them.
ÏÏοÏÎµÏ Ï .] “ Precum mentionem generatim fecit, Colossians 1:3 ; nunc exprimit, quid precetur” (Bengel).
καὶ αἰÏοÏμενοι ] adds the special ( asking ) to the general ( praying ). Comp. 1Ma 3:44 ; Matthew 21:22 ; Mark 11:24 ; Ephesians 6:18 ; Philippians 4:6 . As to the popular form of hyperbole, οὠÏÎ±Ï Ïμ ., comp. on Ephesians 1:16 . On á½Ïá½²Ï á½Î¼á¿¶Î½ , so far as it is also to be taken with κ . αἰÏοÏμ ., comp. Lys. c. Alc . p. 141.
ἵνα ÏληÏÏθ .] Contents of the asking in the form of its purpose . Comp. on Philippians 1:9 . The emphasis lies not on ÏληÏÏθ . (F. Nitzsch, Hofmann), but on the object (comp. Romans 15:14 ; Romans 1:29 , al .), which gives to the further elucidation in Colossians 1:9-10 its specific definition of contents.
Ïὴν á¼Ïίγν . Ïοὺ θελ . αá½Ïοῦ ] with the knowledge of His will , accusative, as in Philippians 1:11 ; αá½Ïοῦ applies to God as the subject, to whom prayer and supplication are addressed. The context in Colossians 1:10 shows that by the θÎλημα is meant, not the counsel of redemption (Ephesians 1:9 ; Chrysostom, Oecumenius, Theophylact, and many others, including Huther and Dalmer), but, doubtless (Matthew 6:10 ), that which God wills in a moral respect (so Theodoret, who makes out a contrast with the νομικαá¿Ï ÏαÏαÏηÏήÏεÏιν ). Comp. Romans 2:18 ; Romans 12:2 ; Ephesians 5:17 ; Ephesians 6:6 ; Colossians 4:12 . The distinction between γνῶÏÎ¹Ï and á¼ÏίγνÏÏÎ¹Ï , which both here and also in Colossians 1:10 ; Colossians 2:2 ; Colossians 3:10 , is the knowledge which grasps and penetrates into the object, is incorrectly denied by Olshausen. See on Ephesians 1:17 .
á¼Î½ ÏάÏῠκ . Ï . λ .] instrumental definition of manner, how, namely, this ÏληÏÏθá¿Î½Î±Î¹ Ïὴν á¼Ïίγν . Ï . θελ . αá½Ïοῦ (a knowledge which is to be the product not of mere human mental activity, but of objectively divine endowment by the Holy Spirit) must be brought about: by every kind of spiritual wisdom and insight , by the communication of these from God; comp. on Ephesians 1:8 . A combination with the following ÏεÏιÏαÏá¿Ïαι (comp. Colossians 4:5 : á¼Î½ ÏοÏίᾳ ÏεÏÎ¹Ï .), such as Hofmann suggests, is inappropriate, because the two parts of the whole intercession stand to one another in the relation of the divine ethical foundation , (Colossians 1:9 ), and of the corresponding practical conduct of life (Colossians 1:10 f.); hence the latter portion is most naturally and emphatically headed by the expression of this Christian practice, the ÏεÏιÏαÏá¿Ïαι , to which are then subjoined its modal definitions in detail. Accordingly, ÏεÏιÏαÏá¿Ïαι is not, with Hofmann, to be made dependent on Ïοῦ θελήμ . αá½Ïοῦ and taken as its contents, but Ï . θελ . Ï . Î . is to be left as an absolute idea, as in Colossians 4:12 . On ÏÎ½ÎµÏ Î¼Î±ÏικÏÏ , proceeding from the Holy Spirit , [16] comp. Rom 1:11 ; 1 Corinthians 2:13 ; 1 Corinthians 12:1 ; Ephesians 1:3 ; Ephesians 5:19 , et al . The ÏÏνεÏÎ¹Ï is the insight , in a theoretical and (comp. on Mark 12:33 ) practical respect, depending upon judgment and inference, Ephesians 3:4 ; 2 Timothy 2:7 . For the opposite of the pneumatic ÏÏνεÏÎ¹Ï , see 1 Corinthians 1:19 . It is related to the ÏοÏία as the special to the general , since it is peculiarly the expression of the intelligence in the domain of truth, [17] while the ΣÎΦÎÎ concerns the collective faculties of the mind, the activities of knowledge, willing, and feeling, the tendency and working of which are harmoniously subservient to the recognised highest aim, if the wisdom is ÏÎ½ÎµÏ Î¼Î±Ïική ; its opposite is the ΣÎΦÎΠΣÎΡÎÎÎÎ (2 Corinthians 1:12 ; James 3:15 ), being of man, and not of God, in its aim and efforts. According as ΦΡÎÎÎΣÎÏ is conceived subjectively or objectivized, the ΣÎÎÎΣÎÏ may be considered either as synonymous with it (Ephesians 1:8 ; Daniel 2:21 ; Plat. Crat . p. 411 A), or as an attribute of it ( Sir 1:4 : ÏÏνεÏÎ¹Ï ÏÏονήÏεÏÏ ).
[16] Hence ἡ á¼Î½Ïθεν ÏοÏία , James 3:15 ; James 3:17 . The predicate, although in the case of divine endowment with ÏοÏία and ÏÏνεÏÎ¹Ï obvious of itself (as Hofmann objects), was yet all the more apposite for expressly bringing the point into prominence, the greater the danger which threatened Colossae from non-divine, fleshly wisdom; comp. Colossians 2:23 .
Colossians 1:10 . The practical aim [18] which that ÏληÏÏθá¿Î½Î±Î¹ κ . Ï . λ . is to accomplish; á¼Îµá½¶ Ïá¿ ÏίÏÏει Ïá½Î¶ÎµÏÎ³Î½Ï Ïι Ïὴν ÏολιÏείαν , Chrysostom. The Vulgate renders correctly: ut ambuletis (in opposition to Hofmann, see on Colossians 1:9 ).
á¼Î¾Î¯ÏÏ Ïοῦ ÎºÏ ÏÎ¯Î¿Ï ] so that your behaviour may stand in morally appropriate relation to your belonging to Christ. Comp. Romans 16:2 ; Ephesians 4:1 ; Php 1:27 ; 1 Thessalonians 2:12 ; 3 John 1:6 . The genitive (and in the N. T. such is always used with á¼Î¾Î¯ÏÏ ) does not even “perhaps” (Hofmann) belong to the following Îµá¼°Ï Ï . á¼ÏεÏκ ., especially as á¼ÏεÏκεία , in the Greek writers and in Philo (see Loesner, p. 361), stands partly with, partly without, a genitival definition, and the latter is here quite obvious of itself. Such a combination would be an unnecessary artificial device. Comp. Plat. Conv . p. 180 D: á¼Î¾Î¯ÏÏ Ïοῦ Îεοῦ .
Îµá¼°Ï Ïá¾¶Ïαν á¼ÏεÏκείαν ] on behalf of every kind of pleasing , that is, in order to please Him in every way. The word only occurs here in the N. T., but the apostle is not on that account to be deprived of it (Holtzmann); it is found frequently in Polybius, Philo, et al.; also Theophr. Char . 5; LXX. Proverbs 31:30 (Proverbs 30:30 ); Symmachus, Psalms 80:12 . On Ïá¾¶Ïαν á¼Ï . comp. Polybius, xxxi. 26. 5: Ïᾶν γÎÎ½Î¿Ï á¼ÏεÏÎºÎµÎ¯Î±Ï ÏÏοÏÏεÏÏÎ¼ÎµÎ½Î¿Ï . Among the Greeks, á¼ÏεÏκεία (to be accentuated thus, see Winer, p. 50 [E. T. 57]; Buttmann, Neut. Gr . p. 11 [E. T. 12]) bears, for the most part, the sense of seeking to please . Comp. Proverbs 31:30 : ÏÎµÏ Î´Îµá¿Ï á¼ÏεÏκείαι .
á¼Î½ ÏανÏá½¶ á¼Ïγῳ κ . Ï . λ .] There now follow three expositions , in order to define more precisely the nature and mode of the ÏεÏιÏαÏá¿Ïαι á¼Î¾Î¯ÏÏ Îº . Ï . λ . We must, in considering these, notice the homogeneous plan of the three clauses, each of which commences with a prepositional relation of the participial idea, viz. (1) á¼Î½ ÏανÏá½¶ á¼Ïγῳ κ . Ï . λ ., (2) á¼Î½ ÏάÏá¿ Î´Ï Î½Î¬Î¼ÎµÎ¹ , (3) μεÏá½° ÏαÏá¾¶Ï , and ends with a relation expressed by Îµá¼°Ï , viz. (1) Îµá¼°Ï Ï . á¼Ïίγν . Ï . Îεοῦ , (2) Îµá¼°Ï Ïá¾¶Ï . á½Ïομ . κ . μακÏÎ¿Î¸Ï Î¼ ., (3) Îµá¼°Ï Ïὴν μεÏίδα κ . Ï . λ . The construction would be still more symmetrical if, in the third clause, á¼Î½ ÏάÏá¿ ÏαÏá¾· (Romans 15:32 ) had been written instead of μεÏá½° ÏαÏá¾¶Ï which was easily prevented by the versatility of the apostle’s form of conception.
á¼Î½ ÏανÏá½¶ á¼Ïγῳ á¼Î³Î±Î¸á¿· καÏÏÎ¿Ï . is to be taken together (and then again, αá½Î¾Î±Î½Ïμ . Îµá¼°Ï Ïὴν á¼Ïίγν . Ï . Îεοῦ ), inasmuch as ye by every good work (by your accomplishing every morally good action) bear fruit , as good trees, comp. Matthew 7:17 . But not as if the καÏÏοÏοÏεá¿Î½ and the Ïá½Î¾Î¬Î½ÎµÏθαι were separate things; they take place, as in Colossians 1:6 , jointly and at the same time , although, after the manner of parallelism, a special more precise definition is annexed to each. Moreover, á¼Î½ ÏανÏá½¶ á¼Ïγ . á¼Î³ . is not to be connected with Îµá¼°Ï Ïá¾¶Ïαν á¼ÏεÏκ . (Oecumenius, Theophylact, Erasmus, and others, also Steiger); otherwise we mistake and destroy the symmetrical structure of the passage.
καὶ αá½Î¾Î±Î½Ïμ . Îµá¼°Ï Ï . á¼Ïίγν . Ï . Î .] and , inasmuch as with this moral fruit-bearing at the same time ye increase in respect to the knowledge of God , that is, succeed in knowing Him more and more fully. The living, effective knowledge of God, which is meant by á¼Ïίγν . Ï . Îεοῦ (Colossians 1:6 ; Colossians 3:10 ; Colossians 2:2 ), sustains an ethically necessary action and reaction with practical morality. Just as the latter is promoted by the former, so also knowledge grows through moral practice in virtue of the power of inward experience of the divine life (the ζÏá½´ Ïοῦ Îεοῦ , Ephesians 4:18 ), by which God reveals Himself more and more to the inner man. The fact that here Ïοῦ Îεοῦ generally is said, and not Ïοῦ θελήμαÏÎ¿Ï Îεοῦ repeated, is in keeping with the progressive development set forth; there is something of a climax in it. On Îµá¼°Ï , used of the telic reference, and consequently of the regulative direction of the growth, comp. on Ephesians 4:15 ; 2 Peter 1:8 . The reading Ïá¿ á¼ÏιγνÏÏει Ï . Î . would have to be taken as instrumental , with Olshausen, Steiger, Huther, de Wette, Bleek, who follow it, but would yield after Colossians 1:9 something quite self-evident. We may add that αá½Î¾Î¬Î½ ., with the dative of spiritual increase by something, is frequent in Plato and classic writers.
As to the nominatives of the participles, which are not to be taken with ÏληÏÏθ . (Beza, Bengel, Reiche, and others), but relate to the logical subject of ÏεÏιÏÎ±Ï . á¼Î¾Î¯ÏÏ , comp. on Ephesians 4:2 ; 2 Corinthians 1:7 .
[18] Not to be attached as object of the request immediately to ÏÏοÏÎµÏ ÏÏμενοι , and all that intervenes to be assigned to the interpolator (Holtzmann, p. 85). Yet, according to Holtzmann, p. 123, á¼Î½ ÏανÏá½¶ á¼Ïγῳ down Ïοῦ Îεοῦ is alleged to be simply an interpolated duplicate of ver. 6; in which case, however, it would not be easy to see why καÏÏοÏοÏοÏμενοι was not written, after the precedent of ver. 6, but on the contrary καÏÏοÏοÏοῦνÏÎµÏ .
Colossians 1:11 is co-ordinate with the foregoing á¼Î½ ÏανÏá½¶ á¼Ïγῳ ⦠Îεοῦ .
á¼Î½ ÏάÏá¿ Î´Ï Î½ . Î´Ï Î½Î±Î¼ .] á¼Î½ is instrumental, as in Colossians 1:9 (Ephesians 6:10 ; 2 Timothy 2:1 ); hence not designating that, in the acquiring of which the invigoration is supposed to consist (Hofmann), but: by means of every (moral) power (by its bestowal on God’s part) becoming empowered . Î´Ï Î½Î±Î¼ÏÏ (Lobeck, ad Phryn . p. 605) does not occur in Greek authors, and is only found here and at Hebrews 11:34 , Lachm. in the N. T.; in the LXX. at Ecclesiastes 10:10 ; Daniel 9:27 ; Ps. 67:31; in Aquila; Job 36:9 ; Psalms 64:4 . Paul elsewhere uses á¼Î½Î´Ï ναμοῦν .
καÏá½° Ïὸ κÏάÏÎ¿Ï Ïá¿Ï δÏξ . αá½Ï .] according to the might of His majesty; with this divine might (see as to κÏάÏÎ¿Ï on Ephesians 1:19 ), through the powerful influence of which that strengthening is to be imparted to them, it is also to be correspondent and thereby its eminent strength and efficacy are characterized ( καÏά in Ephesians 1:19 has another sense). Comp. 2 Thessalonians 2:9 ; Philippians 3:21 . And Ïὸ κÏάÏÎ¿Ï Ï . δÏξ . αá½Ï . is not His glorious power (Luther, Castalio, Beza, and others; also Flatt and Bähr), against which αá½Ïοῦ should have been a sufficient warning; but Ïὸ κÏάÏÎ¿Ï is the appropriate attribute of the divine majesty (of the glorious nature of God). Comp. Ephesians 3:16 ; Sir 18:5 . The κÏάÏÎ¿Ï therefore is not the glory of God (Böhmer), but the latter has the former, and the δÏξα is not to be referred to a single aspect of the divine greatness (Grotius: power; Huther: love ), but to its glorious whole . Comp. on Romans 6:4 .
Îµá¼°Ï Ïá¾¶Ïαν á½Ïομ . κ . μακÏοθ .] in respect to every endurance (in affliction, persecution, temptation, and the like, comp. Romans 5:3 ; 2 Corinthians 1:6 ; 2 Corinthians 6:4 ; James 1:3 f.; Luke 8:15 ; Romans 2:7 , et al .) and long-suffering (towards the offenders and persecutors), that is, so as to be able to exercise these virtues in every way by means of that divine strengthening. The distinction of Chrysostom: μακÏÎ¿Î¸Ï Î¼Îµá¿ ÏÎ¹Ï ÏÏá½¸Ï á¼ÎºÎµÎ¯Î½Î¿Ï Ï Î¿á½Ï Î´Ï Î½Î±Ïὸν καὶ á¼Î¼ÏναÏθαι · á½ÏομÎνει δὲ , οá½Ï οὠδÏναÏαι á¼Î¼ÏναÏθαι , is arbitrary. See, on the contrary, for instance, Hebrews 12:2-3 . Others understand it variously; but it is to be observed, that á½Ïομονή expresses the more general idea of endurance, and that μακÏÎ¿Î¸Ï Î¼Î¯Î± , the opposite of which is á½Î¾Ï Î¸Ï Î¼Î¯Î± (Eur. Andr . 729; James 1:19 ) and á½Î¾Ï θÏμηÏÎ¹Ï (Artem. iv. 69), always refers in the N. T. to the relation of patient tolerance towards offenders. Comp. Colossians 3:12 ; Galatians 5:22 ; Romans 2:4 ; Ephesians 4:2 ; also Hebrews 6:12 ; James 5:10 .
μεÏá½° ÏαÏá¾¶Ï ] is joined with Ïá¾¶Ïαν á½Ïομ . κ . μακÏοθ . by Theodoret, Luther, Beza, Castalio, Calvin, Grotius, Calovius, Bengel, Heinrichs, and many others, including Olshausen, Bähr, Steiger, de Wette, Baumgarten-Crusius, Dalmer, so that the true, joyful patience (comp. Colossians 1:24 ) is denoted. But the symmetry of the passage (see on Colossians 1:10 ), in which the two previous participles are also preceded by a prepositional definition, points so naturally to the connection with what follows (Syr., Chrysostom, Oecumenius, Theophylact, Erasmus, Estius, and others, including Lachmann, Tischendorf, Böhmer, Huther, Ewald, Ellicott, Bleek, Hofmann), that it cannot be abandoned without arbitrariness. Even in that case, indeed, the thought of joyful patience, which is certainly apostolic (Romans 5:3 ; 1 Peter 1:6 ; Romans 12:12 ; comp. Matthew 5:12 ), is not lost, when the intercession rises from patience to joyful thanksgiving . Observe also the deliberate juxtaposition of μεÏá½° ÏαÏá¾¶Ï Îµá½ÏαÏιÏÏ .
Colossians 1:12 . While ye give thanks with joyfulness , etc., a third accompanying definition of ÏεÏιÏαÏá¿Ïαι á¼Î¾Î¯ÏÏ Îº . Ï . λ . (Colossians 1:10 ), co-ordinate with the two definitions preceding, and not to be connected with οὠÏÎ±Ï Ïμεθα κ . Ï . λ . (Chrysostom, Theophylact, Calvin: “iterum redit ad gratulationem,” Calovius, Böhmer, Baumgarten-Crusius).
Ïá¿· ÏαÏÏί ] of Jesus Christ; comp. Colossians 1:13 , and Ïοῦ ÎÏ ÏÎ¯Î¿Ï in Colossians 1:10 , not: “the Father absolutely ” (Hofmann). It is always in Paul’s writings to be gathered from the context, whose Father God is to be understood as being (even at Ephesians 1:17 ); never does he name God absolutely ( in abstracto ) á½ ÏαÏÎ®Ï . Comp. Colossians 1:3 , which, however, is held by Holtzmann to be the original, suggesting a repetition by the editor at our passage, in spite of the fact that the two passages have different subjects. Just as little does Îµá¼°Ï Ïὴν μεÏίδα κ . Ï . λ . betray itself as an interpolation from Ephesians 1:18 ; Ephesians 1:11 (Holtzmann), seeing that, on the one hand, the expression at our passage is so wholly peculiar, and, on the other hand, the idea of κληÏονομία is so general in the N. T. Comp. especially Acts 26:18 . [19]
Ïá¿· ἱκανÏÏανÏι κ . Ï . λ .] Therein lies the ground of the thanksgiving, quippe qui , etc. God has made us fit ( á¼¡Î¼á¾¶Ï applies to the letter-writers and readers, so far as they are Christians ) for a share in the Messianic salvation through the light , inasmuch as, instead of the darkness which previously prevailed over us, He has by means of the gospel brought to us the á¼Î»Î®Î¸ÎµÎ¹Î± , of which light is the distinctive element and the quickening and saving principle (Ephesians 5:9 ) of the Christian constitution both in an intellectual and ethical point of view (Acts 26:18 ); hence Christians are children of the light ( Eph 5:8 ; 1 Thessalonians 5:5 ; Luke 16:8 ). Comp. Romans 13:12 ; 2Co 6:14 ; 1 Peter 2:9 . In Christ the light had attained to personal manifestation (John 1:4 ff; John 3:9 ; John 8:12 ; Matthew 4:16 , et al .), as the personal revelation of the divine nature itself (1 John 1:5 ), and the gospel was the means of its communication (Ephesians 3:9 ; Hebrews 6:4 ; 2 Corinthians 4:4 ; Acts 26:23 , et al .) to men, who without this enlightenment were unfit for the Messianic salvation (Ephesians 2:1 ff; Ephesians 4:18 ; Ephesians 5:11 ; Eph 6:12 ; 1 Thessalonians 5:4 , et al .). The instrumental definition á¼Î½ Ïá¿· ÏÏÏί is placed at the end , in order that it may stand out with special emphasis; hence, also, the relative sentence which follows refers to this very element. An objection has been wrongly urged against our view (which is already adopted by Chrysostom, Oecumenius, Theophylact; comp. Estius and others, including Flatt and Steiger), that Paul must have used Ïνεῦμα instead of Ïá¿¶Ï (see Olshausen). The ἱκανοῦν á¼Î½ Ïá¿· ÏÏÏί is, indeed, nothing else than the καλεá¿Î½ Îµá¼°Ï Ïὸ Ïá¿¶Ï (1 Peter 2:9 ) conceived in respect of its moral efficacy, and the result thereof on the part of man is the εἶναι Ïá¿¶Ï á¼Î½ ÎºÏ Ïίῳ (Ephesians 5:8 ), or the εἶναι Ï á¼±á½¸Î½ Ïοῦ ÏÏÏÏÏ (1 Thessalonians 5:5 ; John 12:36 ), á½¡Ï ÏÏÏÏá¿ÏÎµÏ á¼Î½ κÏÏμῳ (Philippians 2:15 ). But the light is a power; for it is Ïὸ Ïá¿¶Ï Ïá¿Ï ζÏá¿Ï (John 8:12 ), has its armour (Romans 13:12 ), produces its fruit (Ephesians 5:9 ), effects the Christian á¼Î»ÎγÏειν (Ephesians 5:13 ), endurance in the conflict of affliction (Hebrews 10:32 ), etc. á¼Î½ Ïá¿· ÏÏÏί is usually connected with Ïοῦ κλήÏÎ¿Ï Ïῶν á¼Î³Î¯Ïν , so that this κλá¿ÏÎ¿Ï is described as existing or to be found in light, as the kingdom of light; in which case we may think either of its glory (Beza and others, Böhmer, Huther), or of its purity and perfection (Olshausen, de Wette, and Dalmer) as referred to. But although the connecting article Ïοῦ might be wanting, and the κλá¿ÏÎ¿Ï Ï . á¼Î³ . á¼Î½ Ïá¿· ÏÏÏί might thus form a single conception, it may be urged as an objection that the heritage meant cannot be the temporal position of Christians, but only the future blessedness of the Messianic glorious kingdom; comp. Colossians 1:13 , Ïὴν βαÏιλ . Ïοῦ Ï á¼±Î¿á¿¦ . Hence not á¼Î½ Ïá¿· ÏÏÏί , but possibly á¼Î½ ÏῠδÏξῠ, á¼Î½ ÏῠζÏá¿ , á¼Î½ Ïοá¿Ï οá½Ïανεá¿Ï , or the like, would be a fitting definition of κλá¿ÏÎ¿Ï , which, however, already has in Ïῶν á¼Î³Î¯Ïν its definite description (comp. Ephesians 1:18 ; Acts 20:32 ; Acts 26:18 ). Just as little for the same reason, and because Ï . μεÏίδα already carries with it its own definition (share in the κλá¿ÏÎ¿Ï ) is á¼Î½ Ïá¿· ÏÏÏί to be made dependent on Ïὴν μεÏίδα , whether á¼Î½ be taken locally (Bengel: “Lux est regnum Dei, habentque fideles in hoc regno partem beatam”) or as in Acts 8:21 (Ewald), in which case Hofmann finds the sphere expressed (comp. also Bleek), where the saints have got their peculiar possession assigned to them , so that the being in light stands related to the future glory as that which is still in various respects conditioned stands to plenitude as if κλá¿ÏÎ¿Ï (comp. on Acts 26:18 ) had not already the definite and full eschatological sense of the possession of eternal glory. This κλá¿ÏÎ¿Ï , of which the Christians are possessors ( Ïῶν á¼Î³Î¯Ïν ), ideally before the Parousia, and thereafter really, is the theocratic designation ( × ××× ) of the properly of the Messianic kingdom (see on Galatians 3:18 ; Ephesians 1:11 ), and the ÎÎΡá¿Ï ( ×××§ ) ΤÎῦ ÎÎÎΡÎÎ¥ is the share of individuals [20] in the same. Comp. Sir 44:23 .
[19] The mode in which Acts 26:18 comes into contact as regards thought and expression with Colossians 1:12-14 , may be sufficiently explained by the circumstance that in Acts 26:0 also Paul is the speaker. Holtzmann justly advises caution with reference to the apparent echoes of the Book of Acts in general, as Luke originally bears the Pauline stamp.
[20] Comp. also Bleek. Hofmann incorrectly says that Ïοῦ κληÏοῦ serves only to designate the μεÏÎ¯Ï as destined for special possession. In that case, at least, the qualitative genitive of the abstract must have been put Ïá¿Ï κληÏÎ¿Î½Î¿Î¼Î¯Î±Ï , as in Psalms 16:5 ). But the concrete Ïοῦ κλήÏÎ¿Ï Ï . á¼Î³ . is, as the literal sense of μεÏÎ¯Ï , portio, most naturally suggests, the genitivus partitivus (G. totius ), so that the individual is conceived as μεÏίÏÎ·Ï of the κλá¿ÏÎ¿Ï of the saints, in which he for his part ÏÏ Î¼Î¼ÎµÏÎκει .
Colossians 1:13 . A more precise elucidation of the divine benefit previously expressed by Ïá¿· ἱκανÏÏανÏι ⦠ÏÏÏί . This verse forms the transition, by which Paul is led on to the instructions as to Christ, which he has it in view to give down to Colossians 1:20 . [21]
á¼Îº Ïá¿Ï á¼Î¾Î¿Ï Ï . Ïοῦ ÏÎºÎ¿Ï .] Ïοῦ ÏÎºÎ¿Ï . is not genitive of apposition (Hofmann), but, corresponding to the Îµá¼°Ï Ïὴν βαÏιλείαν that follows, genitive of the subject: out of the power, which darkness has . The latter, as the influential power of non-Christian humanity (of the κÏÏÎ¼Î¿Ï , which is ruled by the devil, Ephesians 2:2 ), is personified; its essence is the negation of the intellectual and ethical divine á¼Î»Î®Î¸ÎµÎ¹Î± , and the affirmation of the opposite. Comp. Luke 22:53 ; Matthew 4:16 ; Acts 26:18 ; Romans 13:12 ; Ephesians 5:8 ; Ephesians 6:12 , et al . The act of the á¼á¿¤á¿¥ÏÏαÏο has taken place by means of the conversion to Christ, which is the work of God , Romans 8:29 f.; Ephesians 2:4 ff. It is to be observed, that the expression á¼Îº Ï . á¼Î¾Î¿Ï Ï . Ï . ÏκÏÏÎ¿Ï Ï is chosen as the correlative of á¼Î½ Ïá¿· ÏÏÏί in Colossians 1:12 .
καὶ μεÏÎÏÏηÏεν ] The matter is to be conceived locally ( Îµá¼°Ï á¼ÏεÏον ÏÏÏον , Plat. Legg . vi. p. 762 B), so that the deliverance from the power of darkness appears to be united with the removing away into the kingdom, etc. Comp. Plat. Rep . p. 518 A: á¼Îº Ïε ÏÏÏá½¸Ï Îµá¼°Ï ÏκÏÏÎ¿Ï Î¼ÎµÎ¸Î¹ÏÏαμÎνÏν καὶ á¼Îº ÏκÏÏÎ¿Ï Ï Îµá¼°Ï Ïá¿¶Ï .
Îµá¼°Ï Ïὴν βαÏιλ . κ . Ï . λ ., that is, into the kingdom of the Messiah , Eph 5:5 ; 2 Peter 1:11 ; for this and nothing else is meant by ἡ βαÏιλεία ΧÏιÏÏοῦ ( Ïοῦ Îεοῦ , Ïῶν οá½Ïανῶν ) in all passages of the N. T. Comp. Colossians 4:11 ; and see on Rom 14:17 ; 1 Corinthians 4:20 ; Matthew 3:2 ; Matthew 6:10 . The aorist μεÏÎÏÏ . is to be explained by the matter being conceived proleptically ( Ïá¿ Î³á½°Ï á¼Î»Ïίδι á¼ÏÏθημεν , Romans 8:24 ), as something already consummated (comp. on á¼Î´ÏξαÏε , Romans 8:30 ). Thus the kingdom which is nigh is, by means of their fellowship of life with their Lord (Ephesians 2:6 ), as certain to the redeemed as if they were already translated into it. The explanation which refers it to the Christian church (so still Heinrichs, Bähr, Huther, and most expositors) as contrasted with the κÏÏÎ¼Î¿Ï , is just as unhistorical as that which makes it the invisible inward, ethical kingdom (see especially Olshausen, following an erroneous view of Luke 17:21 ), to which also Bleek and Hofmann ultimately come. Certainly all who name Christ their Lord are under this king (Hofmann); but this is not yet his βαÏιλεία ; that belongs to the future αἰÏν , Ephesians 5:5 ; 1Co 6:9 f., 1 Corinthians 15:24 ; 1 Corinthians 15:50 ; Galatians 5:21 , et al.;John 18:36 .
Ïá¿Ï á¼Î³Î¬ÏÎ·Ï Î±á½Ïοῦ ] in essential meaning, indeed, nothing else than Ïοῦ Ï á¼±Î¿á¿¦ αá½Ïοῦ Ïοῦ á¼Î³Î±ÏηÏοῦ (Matthew 3:17 ; Matthew 17:5 , et al .), or Ïοῦ Ï á¼±Î¿á¿¦ Ïοῦ á¼Î³Î±ÏηÏοῦ αá½Ïοῦ (Matthew 12:18 ; Mark 12:6 ), but more prominently singling out the attribute (Buttmann, Neut. Gr . p. 141 [E. T. 162]): of the Son of His love , that is, of the Son who is the object of His love, genitive of the subject . Comp. Genesis 35:18 : Ï á¼±á½¸Ï á½Î´ÏÎ½Î·Ï Î¼Î¿Ï . Entirely parallel is Ephesians 1:6 f.: á¼Î½ Ïá¿· ἠγαÏημÎνῳ , á¼Î½ á¾§ á¼Ïομεν κ . Ï . λ . Augustine, de Trin . xv. 19, understood it as genitive of origin , making á¼Î³Î¬Ïη αá½Ïοῦ denote the divine substantia . [22] So again Olshausen, in whose view the expression is meant to correspond to the Johannine ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÏ . This is entirely without analogy in the N. T. mode of conception, according to which not the procreation (Colossians 1:15 ), but the sending of the Son is referred to the divine love as its act; and the love is not the essence of God (in the metaphysical sense), but His essential disposition (the essence in the ethical sense), even in 1Jn 4:8 ; 1 John 4:16 . Consequently it might be explained: “of the Son, whom His love has sent ,” if this were suggested by the context; so far, however, from this being the case, the language refers to the exalted Christ who rules ( βαÏιλείαν ). The expression itself, á½ Î¥á¼¹á¿¸Ï Î¤á¿Ï á¼ÎÎÎ . Îá½Î¤Îῦ , is found in the N. T. only here, but could not he chosen more suitably or with deeper feeling to characterize the opposite of the God-hated element of ÏκÏÏÎ¿Ï , which in its nature is directly opposed to the divine love. The view, that it is meant to be intimated that the sharing in the kingdom brings with it the ΥἹÎÎÎΣÎÎ (Huther, de Wette), imports what is not expressed, and anticipates the sequel. Holtzmann without ground, and unfairly, asserts that in comparison with Ephesians 1:6 our passage presents “stereotyped modes of connection and turns of an ecclesiastical orator,” under which he includes the Hebraizing á½ Î¥á¼¹á¿¸Ï Î¤á¿Ï á¼ÎÎÎ ÎÏ Îá½Î¤ . as being thoroughly un-Pauline as if the linguistic resources of the apostle could not even extend to an expression which is not indeed elsewhere used by him, but is in the highest degree appropriate to a specially vivid sense of the divine act of love; something sentimental in the best sense.
[21] This Chiristological outburst runs on in the form of purely positive statement, although having already in view doctrinal dangers of the kind in Colossae. According to Holtzmann, the Christology belongs to the compiler; the whole passage, vv. 14 20, is forced and without motive, and it is only in ver. 21 that we find the direct sequel to ver. 13. The latter statement is incorrect. And why should this excursus, as a grand basis for all the exhortations and warnings that follow, be held without due motive? Holtzmann forms too harsh a judgment as to the whole passage Colossians 1:9-23 , when he declares it incompatible with any strict exegetical treatment.
[22] Theodore of Mopsuestia finds in the expression the contrast that Christ was the Son of God οὠÏÏÏει , á¼Î»Î»Ê¼ á¼Î³Î¬Ïá¿ Ïá¿Ï Ï á¼±Î¿Î¸ÎµÏÎ¯Î±Ï .
Colossians 1:14 . Not a preliminary condition of the Ï á¼±Î¿Î¸ÎµÏία (de Wette), nor the benefit of which Christians become partakers in the kingdom of the Son of God (Huther; against which it may be urged that the βαÏιλεία does not denote the kingdom of the church ); nor yet a mark of the deliverance from darkness having taken place (Ritschl in the Jahrb. f. Deutsche Theol . 1863, p. 513), since this deliverance necessarily coincides with the translation into the kingdom; but it is the abiding ( á¼Ïομεν , habemus , not accepimus ) relation, in which that transference into the kingdom of God has its causal basis . The ransoming (from the punishment of sin, see the explanatory Ïὴν á¼ÏεÏιν Ïῶν á¼Î¼Î±ÏÏ .) we have in Christ , inasmuch as He, by the shedding of His blood as the purchase-price (see on 1 Corinthians 6:20 ; Galatians 3:13 ; Galatians 4:5 ), has given Himself as a λÏÏÏον (Matthew 20:28 ; Mark 10:45 ; 1 Timothy 2:6 ); and this redemption, effected by His ἱλαÏÏήÏιον (Romans 3:21 ff.), remains continually in subsistence and efficacy. Hence: á¼Î½ á¾§ , which specifies wherein the subjective á¼Ïομεν is objectively based, as its causa meritoria (Romans 3:24 ). Comp., moreover, on Ephesians 1:7 , whence διὰ Ïοῦ αἵμαÏÎ¿Ï Î±á½Ïοῦ has found its way hither as a correct gloss. But the deleting of this addition by no means implies that we should make Ïῶν á¼Î¼Î±ÏÏιῶν also belong to Ïὴν á¼ÏολÏÏÏÏÏιν (Hofmann), as in Hebrews 9:15 , especially as Paul elsewhere only uses á¼ÏολÏÏÏÏÏÎ¹Ï either absolutely (Romans 3:24 ; 1 Corinthians 1:30 ; Ephesians 1:7 ; Ephesians 4:30 ) or with the genitive of the subject (Romans 8:23 ; Ephesians 1:14 ). The expression á¼ÏεÏÎ¹Ï Ï . á¼Î¼Î±ÏÏ . is not used by him elsewhere in the epistles (comp., however, Romans 4:7 ), but at Acts 13:38 ; Acts 26:28 . Holtzmann too hastily infers that the writer had read the Synoptics.
Colossians 1:15 . As to Colossians 1:15-20 , see Schleiermacher in the Stud. u. Krit . 1832, p. 497 ff. ( Werke z. Theol . II. p. 321 ff.), and, in opposition to his ethical interpretation (of Christ as the moral Reformer of the world), Holzhausen in the Tüb. Zeitschr . 1832, 4, p. 236 ff.; Osiander, ibid . 1833, 1, 2; Bähr, appendix to Komment . p. 321 ff.; Bleek on Hebrews 1:2 . See generally also Hofmann, Schriftbew . I. p. 153 ff., II. 1, p. 357 ff.; Beyschlag in the Stud. u. Krit . 1860, p. 446 f.
After having stated, in Colossians 1:14 , what we have in Christ (whose state of exaltation he has in view, see Colossians 1:13 , Ïὴν βαÏιλείαν ), Paul now, continuing his discourse by an epexegetical relative clause, depicts what Christ is , namely, as regards His divine dignity having in view the influences of the false teachers, who with Gnostic tendencies depreciated this dignity. The plan of the discourse is not tripartite (originator of the physical creation, Colossians 1:15 f.; maintainer of everything created, Colossians 1:17 ; relation to the new moral creation, Colossians 1:18 ff., so Bähr, while others divide differently [23] ), but bipartite , in such a way that Colossians 1:15-17 set forth the exalted metaphysical relation of Christ to God and the world , and then Colossians 1:18 ff., His historical relation of dignity to the church . [24] This division, which in itself is logically correct (whereas Colossians 1:17 is not suited, either as regards contents or form, to be a separate, co-ordinate part), is also externally indicated by the two confirmatory clauses á½ Ïι á¼Î½ αá½Ïá¿· κ . Ï . λ . in Colossians 1:16 and Colossians 1:19 , by which the two preceding [25] affirmations in Colossians 1:15 and Colossians 1:18 are shown to be the proper parts of the discourse. Others (see especially Bengel, Schleiermacher, Hofmann, comp. also Gess, Pers. Chr . p. 77) have looked upon the twice-expressed á½ Ï á¼ÏÏιν in Colossians 1:15 and Colossians 1:18 as marking the beginning of the two parts. But this would not be justifiable as respects the second á½Ï á¼Î£Î¤ÎÎ ; for the main idea, which governs the whole effusion, Colossians 1:15-20 , is the glory of the dominion of the Son of God , in the description of which Paul evidently begins the second part with the words καὶ αá½ÏÏÏ , Colossians 1:18 , passing over from the general to the special, namely, to His government over the church to which He has attained by His resurrection. On the details, see below.
á½ Ï á¼ÏÏιν κ . Ï . λ .] It is to be observed that Paul has in view Christ as regards His present existence, consequently as regards the presence and continuance of His state of exaltation (comp. on. Colossians 1:13-14 ); hence he affirms, not what Christ was , but what He is . On this á¼ÏÏίν , comp. Colossians 1:17-18 , and 2 Corinthians 4:4 . Therefore not only the reference to Christ’s temporal manifestation (Calvin, Grotius, Heinrichs, Baumgarten-Crusius, and others), but also the limitation to Christ’s divine nature or the Logos (Calovius, Estius, Wolf, and many others, including Bähr, Steiger, Olshausen, Huther) is incorrect. The only correct reference is to His whole person , which, in the divine-human state of its present heavenly existence, is continually that which its divine nature this nature considered in and by itself was before the incarnation; so that, in virtue of the identity of His divine nature, the same predicates belong to the exalted Christ as to the Logos. See Philippians 2:6 ; John 17:5 .
Colossians 1:15 f. is, moreover, strikingly opposed to that assumption of a world without beginning (Schleiermacher, Rothe).
[23] e.g . Calovius: “Redemptoris descriptio a Deitale: ab opere creationis,” and “quod caput ecclesiae sit.” Comp. Schmid, Bibl. Theol. II. p. 299 f.
[24] Olshausen brings the two divisions under the exegetically erroneous point of view that, in vv. 15 17, Christ is described without reference to the incarnation, and in vv. 18 20, with reference to the same.
[25] In conformity with the confirmatory function of the á½ Ïι , according to which not the clause introduced by á½ Ïι , but the clause which it is to confirm, contains the leading thought, to which á½ Ïι κ . Ï . λ . is logically subordinated. Hence the two parts are not to be begun with the two clauses á½ Ïι á¼Î½ αá½Ïá¿· themselves (so Rich. Schmidt, Paulin. Christol. p. 182), in which case, moreover, ver. 15 is supposed to be quite aloof from this connection a supposition at variance with its even verbally evident association with ver. 16.
[26] Sabatier, p. 290, without reason represents the apostle as in a state of indistinct suspense in regard to his conception of this pre-existence. And Pfleiderer (in Hilgenfeld’s Zeitschr. 1871, p. 533) sees in the pre-existence a subjective product, the consequence, namely, of the fact that Christ is the ideal of the destiny of the human mind, hypostasized in a single person, to which is transferred the eternity and unchanged self-equality of the idea.
[27] This is the chief point of agreement between our Epistle and the Epistle to the Hebrews; and it is explained by the Pauline basis and footing, on which the author of the latter stood. The subsequent ÏÏÏÏÏÏÎ¿ÎºÎ¿Ï ÏÎ±Ï . κÏÎ¯Ï ., however, has nothing to do with ÏÏÏÏÏÏÎ¿ÎºÎ¿Ï , Hebrews 1:6 , where the absolute word is rather to be explained in accordance with Romans 8:29 . We make this remark in opposition to Holtzmann, according to whom “the autor ad Ephesios as to his Christology walks in the track opened by the Epistle to the Hebrews.” Other apparent resemblances to this letter are immaterial, and similar ones can be gathered from all the Pauline letters.
[28] According to Hofmann ( Schriftbew.), the expression is also intended to imply that the existence of all created things was brought about through Him. But this is only stated in what follows, and is not yet contained in ÏÏÏÏÏÏÎ¿ÎºÎ¿Ï by itself, which only posits the origin of Christ (as λÏÎ³Î¿Ï ÏÏοÏοÏικÏÏ ) in His temporal relation to the creature; and this point is the more purely to he adhered to, seeing that Christ Himself does not belong to the category of the κÏίÏÎ¹Ï Calvin also has understood it as Hofmann does; comp. also Gess, v. d. Pers. Chr. p. 79, and Beyschlag, p. 446, according to whom Christ is at the same time to be designated as the principle of the creature, whose origin bears in itself that of the latter.
[29] Comp. Stallb. ad Plat. Rep. p. 608 C. The article would necessarily be added, as Ïá¾¶Ïα ἡ κÏίÏÎ¹Ï , Jdt 16:14 , or ἡ Ïá¾¶Ïα κÏίÏÎ¹Ï , 3Ma 6:2 , or ἡκÏίÏÎ¹Ï Ïá¾¶Ïα . Comp. also ὠλη ἡ κÏίÏÎ¹Ï , Wis 19:6 .
[30] Hofmann, Schriftbew. I. p. 156: “In relation to all that is created, Christ occupies the position which a first-born has towards the household of his father.” Essentially similar is his view in his Heil. Schr. N. T., p. 16, where Ï . κÏÎ¯Ï . is held to mean “all creation,” and to signify “all that is created in its unity,” which is also the opinion of Rich. Schmidt, Paul. Christol. p. 211. The interpretation of Hofmann (comp. Gess, Pers. Chr. p. 79) is incorrect, because there would thereby be necessarily affirmed a homogeneous relation of origin for Christ and all the κÏίÏÎ¹Ï The κÏίÏÎ¹Ï would stand to Christ in the relation of the μεÏαÏεÏÎ¸ÎµÎ¯Ï , to the ÏÏÏÏÏÏÎµÎºÎ¹Ï , of the á¼ÏÎ¯Î³Î¿Î½Î¿Ï to the ÏÏÏÏÏÎ³Î¿Î½Î¿Ï . Hofmann indeed (Heil. Schr. in loc.) opines that ÏάÏÎ·Ï ÎºÏίÏεÏÏ is simply genitive “of the definition of relation.” But this, in fact, explains nothing, because the question remains, What relation is meant to be defined by the genitive? The ÏÏÏÏÏÏÎ¿ÎºÎ¿Ï ÏάÏÎ·Ï ÎºÏίÏεÏÏ is not at all to be got over so easily as it is by Hofmann, namely, with a grammatically erroneous explanation of the anarthrous Ïá¾¶Ïα κÏίÏÎ¹Ï , and with appeal to Psalms 89:28 (where, in fact, ÏÏÏÏÏÏÎ¿ÎºÎ¿Ï stands without genitive, and ×Ö¼Ö°××Ìר in the sense of the first rank).
[31] How much, however, the designations ÏÏÏÏÏκÏιÏÏÎ¿Ï , κÏίÏμα , κÏίζειν κ . Ï . λ ., as applied to the origin of the Son, were in use among the Alexandrians (following Proverbs 8:22 , where Wisdom says: κÏÏÎ¹Î¿Ï á¼ÎºÏιÏΠμε , comp. Sir 1:4 ; Sir 24:8 f.), may be seen in Gieseler, Kirchengesch. I. 1, p. 327, Exodus 4:0 .
[32] The Socinian doctrine argues thus: “primogenitum unum ex eorum numero, quorum primogenitus est, esse necesse est;” but Christ could not be “unus e rebus conditis creationis veteris,” an assumption which would be Arian; He must consequently belong to the new creation, from which it follows, at the same time, that He does not possess a divine nature. See Catech. Racov. 167, p. 318, ed. Oeder.
[33] Both errors of the Socinians, etc., are already present in Theodore of Mop-suestia, namely, that ÏÏÏÏÏÏÎ¿ÎºÎ¿Ï ÏÎ¬Ï . κÏÎ¯Ï does not stand á¼Ïá½¶ ÏÏÏÎ½Î¿Ï , but á¼Ïá½¶ ÏÏοÏιμήÏεÏÏ and signifies á¼Ïá½¶ ÏÏÏÎ½Î¿Ï ; and that the following á¼Î½ αá½Ïá¿· κ . Ï . λ . does not denote Ïὴν ÏÏÏÏην , but Ïὴν á¼Î½ αá½Ïá¿· γενομÎνην á¼Î½Î¬ÎºÏιÏιν . Comp. also Photius, Amphil. 192.
Colossians 1:16 . For in Him were all things created , the logically correct confirmation of ÏÏÏÏÏÏÎ¿ÎºÎ¿Ï ÏÎ¬Ï . κÏίÏεÏÏ . For if the creation of all things took place in Christ, it is evident that He must stand before the series of created things, and be ÏÏÏÏÏÏÎ¿ÎºÎ¿Ï ÏάÏÎ·Ï ÎºÏίÏεÏÏ .
á¼Î½ αá½Ïá¿· ] is not equivalent to διʼ αá½Ïοῦ (Chrysostom, Oecumenius, Theophylact, Erasmus, Beza, Bleek, and many others), but: on Christ depended (causally) the act of creation, so that the latter was not done independently of Him in a causal connection apart from Him but it had in Him the ground essentially conditioning it. In Him lay, in fact, the potency of life, from which God made the work of creation proceed, inasmuch as He was the personal principle of the divine self-revelation, and therewith the accomplisher of the divine idea of the world. A well-known classical usage to denote the dependence of a state of things, the causality of which is contained in any one . See Bernhardy, p. 210; Kühner, II. 1, p. 403 f.; from the N. T., Winer, p. 364 [E. T. 521]. Not as if the “causa principalis ” of the creation lay in Christ, but the organic causality of the world’s becoming created was in Him; hence the following διʼ αá½Ïοῦ affirms not a different state of things , but the same thing under a varied form of conception and designation, by which it is brought out in greater definiteness. The primary ground of creation is ever God, Rom 11:36 ; 1 Corinthians 8:6 ; Hebrews 11:3 . The speculative interpretation of scholastic theology, which found here the “causa exemplaris ,” according to which the idea omnium rerum was in Christ, is indeed followed in the main again by Beyschlag, as earlier by Kleuker, Böhmer, Bähr, Neander, Schleiermacher, Steiger, Julius Müller, Olshausen (the latter saying: “the Son of God is the intelligible world, the κÏÏÎ¼Î¿Ï Î½Î¿Î·ÏÏÏ , that is, things in their very idea; He bears their essence in Himself”), but is destitute of confirmation from the modes of conception and expression elsewhere in the N. T., and, as á¼ÎºÏίÏθη denotes the historical fact of the having been created, it would require not á¼Î½ αá½Ïá¿· , but á¼Î¾ αá½Ïοῦ , by which the coming forth of the real from the ideal existence in Christ might be expressed. Huther finds the inward connection indicated by á¼Î½ αá½Ïá¿· in the idea, that the eternal essence of the universe is the divine essence itself, which in Christ became man. This idea in itself has no biblical ground; and Paul is speaking here, not of the existence and essence of the universe in Christ, but of the becoming created, which took place in Christ ( á¼Î½ αá½Ïá¿· ζÏá½´ ἦν , John 1:4 ), consequently of a divine act depending on Christ; comp. John 1:3 : ÏÏÏá½¶Ï Î±á½Ïοῦ á¼Î³ÎνεÏο οá½Î´á½² á¼Î½ ὠγÎγονεν ; Hebrews 1:2 ; and Bleek in loc . Lastly, de Wette finds in á¼Î½ besides the instrumental agency at the same time something of a telic idea (comp. also Ewald and Weiss, Bibl. Theol . p. 424 f.); but this blending together of two heterogeneous references is not justified by the διʼ αá½Ïοῦ καὶ Îµá¼°Ï Î±á½ÏÏν that follows.
á¼ÎºÏίÏθη ] physical act of creation; Schleiermacher ought not to have called in question the linguistic usage to this effect, with a view to favour the ethical interpretation of the founding of the church . See Wis 1:14 ; Wis 10:1 ; Wis 11:18 ; Deuteronomy 4:32 ; comp. Genesis 6:7 ; Sir 24:9 , comp. Sir 15:14 ; Jdt 13:18 ; comp. Genesis 1:1 ; 1 Corinthians 11:9 ; Ephesians 3:9 ; Romans 1:25 ; Revelation 10:6 , comp. Revelation 14:7 . The word may have the meaning adopted by Schleiermacher: to obtain its arrangement and constitution (Herod. i. 149, 167, 168; Thuc. i. 100; Aesch. Choeph . 484; Soph. Ant . 1101; Pind. Ol . vi. 116; 3 Esdr. 4:53), and that according to the relative nature of the notion implied in the word condere (comp. Blomf. Gloss, in Aesch. Pers . 294); but not here, where it is correlative with ÏάÏÎ·Ï ÎºÏίÏεÏÏ , and where the quite general and in no way to be restricted Ïá½° ÏάνÏα follows. Throughout the N. T., in general κÏÎ¯Î¶Ï , κÏίÏÎ¹Ï , κÏίÏμα , denote the original bringing forth, never merely the arrangement of that which exists; and even in such passages as Ephesians 2:10 ; Ephesians 2:15 ; Ephesians 4:24 , the relation is conceived, only in a popular manner, as actual creation .
Observe, moreover, the distinction of the tenses: á¼ÎºÏίÏθη , which denotes the act that took place; and then á¼ÎºÏιÏÏαι , which denotes the creation which has taken place and now subsists . See Winer, p. 255 [E. T. 340]; Kühner, II. 1, p. 143 f., and ad Xen. Mem . iii. 1. 4, iii. 7. 7.
Ïá½° ÏάνÏα ] the collective whole , namely, of what is created. This is then specified in a twofold way, as well in regard to place as in regard to nature.
Ïá½° á¼Î½ Ïοá¿Ï οá½Ïανοá¿Ï κ . Ï . λ .] the things to be found in the heavens and those to be found on earth . This is certainly a less exact designation of all created things than that in Revelation 10:6 ( Ïὸν οá½Ïανὸν καὶ Ïá½° á¼Î½ αá½Ïá¿· κ . Ï . λ .; comp. Nehemiah 9:6 ; Genesis 2:1 , et al .), but does not differ from it, as it does not exclude heaven and earth themselves, the constituent elements of which, in the popular view, are included in these two categories. Comp. 1 Chronicles 29:11 . It is incorrect, therefore, to press this expression in opposition to the explanation which refers it to the creation of the world (Wetstein: “non dicit ὠοá½ÏÎ±Î½á½¸Ï ÎºÎ±á½¶ ἡ γῠá¼ÎºÏίÏθη sed Ïá½° ÏάνÏα , etc., quo habitatores significantur, qui reconciliantur,” comp. Heinrichs and others, also Catech. Racov . 132, p. 214, ed. Oeder), and to think, with Schleiermacher, of the kingdom of heaven; but it is arbitrary also, especially after Ïá½° ÏάνÏα , to make the apostle mean primarily the living (Bähr, de Wette) or rational creatures. The expression embraces everything; hence there was neither need for the mention of the lower world , nor, looking at the bipartite form of enumeration, occasion for it (it is otherwise in Philippians 2:10 ; Revelation 5:3 ). The idea that Paul could not have adduced those under the earth as a special class of created beings, because God had not created them with the view of their being under the earth (de Wette), would imply a reflection alien to the vivid flow of the passage before us.
Ïá½° á½ÏαÏá½° κ . Ïá½° á¼ÏÏαÏα ] By the latter is meant the heavenly world of spirits , the angelic commonwealth, as is evident from the more precise enumeration which follows, and not the souls of men (Chrysostom, Theophylact, and others), which, on the contrary, as animating a portion of the á½ÏαÏά , are included among the latter. Theodoret erroneously asserts that even Ïá½° á½ÏαÏά applies to heavenly things (sun, moon, and stars); it applies to everything visible, as in Plat. Phaed . p. 79 A: θῶμεν οá½Î½ , εἰ βοÏλει , á¼Ïη , δÏο εἴδη Ïῶν á½Î½ÏÏν Ïὸ μὲν á½ÏαÏÏν , Ïὸ δὲ á¼ÎµÎ¹Î´ÎÏ .
The á¼ÏÏαÏα are now more precisely specified disjunctively by εἴÏε , sive ⦠sive (put more than twice; comp. Plat. Rep . p. 612 A, 493 D; Sir 41:4 ). As to the four denominations of angels which follow whose difference of rank Hofmann groundlessly denies, [35] understanding thereby merely “ spirits collectively, of whatever name they may be ” see on Ephesians 1:21 ; Romans 8:38 . In accordance with Ephesians 1:21 , where the grades of angels are mentioned in descending order, the arrangement here must be understood so, that the θÏÏνοι are the highest and the ÎºÏ ÏιÏÏηÏÎµÏ the lowest class, the á¼ÏÏαί and the á¼Î¾Î¿Ï Ïίαι being two middle orders lying between these two extremes. At Eph. l.c . Paul names also four grades of the angelic hierarchy; but neither there nor here has he intended to give a complete enumeration of them, for in the former case he omits the θÏÏνοι , and in the latter the Î´Ï Î½Î¬Î¼ÎµÎ¹Ï . The θÏÏνοι are not mentioned elsewhere in the N. T. (nor yet in Ignat. ad Trail . 5), but they occur in the Test. Levi , p. 548, in which they are placed in the seventh heaven ( á¼Î½ á¾§ á¼Îµá½¶ á½Î¼Î½Î¿Î¹ Ïá¿· θεῷ ÏÏοÏÏÎÏονÏαι ), also in Dionys. Areop. Hier. coel . 6 ff., and in the Rabbins (Buxtorf, Lex. Talm . p. 1097; Schoettgen, Hor . p. 808). As regards the expression , the last three denominations are to be taken as abstracts , which represent the respective concretes , and analogously the concrete noun θÏÏνοι is used for those to be found on the thrones (for those enthroned ); comp. Kühner, II. 1, p. 11; Ruhnken, ad Tim . p. 190. In this case the very natural supposition that the angels, whose designation by the term θÏÏνοι must have been in current use , were, in the imagery which gave sensuous embodiment to religious ideas, conceived as on thrones , is not to be called in question (in opposition to Fritzsche, ad Rom . II. p. 226). They were probably conceived as enthroned round the throne of God (comp. Revelation 4:4 ; Revelation 20:4 ). It is to be observed, moreover, generally that Paul presupposes the various classes of angels, which he names, as well known; although we are unacquainted with the details of the case, this much is nevertheless certain, that the apostle was far removed from the dreamy fancies indulged in on this point by the later Rabbins (see Eisenmenger, entdeckt. Judenth . II. p. 374). But very soon after the apostolic age (comp. Hermas, Past . vis. iii. 4), instruction as to ÏοÏοθεÏÎ¯Î±Ï Ïá½°Ï á¼Î³Î³ÎµÎ»Î¹ÎºÎ¬Ï was regarded as teaching for the more perfect . See Ignatius, ad Trall . 5. For the Christian faith there remains and suffices the testimony as to different and distinctively designated stages and categories in the angelic world, while any attempt to ascertain more than is written in Scripture passes into the fanciful domain of theosophy.
With á¼Î¾Î¿Ï Ïίαι is concluded the confirmatory sentence ( á½ Ïι ), so that a full stop is to be placed after á¼Î¾Î¿Ï Ï . With Ïá½° ÏάνÏα begins a new sentence, in which Ïá½° ÏάνÏα and αá½ÏÏÏ correspond to one another; hence a comma only must stand after á¼ÎºÏιÏÏαι . There is no reason for placing (with Lachmann) Ïá½° ÏάνÏα down to á¼ÎºÎºÎ»Î·Ï . in a parenthesis.
Ïá½° ÏάνÏα διʼ αá½Ïοῦ κ . Ï . λ .] a solemn recapitulation , [36] but in such a way that, instead of the act of creation previously mentioned, there is now presented the finished and ready result ( á¼ÎºÏιÏÏαι ); the causal relation which was previously denoted by á¼Î½ is now more precisely indicated as a relation of mediate agency ( διʼ αá½Ïοῦ , comp. 1 Corinthians 8:6 ); then in Îµá¼°Ï Î±á½ÏÏν a new element is added, and the emphasis which in Colossians 1:16 lay on á¼ÎºÏίÏθη , is now laid on Ïá½° ÏάνÏα which stands at the head of the sentence. We cannot say with Hofmann, that by διʼ αá½Ïοῦ and Îµá¼°Ï Î±á½ÏÏν the Son comes to stand in contradistinction to what has been created as Creator , after by á¼Î½ αá½Ïá¿· the creative act has been presented as one that had taken place only not without the Son . By the latter, á¼Î½ αá½Ïá¿· would become too general and indefinite a thought; while διʼ αá½Ïοῦ in fact leaves the Father as the Creator, which He is, and predicates of the Son merely the “causa medians ” of the execution of the work, just as Îµá¼°Ï Î±á½ÏÏν predicates the “causa finalis ” of the same.
Îµá¼°Ï Î±á½ÏÏν ] in reference to Him, for Him , as the aim and end, “in quo Pater acquiescit,” Beza. Comp. Romans 11:36 ; 1 Corinthians 8:6 ; Barnab. Ep . 12: á¼Î½ αá½Ïá¿· Ïá½° ÏάνÏα καὶ Îµá¼°Ï Î±á½ÏÏν . The more exact purport of this relation is apparent from all that follows down to Colossians 1:20 . Everything, namely, is created, in order to be dependent on Christ and to serve His will and aim . [37] Comp. on Ephesians 1:23 ; Ephesians 4:10 ; Philippians 2:9 ff. The final cause of the world, referred in Romans 11:36 to God , is here affirmed of Christ , and with equal right; for He, as He was the organ of God in creation, is the commissioned ruler to whom the ÎºÏ ÏιÏÏÎ·Ï Ïῶν ÏάνÏÏν is committed (Matthew 28:18 ; Php 2:9 ; 1 Corinthians 15:27 ; Hebrews 2:8 ), in order that everything created may have the ethical telic destination of serving Him. [38] More special definitions of the meaning of Îµá¼°Ï Î±á½ÏÏν are without due warrant, and in particular, the often-repeated one: to His glorification (Beza, Flatt, Böhmer, and others); it lays down Christ in general as the legitimus finis (Calvin).
The expositors, who explain the words as referring to the new moral creation, have summoned to their aid all kinds of arbitrary conjectures in detail a remark which applies not merely to Nösselt, Heinrichs, and others, but also to Schleiermacher, who holds (comp. Baumgarten-Crusius) that Ïá½° á¼Î½ Ï . οá½Ï . is everything that belongs to the kingdom of heaven, and ΤᾺ á¼Î ῠΤ . Îá¿Ï everything which belongs to civil order in earthly kingdoms; that ΤᾺ á½Î¡ÎΤΠand ΤᾺ á¼ÎΡÎΤΠapply only to the latter; that the ÎΡÎÎÎÎ Î . Τ . Î . are magisterial offices , and the like.
[35] See, on the other hand, Hahn, Theol. d. N. T. I. p. 292 f.; Philippi, Glaubensl. II. p. 308 f.; Kahnis, Dogm. I. p. 559.
[36] Ewald well says: “Just at this point the discourse breaks forth as if with fresh force, so as once more to express as clearly as possible the whole in all conceivable temporal relations.”
[37] And, if the world was created not merely διʼ αá½Ïοῦ but also Îµá¼°Ï Î±á½ÏÏν , conse-sequently in telic reference to Him, it is certain that with the counsel of creation there was also posited, in prospect of the entry of sin, the counsel of redemption. Comp. Thomasius, Christi Pers. u. Werk, I. p. 196 f.; Julius Müller, Dogm. Abhand. p. 121 ff.
[38] This Îµá¼°Ï Î±á½ÏÏν is wrongly found incompatible with 1 Corinthians 8:6 (see, after Mayerhoff, Baur, and others, especially Holtzmann, p. 219), where, in fact, it is said of the ethical existence of Christians that they exist for God through Christ, inasmuch as the subject of Îµá¼°Ï Î±á½ÏÏν (for God) and of διʼ αá½Ïοῦ (through Christ) is not the universe, but the ἡμεá¿Ï . The relation of subordination between Father and Son would be only done away with at our passage, in the event of its being said of Christ that Ïá½° ÏάνÏα were created á¼Î¾ αá½Ïοῦ . But by á¼Î½ αá½Ïá¿· , and by the more precise definition διʼ αá½Ïοῦ , it is guarded; and the subordination remains unaffected by the circumstance that the Îµá¼°Ï Î±á½ÏÏν is laid down by God for the world as its telic aim. This Îµá¼°Ï Î±á½ÏÏν á¼ÎºÏιÏÏαι is the necessary preliminary condition, on God’s part, to the universal dominion which he has destined for Christ, and which the latter shall one day, at the goal of consummation, hand over to the Father (1 Corinthians 15:24 ; 1 Corinthians 15:28 ). Moreover, what Paul says of the κÏίÏÎ¹Ï in Romans 8:0 is essentially connected with that Îµá¼°Ï Î±á½ÏÏν , which does not go beyond Paul or come at all into opposition to him. The resemblance of our passage to á½ ÏÏá¿¶ÏÎ¿Ï ÎºÎ±á½¶ á½ á¼ÏÏαÏÎ¿Ï , Revelation 1:17 ; Revelation 22:13 , rests upon the Christological basis of their common faith, not upon a dependence of our epistle on the Apocalypse, which would doubtless imply a post-Pauline date (in opposition to Holtzmann, p. 247).
Colossians 1:17 . Îαὶ αá½ÏÏÏ ] which is to be separated from the preceding by a comma only (see on Colossians 1:16 ), places, in contradistinction to the created objects in Colossians 1:16 ( Ïá½° ÏάνÏα ), the subject , the creating self: “ and He Himself, on His part , has an earlier existence than all things, and the collective whole subsists in Him.” Never is αá½ÏÏÏ in the nominative [39] the mere unemphatic “ he ” of the previous subject (de Wette), either in Greek authors or in the N. T., not even in passages such as Buttmann ( Neut. Gr . p. 94 [E. T. 107]) brings forward; see Fritzsche, ad Matth . p. 47; Winer, p. 141 f. [E. T. 187]; Kühner, II. 1, p. 563.
á¼Î Îá½Î¤á¿· ] as in Colossians 1:16 , referring to the causal dependence of the subsistence of all existing things on Christ .
ÏÏ Î½ÎÏÏηκε ] denotes the subsistence of the whole, the state of lasting interdependence and order , an idea which is not equivalent to that of creation, but presupposes it. Reiske, Ind. Dem . ed. Schaef. p. 481: “Corpus unum, integrum, perfectum, secum consentiens esse et permanere.” Comp. 2 Peter 3:5 ; Plat. Rep . p. 530 A: Î¾Ï Î½ÎµÏÏάναι Ïá¿· Ïοῦ οá½Ïανοῦ Î´Î·Î¼Î¹Î¿Ï Ïγῷ αá½ÏÏν Ïε καὶ Ïá½° á¼Î½ αá½Ïá¿· , Tim . 61 A: γá¿Î½ â¦ Î¾Ï Î½ÎµÏÏÎ·ÎºÏ á¿Î±Î½ , Legg . vii. p. 817 B: ἡ ÏολιÏεία Î¾Ï Î½ÎÏÏηκε μίμηÏÎ¹Ï Ïοῦ καλλίÏÏÎ¿Ï â¦ Î²Î¯Î¿Ï . Herod. vii. 225; Philo, quis rer. div. haer . p. 489: á½ á¼Î½Î±Î¹Î¼Î¿Ï á½Î³ÎºÎ¿Ï , á¼Î¾ á¼Î±Ï Ïοῦ Î´Î¹Î±Î»Ï Ïá½¸Ï á½¢Î½ καὶ νεκÏá½¸Ï , ÏÏ Î½ÎÏÏηκε κ . ζÏÏÏ Ïεá¿Ïαι ÏÏονοίᾳ Îεοῦ κ . Ï . λ . It expresses that there is in Christ not merely the creative cause, but also the cause which brings about organic stability and continuance in unity (preserving and governing) for the whole of existing things. Comp. Hebrews 1:3 . Of attempts at explanation under the moral interpretation, we may note that of Schleiermacher: the consolidating of earthly relations and institutions; and that of Baumgarten-Crusius: “in this new world He is Lord in recognition and in sway ”
[39] Bengel correctly observes on ver. 16: “Ipse hic saepe positum magnam significat majestatem et omnem excludit creaturam.”
REMARK.
The intentional prominence given to the fact of the creation of all things through Christ, and in particular of the creation of the angels in their various classes, justifies the supposition that the false teachers disparaged Christ in this respect, and that they possessed at least elements of the Gnostic- demiurgic doctrine which was afterwards systematically elaborated. There is no evidence, however, of their particular views, and the further forms assumed by the Gnostic elements, as they showed themselves according to the Fathers in Simon Magus (Iren. Haer . i. 20 “Eunoiam ⦠generare angelos et potestates, a quibus et mundum hunc factum dixit;” comp. Epiph. Haer . xxi. 4), Cerinthus , etc., and especially among the Valentinians , while certainly to be recognised as fundamentally akin to the Colossian doctrinal errors (comp. Heinrici, Valentinian. Gnosis , 1871), are not to be identified with them; nor are those elements to be made use of as a proof of the post-apostolic origin of the epistle, as still is done by Hilgenfeld (see his Zeitschr . 1870, p. 246 f.), and more cautiously by Holtzmann. Of Ebionitism only Essene elements are to be found in Colossae, mingled with other Gnostic doctrines, which were not held by the later Ebionites. In particular, the ÏÏὸ ÏάνÏÏν εἶναι , on which Paul lays so much stress, must have been doubted in Colossae, although a portion of the Ebionites expressly and emphatically taught it ( λÎÎ³Î¿Ï Ïιν á¼Î½Ïθεν μὲν á½Î½Ïα ÏÏὸ ÏάνÏÏν δὲ κÏιÏθÎνÏα , Epiph. Haer . XXX. 3). Moreover, the opinion that Paul derived the appellations of the classes of angels in Colossians 1:16 from the language of the heretics themselves (Böhmer, comp. Olshausen) is to be rejected, because in other passages also, where there is no contrast to the Gnostic doctrine of Aeons, he makes use in substance of these names (Romans 8:38 ; 1 Corinthians 15:24 ; comp. Ephesians 1:20 ff; Ephesians 3:10 ; Ephesians 6:11 ff.). They are rather to be regarded as well-known and generally-current appellations, which were derived from the terminology of later Judaism, and which heretics made use of in common with the orthodox. The anti-Gnostic element is contained, not in the technical expressions, but in the doctrinal contents of the passage; and it was strong enough to induce Marcion, who took offence at it, to omit Colossians 1:15-17 (Tertullian, c. Marcion , v. 19). See, besides, Räbiger, Christol. Paul . p. 51 f.; Lechler, apost. Zeit . p. 55 f.; Klöpper, l.c .
Colossians 1:18 . Second part (see on Colossians 1:15 ) of the exhibition of the exaltedness of Christ. To that which Christ is as ÏÏÏÏÏÏÎ¿ÎºÎ¿Ï ÏάÏÎ·Ï ÎºÏίÏεÏÏ (Colossians 1:16-17 ) is now added what He is as ÏÏÏÏÏÏÎ¿ÎºÎ¿Ï á¼Îº Ïῶν νεκÏῶν , namely, the Head of the Church, and thus His ÏÏÏÏεÏειν has its consummation ( á¼Î½ Ïá¾¶Ïιν ). The latter, namely, ἵνα γÎνηÏαι ⦠ÏÏÏÏεÏÏν , embraces also a retrospect to that ÏÏÏÏÏÏÎ¿ÎºÎ¿Ï ÏάÏÎ·Ï ÎºÏίÏεÏÏ , and includes it in á¼Î½ Ïá¾¶Ïιν , without its being necessary, however, to attach Colossians 1:18 to the carrying out of the relation to the world expressed in ÏÏÏÏÏÏοκ . Ï . κÏÎ¯Ï . (Hofmann, comp. Rich. Schmidt). The perspective proceeds from the dignity of the original state of our Lord to that of His state as Saviour , from His cosmical to His soteriological glory, and so at length exhibits Him to view as the á¼Î½ Ïá¾¶Ïι ÏÏÏÏεÏÏν .
That Colossians 1:18 , with its confirmation in Colossians 1:19 f., has an apologetic reference to the Gnostic false teaching, must be assumed from its connection with what goes before. The passage is to be looked upon as antagonistic to the worship of angels (Colossians 2:18 ), which disparaged Christ in His dignity as Head of the Church, but not (in opposition to Bähr and Huther) as antagonistic to a theological dogma, such as is found in the Cabbala, according to which the body of the Messiah (the Adam Kadmon) is the aggregate of the emanations. For the emphasis of the passage and its essential point of doctrine lie in the fact that Christ is the Head of the church, and not in the fact that He is the head of the church; it is not the doctrine of another Ïῶμα , but that of any other ÏÏÏÏεÏÏν , which is excluded.
καὶ αá½ÏÏÏ ] stands again, as κ . αá½ÏÏÏ in Colossians 1:17 , in significant reference to Ïá½° ÏάνÏα : et ipse, in quo omnia consistunt, est caput, etc ., so that the passage continues to divide itself as into the links of a chain.
Ïοῦ ÏÏμαÏÎ¿Ï Ïá¿Ï á¼ÎºÎºÎ»Î·Ï .] to be taken together; the second genitive is that of apposition (Winer, p. 494 [E. T. 666]), which gives to the word governing it concrete definiteness; comp. Müller in the Luther. Zeitschr . 1871, p. 611 ff. On the familiar Pauline mode of considering the church of believers, livingly and actively ruled by Christ as the head (Ephesians 3:10 ; Philippians 3:6 ; Acts 9:31 ), as His body , [40] comp. 1 Corinthians 10:17 ; 1 Corinthians 12:12 ff., 1 Corinthians 10:27 ; Ephesians 1:23 ; Ephesians 4:12 ; Ephesians 5:23 ; Ephesians 5:30 ; Romans 12:5 .
á½ Ï á¼ÏÏιν κ . Ï . λ .] epexegetical relative clause (as in Colossians 1:15 ), the contents of which are related by way of confirmation to the preceding statement (Matthiae, p. 1061 f.; Kühner, ad Xen. Mem . i. 2. 64; Stallbaum, ad Phil . p. 195 f.), like our: he, who, etc ., which might be expressed, but not necessarily , by á½ ÏÏÎ¹Ï (or á½Î£ÎÎ ). Comp. on Ephesians 1:14 . If Christ had not risen, He would not be Head of the church (Acts 2:24-36 ; 1 Corinthians 15:0 ; Romans 1:4 , et al .).
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÎ¿ÎºÎ¿Ï á¼Îº Ï . Î½ÎµÎºÏ .] á¼Îº Ï . Î½ÎµÎºÏ . is conceived in the same way as in á¼Î½Î±ÏÏá¿Î½Î±Î¹ á¼Îº Ï . Î½ÎµÎºÏ . (Ephesians 5:14 ), so that it is the dead in Hades among whom the Risen One was, but from whom He goes forth ( separates Himself from them, hence also á¼Ïὸ Ï . Î½ÎµÎºÏ ., Matthew 14:2 ; Matthew 27:64 ; Matthew 28:7 ), and returning into the body, with the latter rises from the tomb. Comp. ÏÏá¿¶ÏÎ¿Ï á¼Î¾ á¼Î½Î±ÏÏάÏεÏÏ Î½ÎµÎºÏῶν , Acts 26:23 , also 1 Corinthians 15:22 f. This living exit from the grave is figuratively represented as birth; comp. Revelation 1:5 , where the partitive genitive Ïῶν Î½ÎµÎºÏ . (not á¼Îº . Ï . ν .) yields a form of conceiving the matter not materially different. Calvin takes ÏÏÏÏÏÏÎ¿ÎºÎ¿Ï á¼Îº . Ï . ν . as specifying the ground for á¼ÏÏή : “ principium (absolutely), quia primogenitus est ex mortuis; nam in resurrectione est rerum omnium instauratio.” Against this it may be urged, that á¼ÏÏή has no more precise definition; Paul must have written either á¼ÏÏá½´ Ïá¿Ï καινá¿Ï κÏίÏεÏÏ , or at least á¼§Ï instead of á½ Ï . Calvin was likewise erroneously of opinion (comp. Erasmus, Calovius) that Christ is called Primogenitus ex mortuis , not merely because He was the first to rise, but also “ quia restituit aliis vitam .” This idea is not conveyed either by the word or by the context, however true may be the thing itself; but a belief in the subsequent general resurrection of the dead is the presupposition of the expression ÏÏÏÏÏÏÎ¿ÎºÎ¿Ï ( αἰνίÏÏεÏαι δὲ ὠλÏÎ³Î¿Ï ÎºÎ±á½¶ Ïὴν ÏάνÏÏν ἡμῶν á¼Î½Î¬ÏÏαÏιν , Theodoret). This expression is purposely chosen in significant reference to Colossians 1:15 , as is intimated by Paul himself in the following ἵνα γÎνηÏαι á¼Î½ Ïá¾¶Ïιν κ . Ï . λ . But it is thus all the more certain, that ÏÏÏÏÏÏÎ¿ÎºÎ¿Ï á¼Îº Ï . Î½ÎµÎºÏ . is to be taken independently, and not adjectivally together with á¼ÏÏή (Heinrichs, Schleiermacher, Ewald), which would only amount to a tautological verboseness ( first-born beginning ); and, on the other hand, that á¼Îº Ïῶν νεκÏῶν may not be separated from ÏÏÏÏÏÏÎ¿ÎºÎ¿Ï in such a way as to emphasize the place, issuing forth from which Christ is what He is, namely, á¼ÏÏή , ÏÏÏÏÏÏÎ¿ÎºÎ¿Ï ; the former , “as the personal beginning of what commences with Him;” the latter , “in the same relation to those who belong to the world therewith coming into life as He held to the creation” (Hofmann). In this way the specific more precise definition, which is by means of á¼Îº Ï . νεκÏῶν in significant reference to Colossians 1:15 attached to the predicates of Christ, á¼ÏÏή and ÏÏÏÏÏÏÎ¿ÎºÎ¿Ï , would be groundlessly withdrawn from them, and these predicates would be left in an indefiniteness, in which they would simply be open vessels for receiving a gratuitously imported supplement.
ἵνα γÎνηÏαι κ . Ï . λ .] not to be restricted to the affirmation á¼Îº Ïῶν νεκÏῶν (Hofmann), [42] but to be referred to the whole sentence that Christ is á¼ÏÏή , ÏÏÏÏÏÏÎ¿ÎºÎ¿Ï á¼Îº Ï . Î½ÎµÎºÏ ., expressing the divine teleology of this position of Christ as the Risen One: in order that He may become , etc.; not: in order “that He may be held as ” (Baumgarten-Crusius), nor yet “that He may be ” (Vulgate, and so most expositors), as γίγνεÏθαι and εἶναι are never synonymous. The á¼Î½ Ïá¾¶Ïιν αá½Ïá½¸Ï ÏÏÏÏεÏει is looked upon by Paul as something which is still in course of development (comp. Steiger and Huther), and is only to be completed in the future, namely, when the Risen One shall have conquered all the power of the enemy (1 Corinthians 15:25 f.) and have erected the kingdom of the Messiah but of this result His resurrection itself was the necessary historical basis , and hence the future universal ÏÏÏÏεÏειν is the divinely intended aim of His being risen.
á¼Î½ Ïá¾¶Ïιν ] in all points , without excepting any relation, not, therefore, merely in the relation of creation (Colossians 1:15-17 ). Comp. Philippians 4:12 ; 1 Timothy 3:11 ; 1Ti 4:15 ; 2 Timothy 2:7 ; 2 Timothy 4:5 ; Titus 2:9 ; Hebrews 13:4 ; Hebrews 13:18 . á¼Î½ ÏανÏί is more commonly used by Paul ( 1Co 1:5 ; 2 Corinthians 4:8 , et al .). According to Beza, Ïá¾¶Ïιν is masculine : “inter omnes , videlicet fratres , ut Romans 8:29 .” So also Kypke and Heinrichs. But this would be here, after the universal bearing of the whole connection, much too narrow an idea, which, besides, is self-evident as to the Head of the church. According to Pelagius, it denotes: “tam in visibilibus quam in invisibilibus creaturis .” At variance with the text; this idea was conveyed by Colossians 1:16-17 , but in Colossians 1:18 another relation is introduced which does not refer to created things as such.
αá½ÏÏÏ ] emphatic, as in Colossians 1:17-18 .
ÏÏÏÏεÏÏν ] having the first rank , not used elsewhere in the N. T., but see Esther 5:11 ; 2Ma 6:18 ; 2Ma 13:15 ; Aquila, Zechariah 4:7 ; Plat. Legg . iii. p. 692 D, Dem . 1416. 25: ÏÏÏÏεÏειν á¼Î½ á¼ ÏαÏι κÏάÏιÏÏον . Xen. Cyr . viii. 2. 28; Mem . ii. 6. 26. This precedence in rank is to be the final result of the condition which set in with the ÏÏÏÏÏÏοκον εἶναι á¼Îº Ï . Î½ÎµÎºÏ .; but it is not contained in this ÏÏÏÏÏÏοκον εἶναι itself, an idea against which the very ἵνα γÎνηÏαι is logically decisive (in opposition to de Wette’s double signification of ÏÏÏÏÏÏοκ .).
[40] In which is expressed the idea of the invisible church. Comp. Julius Müller, Dogmat. Abh. p. 316 ff. And this conception and representation belong quite to the apostle’s general sphere of ideas, not specially to that of the Epistle to the Ephesians, into which the interpolator is supposed by Holtzmann again to enter here, after he has manifested a comparative independence in vv. 15 18.
[41] The Fathers have already correctly judged that even in regard to the isolated cases of rising from the dead, which have taken place through Christ and before Him, Christ remains the first-risen. Theophylact: εἰ Î³á½°Ï ÎºÎ±á½¶ á¼Î»Î»Î¿Î¹ ÏÏὸ ÏοÏÏÎ¿Ï á¼Î½ÎÏÏηÏαν , á¼Î»Î»á½° Ïάλιν á¼ÏÎθανον · αá½Ïá½¸Ï Î´á½² Ïὴν Ïελείαν á¼Î½Î¬ÏÏαÏιν á¼Î½ÎÏÏη . Comp. on 1 Corinthians 15:20 .
[42] So that it would express the design, which Christ Himself had in His coming forth from the dead.
á¼Î½ αá½Ïá¿· ] although belonging to ÎÎΤÎÎÎ . , is prefixed in emphatic transposition (Kühner, II. 2, p. 1101).
Îá½ÎÎÎÎΣΠ] He was pleased, placuit ei , that, etc. As to this use of εá½Î´Î¿ÎºÎµá¿Î½ in the later Greek (1 Corinthians 1:21 ; Galatians 1:15 , et al .), for which, in the classical language, δοκεá¿Î½ merely was employed, see Fritzsche, ad Rom . II. p. 370. On the accusative with infinitive , comp. 2Ma 14:35 ; Polyb. i. 8. 4. The subject , whose pleasure it is, is not expressed; but that it is God, is obvious from the context, which in ἵνα γÎνηÏαι κ . Ï . λ . has just stated the divine purpose. Among Greek authors also á½ ÎεÏÏ is not unfrequently omitted, where it is self-evident as the subject. See Kühner, II. 1, p. 30 c. According to Ewald and Ellicott (also Weiss, Bibl. Theol . p. 428, Exodus 2:0 , and Rich. Schmidt, Paul. Christol . p. 208), Ïᾶν Ïὸ ÏλήÏÏμα is the subject; and the whole fulness is a new expression for the Godhead, inasmuch as, going as it were out of itself, it fills something separate and thus becomes visible (= ×××× ×××× , ÎÎÎÎ , ÎÎÎÎÏ , Î ÎÎῦÎÎ ). Without support from N. T. usage; Î á¾¶Î , too, would be unsuitable for the subject of εá½Î´ÏκηÏε ; and Îµá¼°Ï Î±á½ÏÏν in Colossians 1:29 clearly shows that ÎεÏÏ is conceived as subject, to which εἰÏηνοÏοιήÏÎ±Ï then refers. According to Hofmann (comp. also his Schriftbew. II. 1, p. 357 f.), Christ is meant to be the subject of εá½Î´Ïκ . Colossians 1:20 itself, and Ephesians 1:9 , ought to have precluded this error. Throughout the whole of the N. T. it is never Christ, but always the Father , who in respect to the work of redemption to be executed gives the decree, while Christ executes it as obedient to the Father; hence also Paul, “beneficium Christi commemorans, nunquam dimittit memoriam Patris,” Bengel. Comp. Reiche, Comment. crit . p. 263.
[43] Holtzmann, after having rejected vv. 14 18 entirely as an interpolation, allows to stand as original in vv. 19, 20 only the words: á½ Ïι á¼Î½ αá½Ïá¿· εá½Î´ÏκηÏεν καÏαλλάξαι , to which καÏαλλ . there is then attached in ver. 21, as object, καὶ á½Î¼á¾¶Ï , also you, with reference to á¼¡Î¼á¾¶Ï in ver. 13. How daring and violent, and yet how paltry (rescuing merely the καὶ á½Î¼á¾¶Ï ), would the procedure of the author thus have been!
[45] As in the Son of God in the metaphysical sense; hence the original being of God in Him cannot be conceived merely as ideal, which was to develope itself into reality, and the realization of which, when it at length became perfect, made Him the absolute abode of the fulness of Godhead. So Beyschlag, Christol. p. 232 f., according to whom Christ would be conceived as “man drawing down upon himself” this indwelling of God. He is conceived as the incarnate Son (comp. ver. 13 ff.), who, in accordance with the Father’s decree, has appeared as bearer ot the whole fulness of salvation. For He was its dwelling not merely in principle, but in fact and reality, when He appeared, and He employed it for the work, which the Father desired to accomplish by Him (ver. 20). Comp. Galatians 4:4 ; Romans 8:3 . The indwelling of the Ïᾶν Ïὸ ÏλήÏÏμα He had not, indeed, to achieve by his own effort; but He had, in obedience towards the Father, to preserve (comp. Hebrews 4:15 ), apply, communicate it; and so this indwelling is not merely in the risen One, but in His very work on the cross the presupposition of the universal reconciliation, ver. 20.
[46] Baur himself ( Paulus , II. p. 12 ff.) likewise explains ÏλήÏÏμα from the technical language of the Gnostics, especially of the Valentinian doctrine of Aeons, but finds the Gnosticism to belong to the (post-apostolic) writer of the epistle. According to Baur (see his Neutest. Theol. p. 258), Christ is the ÏλήÏÏμα of God as He “in whom that which God is in Himself, according to the abstract idea of His nature, is filled with its definite concrete contents.” Comp. also Hilgenfeld in his Zeitschr. 1870, p. 247, according to whom our passage is intended to affirm that the Pleroma of divine nature is to be sought not in the prolix series of the Aeons of the Gnostics, but in Christ alone. Holtzmann, with more caution, adheres to the view that the idea of the ÏλήÏÏμα forms a first step towards the extended use which the Gnostics make of the word; whereas Hilgen-feld ( Zeitschr. 1873, p. 195) finds the idea here already so firmly established, “that the ÏλήÏÏμα emerges as in a certain measure holding an independent position between God and Christ.”
Colossians 1:20 . [48] “Haec inhabitatio est fundamentum reconciliationis,” Bengel. Hence Paul continues: καὶ διʼ αá½Ïοῦ á¼ÏοκαÏαλλάξαι Ïá½° ÏάνÏα , and through Him to reconcile the whole . As to the double compound á¼ÏοκαÏαλλ ., prorsus reconciliare , [49] see on Ephesians 2:16 . The considerations which regulate the correct understanding of the passage are: (1) that Ïá½° ÏάνÏα may not in any way be restricted (this has been appropriately urged by Usteri, and especially by Huther); that it consequently cannot be referred either merely to intelligent beings generally (the usual view), or to men (Cornelius a Lapide, Heinrichs, Baumgarten-Crusius, and others), especially the Gentiles (Olshausen), or to the “universam ecclesiam ” (Beza), but is, according to the context (see Colossians 1:16 ff.), simply to be taken as quite general: the whole of that which exists (has been created); (2) that the reconciling subject is here not Christ (Hofmann, in accordance with his incorrect reference of εá½Î´ÏκηÏε in Colossians 1:19 ), but God , who through Christ ( διʼ αá½Ïοῦ ) reconciled all things; (3) that consequently á¼ÏοκαÏαλλάξαι cannot be meant of the transforming of the misrelation between the world and Christ into a good relation (Hofmann), and just as little of the reconciliation of all things with one another , of the removal of mutual hostility among the constituent elements composing Ïá½° ÏάνÏα , but only of the universal reconciliation with the God who is hostile to sin, [50] as is clearly evident from the application to the readers in Colossians 1:21 . The only correct sense therefore is, that the entire universe has been reconciled with God through Christ . But how far? In answering this question, which cannot be disposed of by speculation beyond the range of Scripture as to the having entered into the finite and having returned again to the infinite (Usteri), nor by the idea imported into á¼ÏοκαÏαλλ . of gathering up into the unity of absolute final aim (Baur, neut. Theol . p. 257), the following considerations are of service: ( a ) The original harmony, which in the state of innocence subsisted between God and the whole creation, was annulled by sin, which first obtained mastery over a portion of the angels, and in consequence of this (2 Corinthians 11:3 ), by means of the transgression of Adam, over all mankind (Romans 5:12 ). Comp. on Ephesians 1:10 . ( b ) Not only had sinful mankind now become alienated from God by sin and brought upon themselves His hostility (comp. Colossians 1:21 ), but also the whole of the non-rational creation (Romans 8:19 ff.) was affected by this relation, and given up by God to μαÏαιÏÏÎ·Ï and Î´Î¿Ï Î»ÎµÎ¯Î± Ïá¿Ï ÏθοÏá¾¶Ï (see on Rom. l.c .). ( c ) Indeed, even the world of heavenly spirits had lost its harmony with God as it originally existed, since a portion of the angels those that had fallen formed the kingdom of the devil, in antagonism to God, and became forfeited to the wrath of God for the everlasting punishment which is prepared for the devil and his angels. ( d ) But in Christ, by means of His ἱλαÏÏήÏιον , through which God made peace ( εἰÏηνοÏοιήÏÎ±Ï Îº . Ï . λ .), the reconciliation of the whole has taken place, in virtue of the blotting out, thereby effected, of the curse of sin. Thus not merely has the fact effecting the reconciliation as its causa meritoria taken place, but the realization of the universal reconciliation itself is also entered upon , although it is not yet completed , but down to the time of the Parousia is only in course of development , inasmuch, namely, as in the present αἰÏν the believing portion of mankind is indeed in possession of the reconciliation, but the unreconciled unbelievers (the tares among the wheat) are not yet separated; inasmuch, further, as the non-intelligent creation still remains in its state of corruption occasioned by sin (Romans 8:0 ); and lastly, inasmuch as until the Parousia even the angelic world sees the kingdom of the devil which has issued from it still although the demoniac powers have been already vanquished by the atoning death, and have become the object of divine triumph (Colossians 2:15 ) not annulled, and still in dangerous operation (Ephesians 6:12 ) against the Christian church. But through the Parousia the reconciliation of the whole which has been effected in Christ will reach its consummation, when the unbelieving portion of mankind will be separated and consigned to Gehenna, the whole creation in virtue of the Palingenesia (Matthew 19:28 ) will be transformed into its original perfection, and the new heaven and the new earth will be constituted as the dwelling of δικαιοÏÏνη (2 Peter 3:13 ) and of the δÏξα of the children of God (Romans 8:21 ); while the demoniac portion of the angelic world will be removed from the sphere of the new world, and cast into hell. Accordingly, in the whole creation there will no longer be anything alienated from God and object of His hostility, but Ïá½° ÏάνÏα will be in harmony and reconciled with Him; and God Himself, to whom Christ gives back the regency which He has hitherto exercised, will become the only Ruler and All in All (1 Corinthians 15:24 ; 1 Corinthians 15:28 ). This collective reconciliation, although its consummation will not occur until the Parousia, is yet justly designated by the aorist infinitive á¼ÏοκαÏαλλάξαι , because to the telic conception of God in the εá½Î´ÏκηÏε it was present as one moment in conception.
The angels also are necessarily included in Ïá½° ÏάνÏα (comp. subsequently, Ïá½° á¼Î½ Ïοá¿Ï οá½Ïανοá¿Ï ); and in this case seeing that a reconciliation of the angels who had not fallen, who are holy and minister to Christ (Hahn, Theol. d. N. T. I. p. 269 ff.), considered in themselves as individuals, cannot be spoken of, and is nowhere spoken of in the N. T. [51] it is to be observed that the angels are to be conceived according to category , in so far, namely, as the hostile relation of God towards the fallen angels affected the angelic world viewed as a whole. The original normal relation between God and this higher order of spirits is no longer existing, so long as the kingdom of demons in antagonism to God still subsists which has had its powers broken no doubt already by the death of Christ (Colossians 2:14 f; Hebrews 2:14 ), but will undergo at length utter separation a result which is to be expected in the new transformation of the world at the Parousia. The idea of reconciliation is therefore, in conformity with the manner of popular discourse, and according to the variety of the several objects included in Ïá½° ÏάνÏα , meant partly in an immediate sense (in reference to mankind), partly in a mediate sense (in reference to the ÎΤÎΣÎÏ affected by man’s sin, Romans 8:0 , and to the angelic world affected by its partial fall); [52] the idea of á¼ÏοκαÏαλλάξαι , in presence of the all-embracing Ïá½° ÏάνÏα , is as it were of an elastic nature. [53] At the same time, however, á¼ÏοκαÏαλλ . is not to be made equivalent (Melanchthon, Grotius, Cornelius a Lapide, Flatt, Bähr, Bleek, and others) to á¼ÏοκεÏαλαιÏÏαÏθαι (Ephesians 1:10 ), which is rather the sequel of the former; nor is it to be conceived as merely completing the harmony of the good angels (who are not to be thought absolutely pure, Job 4:18 ; Job 15:15 ; Mark 10:18 ; 1 Corinthians 6:3 ) with God (de Wette), and not in the strict sense therefore restoring it an interpretation which violates the meaning of the word. Calvin, nevertheless, has already so conceived the matter, introducing, moreover, the element foreign to the literal sense of confirmation in righteousness: “quum creaturae sint, extra lapsus periculum non essent, nisi Christi gratia fuissent confirmati .” According to Ritschl, in the Jahrb. f. Deutsche Theol . 1863, p. 522 f., Paul intends to refer to the angels that had been active in the law-giving on Sinai (Deuteronomy 33:2 ; Ps. 67:18, LXX.), to whom he attributes “a deviation from God’s plan of salvation.” But this latter idea cannot be made good either by Colossians 2:15 , or by Galatians 3:19 , or by Ephesians 3:10 , as, indeed, there is nothing in the context to indicate any such reference to the angels of the law in particular. The exegetical device traditionally resorted to, that what was meant with respect to the angels was their reconciliation, not with God , but with men , to whom on account of sin they had been previously inimical (so Chrysostom, Pelagius, Theodoret, Oecumenius, Theophylact, Zanchius, Cameron, Calovius, Estius, Bengel, Michaelis, Böhmer, and others), is an entirely erroneous makeshift, incompatible with the language of the passage.
Îµá¼°Ï Î±á½ÏÏν ] is indeed to be written with the spiritus lenis , as narrating the matter from the standpoint of the author , and because a reflexive emphasis would be without a motive; but it is to be referred, not to Christ , who, as mediate agent of the reconciliation, is at the same time its aim (Bähr, Huther, Olshausen, de Wette, Reiche, Hofmann, Holtzmann, and others; comp. Estius, also Grotius: “ut ipsi pareant”), but to God , constituting an instance of the abbreviated form of expression very usual among Greek writers (Kühner, II. 1, p. 471) and in the N. T. (Winer, p. 577 [E. T. 776]), the constructio praegnans : to reconcile to Godward , so that they are now no longer separated from God (comp. á¼ÏηλλοÏÏ ., Colossians 1:21 ), but are to be united with Him in peace . Thus Îµá¼°Ï Î±á½Ï ., although identical in reality, is not in the mode of conception equivalent to the mere dative (Ephesians 2:16 ; Rom 5:10 ; 1 Corinthians 7:11 ; 2 Corinthians 5:18-20 ), as Beza, Calvin, and many others take it. The reference to Christ must be rejected, because the definition of the aim would have been a special element to be added to διʼ αá½Ïοῦ , which, as in Colossians 1:16 , would have been expressed by καὶ Îµá¼°Ï Î±á½ÏÏν , and also because the explanation which follows ( εἰÏηνοÏοιήÏÎ±Ï Îº . Ï . λ .) concerns and presupposes simply the mediate agency of Christ ( διʼ αá½Ïοῦ ).
εἰÏηνοÏοιήÏÎ±Ï , down to ÏÏÎ±Ï Ïοῦ αá½Ïοῦ , is a modal definition of διʼ αá½Ïοῦ á¼ÏοκαÏαλλάξαι (not a parenthesis): so that He concluded peace , etc., inasmuch, namely, as the blood of Christ, as the expiatory offering, is meant to satisfy the holiness of God, and now His grace is to have free course, Romans 5:1 ; Ephesians 6:15 . The aorist participle is, as Colossians 1:21 shows, to be understood as contemporary with á¼ÏοκαÏαλλ . (see on Ephesians 1:9 , and Kühner, II. 1, p. 161 f.; Müller in the Luther. Zeitschr . 1872, p. 631 ff.), and not antecedent to it (Bähr), as has been incorrectly held by Ernesti in consistency with his explanation of Colossians 1:19 (see on Colossians 1:19 ), who, moreover, without any warrant from the context, in accordance with Ephesians 2:14-16 , thinks of the conclusion of peace between Jews and Gentiles . The nominative refers to the subject; and this is, as in the whole sentence since the εá½Î´ÏκηÏεν , not Christ (Chrysostom, Theodoret, Oecumenius, Luther, Storr, Heinrichs, Flatt, Steiger, Hofmann, and many others), but God . The verb εἰÏηνοÏοιεá¿Î½ , occurring only here in the N. T., which has elsewhere Ïοιεá¿Î½ εἰÏήνην (Ephesians 2:15 ; James 3:18 ), and also foreign to the ancient Greek, which has εἰÏηνοÏÎ¿Î¯Î¿Ï , is nevertheless found in Hermes, ap. Stob. Ecl. ph . i. 52, and in the LXX. Proverbs 10:10 .
διὰ Ïοῦ αἵμ . Ï . ÏÏÎ±Ï Ïοῦ αá½Ïοῦ ] that is, by means of the blood to be shed on His cross , which, namely, as the sacrificial blood reconciling with God (comp. 2 Corinthians 5:21 ), became the causa medians which procured the conclusion of peace between God and the world. Romans 3:25 ; Romans 5:9 f.; Ephesians 1:7 . The reason, which historically induced Paul to designate the blood of Christ with such specific definiteness as the blood of His cross , is to be sought in the spiritualism of the false teachers, who ascribed to the angels a mediating efficacy with God. Hence comes also the designation so intentionally material of the reconciling sacrificial death, Colossians 1:22 , which Hofmann seeks to avoid as such, namely, as respects its definite character of a satisfaction. [54]
διʼ αá½Ïοῦ ] not with the spiritus asper , equivalent to διʼ á¼Î±Ï Ïοῦ , as those take it who refer εἰÏηνοÏοιήÏÎ±Ï to Christ as subject ( á¼Î±Ï Ïὸν á¼ÎºÎ´Î¿ÏÏ , Theophylact), since this reference is erroneous. But neither can διʼ αá½Ïοῦ be in apposition to διὰ Ïοῦ αἵμαÏÎ¿Ï Ï . ÏÏ . αá½Ïοῦ (Castalio, “per ejus sanguinem, h. e. per eum ”), for the latter , and not the former, would be the explanatory statement. It is a resumption of the above given διʼ αá½Ïοῦ , after the intervening definition εἰÏηνοÏοιήÏÎ±Ï Îº . Ï . λ ., in order to complete the discourse thereby interrupted, and that by once more emphatically bringing forward the διʼ αá½Ïοῦ which stood at the commencement; “ through Him ,” I say, to reconcile, whether they be things on earth or whether they be things in heaven. Comp. on Ephesians 1:11 ; Romans 8:23 .
εἴÏε Ïá½° á¼Ïá½¶ Ï . γ ., εἴÏε Ïá½° á¼Î½ Ï . οá½Ï .] divides, without “affected tautology” (Holtzmann), but with a certain solemnity befitting the close of this part of the epistle, the Ïá½° ÏάνÏα into its two component parts. As to the quite universal description, see above on Ïá½° ÏάνÏα ; comp. on Colossians 1:16 . We have, besides, to notice: (1) that Paul here (it is otherwise in Colossians 1:16 , where the creation was in question, comp. Genesis 1:1 ) names the earthly things first , because the atonement took place on earth, and primarily affected things earthly; (2) that the disjunctive expression εἴÏε ⦠εἴÏε renders impossible the view of a reconciliation of the two sections one with another (Erasmus, Wetstein, Dalmer, and others). To the category of exegetical aberrations belongs the interpretation of Schleiermacher, who understands earthly and heavenly things , and includes among the latter all the relations of divine worship and the mental tendencies of Jews and Gentiles relative thereto: “Jews and Gentiles were at variance as to both, as to the heavenly and earthly things, and were now to be brought together in relation to God, after He had founded peace through the cross of His Son.” The view of Baumgarten-Crusius is also an utter misexplanation: that the reconciliation of men (Jews and Gentiles) among themselves, and with the spirit-world, is the thing meant; and that the reconciliation with the latter consists in the consciousness given back to men of being worthy of connection with the higher spirits.
Lastly, against the reference to universal restoration , to which, according to Olshausen, at least the tendency of Christ’s atonement is assumed to have pointed, see on Ephesians 1:10 , remark 2. Comp. also Schmid in the Jahrb. f. D. Theol . 1870, p. 133.
[48] According to Holtzmann, p. 92, the author is assumed to have worked primarily with the elements of the fundamental passage 2 Corinthians 5:18 f., which he has taken to apply to the cosmical á¼ÏοκαÏαλλαγή . But, instead of apprehending this as the function of the risen Christ, he has by διὰ Ïοῦ αἵμαÏÎ¿Ï Îº . Ï . λ . occasioned the coincidence of two dissimilar spheres of conception, of which, moreover, the one is introduced as form for the other. The interpolator reproduces and concentrates the thought of Ephesians 1:7 ; Ephesians 1:10 ; Ephesians 2:13-17 , bringing the idea of a cosmical reconciliation (Ephesians 1:10 ) into expression in such a way “that he, led by the sound of the terminology, takes up at the same time and includes the thought of the reconciliation of the Jews and Gentiles.” In opposition to this view, the exegesis of the details in their joint bearing on the whole will avail to show that the passage with all its difficulty is no such confused medley of misunderstanding and of heterogeneous ideas, and contains nothing un-Pauline. The extension of the reconciliation to the celestial spheres, in particular, has been regarded as un-Pauline (see, especially, Holtzmann, p. 231 ff.). But even in the epistles whose genuineness is undisputed it is not difficult to recognise the presuppositions, from which the sublime extension of the conception to an universality of cosmic effect in our passage might ensue. We may add, that Ephesians 1:10 is not “the leading thought of the interpolation” at ver. 16 ff. (Holtzmann, p. 151); in ver. 16 ff. much more is said, and of other import.
[49] As if we might say in German, abversöhnen, that is: to finish quite the reconciliation. Comp. á¼ÏιλάÏκεÏθαι , Plat. Legg. ix. p. 873 A.
[50] God is the subject, whose hostility is removed, by the reconciliation (comp. on Romans 5:10 ); Ïá½° ÏάνÏα is the object, which was affected by this hostility grounded of necessity on the holiness and righteousness of God. If the hostile disposition of men towards God, which had become removed by the reconciliation, were meant (Ritschl in the Jahrb. f. Deutsche Theol. 1863, p. 515), the universal Ïá½° ÏάνÏα would not be suitable; because the whole universe might, indeed, be affected by the hostility of God against sin, but could not itself be hostilely disposed towards Him. See, moreover, on ver. 21.
[51] According to Ignatius, Smyrn. 6, the angels also, á¼á½°Î½ μὴ ÏιÏÏεÏÏÏÏιν Îµá¼°Ï Ïὸ αἷμα ΧÏιÏÏοῦ , incur judgment. But this conception of angels needing reconciliation, and possibly even unbelieving, is doubtless merely an abstraction, just as is the idea of an angel teaching falsely (Galatians 1:8 ). It is true that, according to 1 Corinthians 6:3 , angels also are judged; but this presupposes not believing and unbelieving angels, but various stages of moral perfection and purity in the angelic world, when confronted with the absolute ethical standard, which in Christianity must present itself even to the angels (Ephesians 3:10 ). Comp. on 1 Corinthians 6:3 .
[52] The idea of á¼ÏοκαÏαλλάξαι is not in this view to be altered, but has as its necessary presupposition the idea of hostility, as is clear from εἰÏηνοÏοίηÏÎ±Ï and from á¼ÏθÏοÏÏ , ver. 21, compared with Ephesians 2:16 ! Compare Fritzsche, ad Rom. I. p. 276 ff.; Eur. Med. 870: διαλλαγá¿Î½Î±Î¹ Ïá¿Ï á¼ÏθÏÎ±Ï , Soph. Aj. 731 (744): θεοá¿Ïιν á½¡Ï ÎºÎ±ÏαλλαÏθῠÏÏÎ»Î¿Ï , Plat. Rep. p. 566 E: ÏÏá½¸Ï ÏÎ¿á½ºÏ á¼Î¾Ï á¼ÏθÏÎ¿á½ºÏ Ïοá¿Ï μὲν καÏαλλαγῠ, ÏÎ¿á½ºÏ Î´á½² καὶ διαÏθείÏá¿ . This applies also against Hofmann’s enervating weakening of the idea into that of transposition from the misrelation into a good one, or of “an action, which makes one, who stands ill to another, stand well to him.” In such a misrelation (namely, to Christ, according to the erroneous view of εá½Î´ÏκηÏε ) stand, in Hofmann’s view, even the “spirits collectively,” in so far as they bear sway in the world-life deteriorated by human sin, instead of in the realization of salvation. Richard Schmidt, l.c. p. 195, also proceeds to dilute the notion of reconciliation into that of the bringing to Christ, inasmuch as he explains the καÏαλλάÏÏειν as effected by the fact that Christ has become the head of all, and all has been put in dependence on Him. Hilgenfeld, l.c. p. 251 f., justly rejects this alteration of the sense, which is at variance with the following context, but adheres, for his own part, to the statement that here the author in a Gnostic fashion has in view disturbances of peace in the heavenly spheres (in the ÏλήÏÏμα ).
[53] Comp. Philippi, Glaubensl. IV. 2, p. 269 f., Exodus 2:0 .
[54] According to Hofmann, Schriftbew. II. 1, p. 362 ff., by the blood of the cross, ver. 20, the death of Christ is meant to be presented as a judicial act of violence, and “what befell Him” as an ignominy, which He allowed to be inflicted on Him with the view of establishing a peace, which brought everything out of alienation from Him into fellowship of peace with Him. ver. 22 does not affirm the expiation of sin, but the transition of mankind, which had once for all been effected in Christ, from the condition involved in their sin into that which came into existence with His death. Christ has, in a body like ours, and by means of the death to which we are subject, done that which we have need of in order that we may come to stand holy before Him. Not different in substance are Hofmann’s utterances in his Heil. Schr. N. T. But when we find it there stated: “how far Christ has hereby (namely, by His having allowed Himself to be put to death as a transgressor by men) converted the variance, which subsisted between Him and the world created for Him, into its opposite, is not here specified in detail,” that is an unwarranted evasion; for the strict idea of reconciliation had so definite, clear, firm, and vivid (comp. ver. 14, Colossians 2:13 f.) a place in the consciousness of the apostle and of the church, which was a Pauline one, that it did not need, especially in express connection with the blood of the cross, any more precise mention in detail. Comp. Galatians 3:13 ; Romans 3:25 . Calvin well says: “Ideo pignus et pretium nostrae cum Deo pacificationis sanguis Christi, quia in cruce fusus.”
Colossians 1:21 . As far as Colossians 1:23 , an application to the readers of what had been said as to the reconciliation, in order to animate them, through the consciousness of this blessing, to stedfastness in the faith (Colossians 1:23 ).
καὶ á½Î¼á¾¶Ï κ . Ï . λ .] you also , not: and you , so that it would have to be separated by a mere comma from the preceding verse, and Î½Ï Î½á½¶ δὲ ⦠θανάÏÎ¿Ï would, notwithstanding its great importance, come to be taken as parenthetical (Lachmann), or as quite breaking off the discourse, and leaving it unfinished (Ewald). It begins a new sentence, comp. Ephesians 2:1 ; but observe, at the same time, that Ephesians 2:0 is much too rich in its contents to admit of these contents being here compressed into Colossians 1:20-21 (in opposition to Holtzmann, p. 150). As to the way in which Holtzmann gains an immediate connection with what precedes, see on Colossians 1:19 . The construction (following the reading á¼ÏοκαÏηλλάγηÏε , see the critical notes) has become anacoluthic , inasmuch as Paul, when he began the sentence, had in his mind the active verb (which stands in the Recepta ), but he does not carry out this formation of the sentence; on the contrary, in his versatility of conception, he suddenly starts off and continues in a passive form, as if he had begun with καὶ á½Î¼Îµá¿Ï κ . Ï . λ . See Matthiae, p. 1524; Winer, p. 527 ff. [E. T. 714]; and upon the aorist, Buttmann, Neut. Gr . p. 171 [E. T. 197].
á¼ÏηλλοÏÏ . κ . Ï . λ ] when ye were once in the state of estrangement , characterizes their heathen condition. As to á¼ÏηλλοÏÏ ., see on Ephesians 2:12 ; from which passage á¼Ïὸ Ïá¿Ï ÏολιÏÎµÎ¯Î±Ï Ï . ἸÏÏ . is here as unwarrantably supplied (Heinrichs, comp. Flatt), as is from Ephesians 4:14 Ïá¿Ï ζÏá¿Ï Ïοῦ Îεοῦ (Bähr). In conformity with the context, seeing that previously God was the subject as author of reconciliation, the being estranged from God ( Ïοῦ Îεοῦ ), the being excluded from His fellowship, is to be understood. Comp. á¼Î¸ÎµÎ¿Î¹ á¼Î½ Ï . κÏÏμῳ , Ephesians 2:12 . On the subject-matter, Romans 1:21 ff.
á¼ÏθÏοÏÏ ] sc. Ïá¿· Îεῷ , in a passive sense (comp. on Romans 5:10 ; Romans 11:28 ): invisos Deo , [55] as is required by the idea of having become reconciled, through which God’s enmity against sinful men, who were ÏÎκνα ÏÏÏει á½Ïγá¿Ï (Ephesians 2:3 ), has changed into mercy towards them. [56] This applies in opposition to the usual active interpretation, which Hofmann also justly rejects: hostile towards God, Romans 8:7 ; James 4:4 (so still Huther, de Wette, Ewald, Ritschl, Holtzmann), which is not to be combined with the passive sense (Calvin, Bleek).
Ïῠδιανοίᾳ and á¼Î ΤÎá¿Ï á¼Î¡ÎÎÎÏ Î¤ . Î . belong to both the preceding elements; the former as dative of the cause: on account of their disposition of mind they were once alienated from God and hateful to Him; the latter as specification of the overt, actual sphere of life, in which they had been so ( in the wicked works , in which their godless and God-hated behaviour had exhibited itself). Thus information is given, as to á¼Ïηλλ . and á¼Î§ÎΡÎÎÏ , of an internal and of an external kind. The view which takes ΤῠÎÎÎÎÎÎá¾¼ as dative of the respect (comp. Ephesians 4:18 ): as respects disposition (so, following older expositors, Huther, de Wette, Baumgarten-Crusius, Ewald), would no doubt suit the erroneous active explanation of á¼ÏÎ¸Ï ., but would furnish only a superfluous definition to it, as it is self-evident that the enmity towards God resides in the disposition . Luther incorrectly renders: “through the reason; ” for the διάν . is not the reason itself, but its immanent activity (see especially, Plato, Soph . p. 263 E), and that here viewed under its moral aspect; comp. on Ephesians 4:18 . Beza (“mente operibus malis intenta”), Michaelis, Storr, and Bähr attach á¼Î½ Ïοá¿Ï á¼ÏÎ³Î¿Î¹Ï Îº . Ï . λ . to ΤῠÎÎÎÎÎÎá¾¼ . This is grammatically admissible, since we may say ÎÎÎÎÎÎá¿Î£ÎÎÎ á¼Î , animo versari in (Psalms 73:8 ; Sir 6:37 ; Plato, Prot . p. 341 E), and therefore the repetition of the article was not necessary. But the badness of the disposition was so entirely self-evident from the context, that the assumed more precise definition by á¼Î½ Ïοá¿Ï á¼Ïγ . Ï . ÏÎ¿Î½Î·Ï . would appear tediously circumstantial.
The articles Τῠand ΤÎá¿Ï denote the disposition which they have had , and the works which they have done . In the latter case the subjoined attributive furnished with the article ( Ïοá¿Ï ÏονηÏοá¿Ï ) is not causal (“ because they were bad,” Hofmann), but emphatically brings into prominence the quality, as at Ephesians 6:13 ; 1 Corinthians 7:14 , and often (Winer, p. 126 [E. T. 167]).
Î½Ï Î½á½¶ δὲ á¼ÏοκαÏηλλάγηÏε ] as if previously á½ÎÎá¿Ï Î . Τ . Î . were used (see above): Ye also ⦠have nevertheless now become reconciled . On δΠafter participles which supply the place of the protasis, as here, where the thought is: although ye formerly, etc., see Klotz, ad Devar . p. 374 ff.; Maetzner, ad Antiph . p. 136; Kühner, ad Xen. Mem . iii. 7. 8, Anab . vi. 6. 16. On Î½Ï Î½Î¯ , with the aorist following, comp. Colossians 1:26 ; Romans 7:6 ; Ephesians 2:13 ; Plat. Symp . p. 193 A: ÏÏὸ Ïοῦ ⦠á¼Î½ ἦμεν , Î½Ï Î½á½¶ δὲ διὰ Ïὴν á¼Î´Î¹ÎºÎ¯Î±Î½ διῳκίÏθημεν á½Ïὸ Ï . θεοῦ . Ellendt, Lex Soph . II. p. 176; Kühner, II. 2, p. 672. It denotes the present time, which has set in with the á¼ÏοκαÏηλλ . (comp. Buttmann, Neut. Gr . p. 171 [E. T. 197]); and the latter has taken place objectively through the death of Christ, Colossians 1:22 , although realized subjectively in the readers only when they became believers whereby the reconciliation became appropriated to them, and there existed now for them a decisive contrast of their Î½Ï Î½Î¯ with their Î ÎΤΠ. [57] The reconciling subject is, according to the context (Colossians 1:19-20 ), not Christ (as at Ephesians 2:16 ), through whom (comp. Romans 5:10 ; 2 Corinthians 5:18 ) the reconciliation has taken place (see Colossians 1:20 ), but, as at 2 Corinthians 5:19 , God (in opposition to Chrysostom, Theodoret, Oecumenius, Beza, Calvin, Estius, Calovius, Heinrichs, and others, including de Wette and Ewald). For the reference to Christ even the reading á¼ÏοκαÏήλλαξεν would by no means furnish a reason, far less a necessity, since, on the contrary, even this active would have, according to the correct explanation of εá½Î´ÏκηÏε in Colossians 1:19 , to be taken as referring to God (in opposition to Hofmann).
[55] Compare the phrase very current in the classical writers, from Homer onward, á¼ÏθÏá½¸Ï Î¸ÎµÎ¿á¿Ï , quem Dii oderunt.
[56] See Fritzsche, ad Rom. I. p. 276 ff., who aptly explains καÏαλλάÏÏεÏθαί Ïινι : in alicujus favorem venire, qui antea succensuerit. Comp. Philippi, Glaubensl. IV. 2, p. 265 ff., Exodus 2:0 . The reconciliation of men takes place, when God, instead of being further angry at them, has become gracious towards them, when, consequently, He Himself is reconciled. Comp. Luke 18:13 ; 2 Corinthians 5:19 . So long as His wrath is not changed, and consequently He is not reconciled, men remain unreconciled. 2Ma 7:33 : ὠζῶν κÏÏÎ¹Î¿Ï â¦ Î²ÏαÏÎÏÏ á¼ÏÏÏγιÏÏαι καὶ Ïάλιν καÏαλλαγήÏεÏαι Ïοá¿Ï á¼Î±Ï Ïοῦ δοÏÎ»Î¿Î¹Ï , comp. 2Ma 8:29 , Malachi 1:5; Malachi 1:5 , 2Ma 5:20 ; Clem. Cor. I. 48: ἱκεÏεÏονÏÎµÏ Î±á½ÏÏν (God), á½ ÏÏÏ á¼µÎ»ÎµÏÏ Î³ÎµÎ½ÏÎ¼ÎµÎ½Î¿Ï á¼ÏικαÏαλλαγῠἡμá¿Î½ . In Constt. Apost. viii. 12. 14, it is said of Christ that He Ïá¿· κÏÏμῳ καÏήλλαξε God, and § 17, of God: Ïοῦ καÏαλλαγÎνÏÎ¿Ï Î±á½Ïοá¿Ï (with believers).
Colossians 1:22 . á¼Î½ Ïá¿· ÏÏμαÏι κ . Ï . λ .] that, by means of which they have been reconciled; corresponding to the διʼ αá½Ïοῦ and διὰ Ïοῦ αἵμαÏÎ¿Ï Ïοῦ ÏÏÎ±Ï Ïοῦ αá½Ïοῦ of Colossians 1:20 : in the body of His flesh by means of death . Since God is the reconciling subject, we are not at liberty, with Elzevir, Scholz, and others, to read αá½Ïοῦ (with the spiritus asper ), which would not be justified, even though Christ were the subject. We have further to note: (1) διὰ Ï . θανάÏÎ¿Ï informs us whereby the being reconciled á¼Î½ Ïá¿· ÏÏμαÏι Ï . Ï . αὠ. was brought about , namely, by the death occurring, without which the reconciliation would not have taken place in the body of Christ. (2) Looking to the concrete presentation of the matter, and because the procuring element is subsequently brought forward specially and on its own account by διά , the á¼Î½ is not, with Erasmus and many others, to be taken as instrumental , but is to be left as local; not, however, in the sense that Christ accomplished the á¼ÏοκαÏαλλάÏÏειν in His body, which was fashioned materially like ours (Hofmann, comp. Calvin and others, including Bleek) which, in fact, would amount to the perfectly self-evident point, that it took place in His corporeally-human form of being, but, doubtless, especially as διὰ Ïοῦ θανάÏÎ¿Ï follows, in the sense, that in the body of Christ, by means of the death therein accomplished, our reconciliation was objectively realized, which fact of salvation, therefore, inseparably associated itself with His body; comp. á¼Î½ Ïá¿ ÏαÏκί Î¼Î¿Ï , Colossians 1:24 , see also 1 Peter 2:24 and Huther in loc . The conception of substitution, however, though involved in the thing (in the ἱλαÏÏήÏιον ), is not to be sought in á¼Î½ (in opposition to Böhmer and Baumgarten-Crusius). (3) The reason for the intentional use of the material description: “in the body which consisted of His flesh ” (comp. Colossians 2:11 ; Sir 23:16 ), is to be sought in the apologetic interest of antagonism to the false teachers , against whom, however, the charge of Docetism , possibly on the ground of Colossians 2:23 , can the less be proved (in opposition to Beza, Balduin, Böhmer, Steiger, Huther, and Dalmer), as Paul nowhere in the epistle expressly treats of the material Incarnation , which he would hardly have omitted to do in contrast to Docetism (comp. 1 John). In fact, the apostle found sufficient occasion for writing about the reconciliation as he has done here and in Colossians 1:20 , in the faith in angels on the part of his opponents, by which they ascribed the reconciling mediation with God in part to those higher spiritual beings (who are without Ïῶμα Ïá¿Ï ÏαÏκÏÏ ). Other writers have adopted the view, without any ground whatever in the connection, that Paul has thus written in order to distinguish the real body of Christ from the spiritual Ïῶμα of the church (Bengel, Michaelis, Storr, Olshausen). The other Ïῶμα of Christ, which contrasts with His earthly body of flesh (Romans 1:3 ; Romans 8:3 ), is His glorified heavenly body, Php 3:21 ; 1 Corinthians 15:47 ff. References, however, such as Calvin, e.g ., has discovered (“humile, terrenum et infirmitatibus multis obnoxium corpus”), or Grotius (“tantas res perfecit instrumento adeo tenui;” comp. also Estius and others), are forced upon the words, in which the form of expression is selected simply in opposition to spiritualistic erroneous doctrines. Just as little may we import into the simple historical statement of the means διὰ Ïοῦ θανάÏÎ¿Ï , with Hofmann, the ignominy of shedding His blood on the cross , since no modal definition to that effect is subjoined or indicated.
ÏαÏαÏÏá¿Ïαι á½Î¼á¾¶Ï κ . Ï . λ .] Ethical definition of the object aimed at in the á¼ÏοκαÏηλλ .: ye have been reconciled ⦠in order to present you , etc. The presenting subject is therefore the subject of á¼ÏοκαÏηλλ ., so that it is to be explained: ἵνα ÏαÏαÏÏήÏηÏε á½Î¼á¾¶Ï , ut sisteretis vos , and therefore this continuation of the discourse is by no means awkward in its relation to the reading á¼ÏοκαÏηλλάγηÏε (in opposition to de Wette). We should be only justified in expecting á¼Î±Ï ÏοÏÏ (as Huther suggests) instead of á½Î¼á¾¶Ï (comp. Romans 12:1 ) if (comp. Romans 6:13 ; 2 Timothy 2:15 ) the connection required a reflexive emphasis. According to the reading á¼ÏοκαÏήλλαξεν the sense is ut sisteret vos , in which case, however, the subject would not be Christ (Hofmann), but, as in every case since εá½Î´ÏκηÏε in Colossians 1:19 , God .
The point of time at which the ÏαÏαÏÏ . is to take place (observe the aorist ) is that of the judgment , in which they shall come forth holy, etc., before the Judge . Comp. Colossians 1:28 , and on Ephesians 5:27 . This reference (comp. Bähr, Olshausen, Bleek) is required by the context in Colossians 1:23 , where the ÏαÏαÏÏá¿Ïαι κ . Ï . λ . is made dependent on continuance in the faith as its condition; consequently there cannot be meant the result already accomplished by the reconciliation itself , namely, the state of δικαιοÏÏνη entered upon through it (so usually, including Hofmann). The state of justification sets in at any rate, and unconditionally, through the reconciliation; but it may be lost again, and at the Parousia will be found subsisting only in the event of the reconciled remaining constant to the faith, by means of which they have appropriated the reconciliation, Colossians 1:23 .
á¼Î³Î¯Î¿Ï Ï Îº . Ï . λ .] does not represent the subjects as sacrifices (Romans 12:1 ), which would not consist with the fact that Christ is the sacrifice, and also would not be in harmony with á¼Î½ÎµÎ³ÎºÎ» .; it rather describes without figure the moral holiness which, after the justification attained by means of faith, is wrought by the Holy Spirit (Romans 7:6 ; Romans 8:2 ; Romans 8:9 , et al .), and which, on the part of man, is preserved and maintained by continuance in the faith (Colossians 1:23 ). The three predicates are not intended to represent the relation “erga Deum , respectu vestri , and respectu proximi ” (Bengel, Bähr), since, in point of fact, á¼Î¼ÏÎ¼Î¿Ï Ï ( blameless , Ephesians 1:4 ; Ephesians 5:27 ; Herod, ii. 177; Plat. Rep . p. 487 A: οá½Î´Ê¼ á¼Î½ á½ Îá¿¶Î¼Î¿Ï ÏÏ Î³Îµ ÏοιοῦÏον μÎμÏαιÏο ) no less than á¼Î½ÎµÎ³ÎºÎ» . ( reproachless , 1 Corinthians 1:8 ) points to an external judgment: but the moral condition is intended to be described with exhaustive emphasis positively ( á¼Î³Î¯Î¿Ï Ï ) and negatively ( á¼Î¼Ïμ . and á¼Î½ÎµÎ³ÎºÎ» .). The idea of the moral holiness of the righteous through faith is thoroughly Pauline; comp. not only Ephesians 2:10 , Titus 2:14 ; Titus 3:8 , but also such passages as Romans 6:1-23 ; Romans 8:4 ff.; Gal 5:22-25 ; 1 Corinthians 9:24 ff.; 2 Corinthians 11:2 , et al .
καÏενÏÏιον αá½Ïοῦ ] refers to Christ , [58] to His judicial appearance at the Parousia, just as by the previous αá½Ïοῦ after ΣÎΡÎÎÏ Christ also was meant. The usual reference to God (so Huther, de Wette, Baumgarten-Crusius, Ewald, Bleek) is connected with the reading á¼ÏοκαÏήλλαξεν taken as so referring; comp. Jude 1:24 ; Ephesians 1:4 . The objection that ÎÎΤÎÎÎÎ ÎÎÎ elsewhere occurs only in reference to God , is without force; for that this is the case in the few passages where the word is used, seems to be purely accidental, since á¼Î½ÏÏιον is also applied to Christ (2 Timothy 2:14 ), and since in the notion itself there is nothing opposed to this reference. The frequent use of the expression “before God ” is traceable to the theocratically national currency of this conception, which by no means excludes the expression “before Christ .” So á¼Î¼ÏÏοÏθεν is also used of Christ in 1 Thessalonians 2:19 . Comp. 2 Corinthians 5:10 : á¼ÎΠΡÎΣÎÎΠΤÎῦ ÎÎÎÎΤÎÏ Î¤Îῦ ΧΡÎΣΤÎῦ , which is a commentary on our καÏενÏÏιον αá½Ïοῦ ; see also Matthew 25:32 .
[58] So also Holtzmann, p. 47, though holding in favour of the priority of Ephesians 1:4 , that the sense requires a reference to God, although syntactically the reference is made to Christ. But, in fact, the one is just as consistent with the sense as the other.
REMARK.
The proper reference of ÏαÏαÏÏá¿Ïαι κ . Ï . λ . to the judgment , as also the condition appended in Colossians 1:23 , place it beyond doubt that what is meant here (it is otherwise in Ephesians 1:4 ) is the holiness and blamelessness, which is entered upon through justification by faith actu judiciali and is positively wrought by the Holy Spirit, but which, on the other hand, is preserved and maintained up to the judgment by the self-active perseverance of faith in virtue of the new life of the reconciled (Romans 6:0 ); so that the justitia inhaerens is therefore neither meant alone (Chrysostom, Oecumenius, Theophylact, Calvin, and others), nor excluded (Theodoret, Erasmus, Beza, and others), but is included. Comp. Calovius.
Colossians 1:23 . Requirement, with which is associated not, indeed, the being included in the work of reconciliation (Hofmann), but the attainment of its blessed final aim, which would otherwise be forfeited, namely the ÏαÏαÏÏá¿Ïαι κ . Ï . λ . above described: so far at any rate as ye , i. e. assuming, namely, that ye, etc. A confidence that the readers will fulfil this condition is not conveyed by the εἴγε in itself (see on 2 Corinthians 5:3 ; Galatians 3:4 ; Ephesians 3:2 ), and is not implied here by the context; but Paul sets forth the relation purely as a condition certainly taking place , which they have to fulfil , in order to attain the ÏαÏαÏÏá¿Ïαι κ . Ï . λ . that “fructus in posterum laetissimus” of their reconciliation (Bengel).
μεÏακινοÏμ .] passively , through the influence of false doctrines and other seductive forces.
á¼ÏÏ ] away ⦠from , so as to stand no longer on hope as the foundation of perseverance in the faith. Comp. Galatians 1:6 .
The á¼Î»Ïá½¶Ï Ïοῦ εá½Î±Î³Î³ . (which is proclaimed through the gospel by means of its promises, comp. Colossians 1:5 , and on Ephesians 1:18 ) is the hope of eternal life in the Messianic kingdom, which has been imparted to the believer in the gospel. Comp. Colossians 1:4-5 ; Colossians 1:27 ; Romans 5:2 ; Romans 8:24 ; Titus 1:2 f., Colossians 3:7 .
ÎὠἨÎÎÎΣÎΤΠΠ. Τ . Î . ] three definitions rendering the Îá¿ ÎÎΤÎÎÎÎÎá¿Î£ÎÎÎ Î . Τ . Î . in its universal obligation palpably apparent to the readers; for such a μεÏακινεá¿Ïθαι would, in the case of the Colossians, be inexcusable ( ÎὠἨÎÎÎΣÎΤΠ, comp. Romans 10:18 ), would set at naught the universal proclamation of the gospel ( ΤÎῦ ÎÎΡΥΧΠ. Î . Τ . Î . ), and would stand in contrast to the personal weight of the apostle’s position as its servant ( Îá½ á¼ÎÎÎ . Î . Τ . Î . ). If, with Hofmann, we join ΤÎῦ ÎÎΡΥΧÎÎÎΤÎÏ as an adjective to ΤÎῦ Îá½ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ¥ , ÎὠἨÎÎÎΣÎΤΠ, we withdraw from the ÎὠἨÎÎÎΣÎΤΠthat element of practical significance, which it must have, if it is not to be superfluous. Nor is justice done to the third point, Îá½ á¼ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ Î . Τ . Î . , if the words (so Hofmann, comp. de Wette) are meant to help the apostle, by enforcing what he is thenceforth to write with the weight of his name, to come to his condition at that time . According to this, they would be merely destined as a transition. In accordance with the context, however, and without arbitrary tampering, they can only have the same aim with the two preceding attributives which are annexed to the gospel; and, with this aim, how appropriately and forcibly do they stand at the close! [60] λοιÏὸν Î³á½°Ï Î¼Îγα ἦν Ïὸ ΠαÏÎ»Î¿Ï á½Î½Î¿Î¼Î± , Oecumenius, comp. Chrysostom. Comp. on á¼ÎῺ Î ÎῦÎÎÏ , with a view to urge his personal authority, 2 Corinthians 10:1 ; Galatians 5:2 ; Ephesians 3:1 ; 1 Thessalonians 2:18 ; Philemon 1:19 . It is to be observed, moreover, that if Paul himself had been the teacher of the Colossians, this relation would certainly not have been passed over here in silence.
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÏ ] See on Ephesians 3:7 . Paul has become such through his calling, Galatians 1:15 f.; Ephesians 3:7 . Observe the aorist .
[59] In our Epistle faith is by no means postponed to knowing and perceiving (comp. Colossians 2:5 ; Colossians 2:7 ; Colossians 2:12 ), as Baur asserts in his Neut. Theol. p. 272. The frequent emphasis laid upon knowledge, insight, comprehension, and the like, is not to be put to the account of an intellectualism, which forms a fundamental peculiarity betokening the author and age of this Epistle (and especially of that to the Ephesians), as Holtzmann conceives, p. 216 ff.; on the contrary, it was owing to the attitude of the apostle towards the antagonistic philosophical speculations. Comp. also Grau, Entwickelungsgesch. d. N. T. II. p. 153 ff. It was owing to the necessary relations, in which the apostle, with his peculiarity of being all things to all men, found himself placed towards the interests of the time and place.
[60] According to Baur, indeed, such passages as the present are among those which betray the double personality of the author.
Colossians 1:24 . [61] A more precise description of this relation of service, and that, in the first place, with respect to the sufferings which the apostle is now enduring, Colossians 1:24 , and then with respect to his important calling generally, Colossians 1:25-29 .
νῦν ] places in contrast with the great element of his past , expressed by οὠá¼Î³ÎµÎ½ . κ . Ï . λ ., which has imposed on the apostle so many sorrows (comp. Acts 9:16 ), the situation as it now exists with him in that relation of service on his part to the gospel. This present condition, however, he characterizes, in full magnanimous appreciation of the sufferings under which he writes, as joyfulness over them, and as a becoming perfect in the fellowship of tribulation with Christ, which is accomplished through them. It is plain, therefore, that the emphatic νῦν is not transitional (Bähr) or inferential (Lücke: “quae cum ita sint”); nor yet is it to be defined, with Olshausen, by arbitrary importation of the thought: now, after that I look upon the church as firmly established (comp. Dalmer), or, with Hofmann, to be taken as standing in contrast to the apostolic activity .
á¼Î½ Ïοá¿Ï Ïαθήμ .] over the sufferings; see on Philippians 1:18 ; Romans 5:3 . This joy in suffering is so entirely in harmony with the Pauline spirit, that its source is not to be sought (in opposition to Holtzmann) in 2 Corinthians 7:4 , either for the present passage or for Ephesians 3:13 ; comp. also Philippians 2:17 .
á½Ïá½²Ï á½Î¼á¿¶Î½ ] joins itself to Î ÎÎÎÎÎΣÎÎ so as to form one conception, without connecting article. Comp. on Colossians 1:1 ; Colossians 1:4 ; 2 Corinthians 7:7 ; Ephesians 3:13 ; Galatians 4:14 . Since á½Î ÎΡ , according to the context, is not to be taken otherwise than as in á½Î á¿Î¡ ΤÎῦ ΣÎÎ . Îá½Î¤Îῦ , it can neither mean instead of (Steiger, Catholic expositors, but not Cornelius a Lapide or Estius), nor on account of (Rosenmüller, Heinrichs, Flatt; comp. Ephesians 3:1 ; Philippians 1:29 ), but simply: in commodum , [62] namely, ἵνα á½Î¼á¾¶Ï á½ Ïελá¿Ïαι Î´Ï Î½Î·Î¸á¿¶ , Oecumenius, and that, indeed, by that honourable attestation and glorifying of your Christian state, which is actually contained in my tribulations; for the latter show forth the faith of the readers, for the sake of which the apostle has undertaken and borne the suffering, as the holy divine thing which is worthy of such a sacrifice. Comp. Philippians 1:12 ff.; Ephesians 3:13 . The reference to the example , which confirms the readers’ faith (Grotius, Wolf, Bähr, and others), introduces inappropriately a reflection, the indirect and tame character of which is not at all in keeping with the emotion of the discourse.
The á½Î¼á¿¶Î½ , meaning the readers , though the relation in question concerns Pauline Christians generally , is to be explained by the tendency of affectionate sympathy to individualize (comp. Philippians 1:25 ; Philippians 2:17 , et al. ). It is arbitrary, doubtless, to supply Ïῶν á¼Î¸Î½á¿¶Î½ here from Ephesians 3:1 (Flatt, Huther); but that Paul, nevertheless, has his readers in view as Gentile Christians , and as standing in a special relation to himself as apostle of the Gentiles , is shown by Colossians 1:25-27 .
á¼Î½ÏαναÏληÏá¿¶ ] The double compound is more graphic than the simple á¼Î½Î±ÏληÏá¿¶ , Philippians 2:30 ; 1 Corinthians 16:17 ( I fill up ), since á¼Î½Ïί ( to fill up over against ) indicates what is brought in for the making complete over against the still existing á½ÏÏεÏήμαÏα . The reference of the á¼Î½Ïί lies therefore in the notion of what is lacking; inasmuch, namely, as the incomplete is rendered complete by the very fact, that the supplement corresponding to what is lacking is introduced in its stead. It is the reference of the corresponding adjustment , [63] of the supplying of what is still wanting. Comp. Dem. 182. 22: á¼Î½ÏαναÏληÏοῦνÏÎµÏ ÏÏá½¸Ï Ïὸν εá½ÏοÏÏÏαÏον á¼Îµá½¶ ÏÎ¿á½ºÏ á¼ÏοÏÏÏάÏÎ¿Ï Ï (where the idea is, that the poverty of the latter is compensated for by the wealth of the former); so also á¼Î½ÏαναÏλήÏÏÏÎ¹Ï , Epicur. ap. Diog. L . x. 48; Dio Cass, xliv. 48: á½ Ïον ⦠á¼Î½Îδει , ÏοῦÏο á¼Îº Ïá¿Ï ÏαÏá½° Ïῶν á¼Î»Î»Ïν ÏÏ Î½ÏÎµÎ»ÎµÎ¯Î±Ï á¼Î½ÏαναÏληÏÏθῠ. Comp. á¼Î½ÏεμÏίÏλημι , Xen. Anab . iv. 5. 28; á¼Î½ÏαναÏλήθειν , Xen. Hell . ii. 4. 12; and á¼Î½ÏιÏληÏοῦν , Xen. Cyr . ii. 2. 26. The distinction of the word from the simple á¼Î½Î±ÏληÏοῦν does not consist in this, that the latter is said of him , who “ á½ÏÏÎÏημα a se relictum ipse explet,” and á¼Î½ÏαναÏλ . of him , who “alterius á½ÏÏÎÏημα de suo explet” (so Winer, de verbor. c. praepos. in N. T. usu , 1838, III. p. 22); nor yet in the endurance vieing with Christ, the author of the afflictions (Fritzsche, ad Rom . III. p. 275); but in the circumstance, that in á¼Î½ÏαναÏλ . the filling up is conceived and described as defectui respondens , in á¼Î½Î±Ïλ ., on the other hand, only in general as completio . See 1 Corinthians 16:17 ; Philippians 2:30 ; Plat. Legg . xii. p. 957 A, Tim . p. 78 D, et al . Comp. also Tittmann, Synon . p. 230.
Ïá½° á½ÏÏεÏήμαÏα ] The plural indicates those elements yet wanting in the sufferings of Christ in order to completeness. Comp. 1Th 3:10 ; 2 Corinthians 9:12 .
Ïῶν Î¸Î»Î¯Ï . Ïοῦ ΧÏιÏÏοῦ ] Ïοῦ Χ . is the genitive of the subject . Paul describes, namely, his own sufferings , in accordance with the idea of the κοινÏνεá¿Î½ Ïοá¿Ï Ïοῦ ΧÏιÏÏοῦ ÏαθήμαÏι (1 Peter 4:13 ; comp. Matthew 20:22 ; Hebrews 13:13 ), as afflictions of Christ , in so far as the apostolic suffering in essential character was the same as Christ endured (the same cup which Christ drank, the same baptism with which Christ was baptized). Comp. on Romans 8:17 ; 2 Corinthians 1:5 ; Philippians 3:10 . The collective mass of these afflictions is conceived in the form of a definite measure , just as the phrases á¼Î½Î±ÏιμÏλάναι κακά , á¼Î½Î±Ïλá¿Ïαι κακὸν οἶÏον , and the like, are current in classic authors, according to a similar figurative conception (Hom. Il . viii. 34. 354, 15:132), Schweigh. Lex. Herod . I. p. 42. He only who has suffered all , has filled up the measure. That Paul is now, in his captivity fraught with danger to life, on the point (the present á¼Î½ÏαναÏλ . indicating the being in the act, see Bernhardy, p. 370) of filling up all that still remains behind of this measure of affliction, that he is therefore engaged in the final full solution of his task of suffering, without leaving a single á½ÏÏÎÏημα in it, this he regards as something grand and glorious, and therefore utters the á¼Î½ÏαναÏληÏá¿¶ , which bears the emphasis at the head of this declaration, with all the sense of triumph which the approaching completion of such a work involves. “ I rejoice on account of the sufferings which I endure for you, and so highly have I to esteem this situation of affliction
á¼Î½ Ïá¿ ÏαÏκί Î¼Î¿Ï ] belongs to á¼ÎΤÎÎÎÎ Î . , as to which it specifies the more precise mode; not to Ïῶν Î¸Î»Î¯Ï . Ï . Χ . (so Storr, Flatt, Bähr, Steiger, Böhmer, Huther), with which it might be combined so as to form one idea, but it would convey a more precise description of the Christ-sufferings experienced by the apostle, for which there was no motive, and which was evident of itself. Belonging to á¼Î½ÏαναÏλ ., it contains with á½Î á¿Î¡ ΤÎῦ ΣÎÎ . á¼ . a pointed definition ( ÏάÏξ ⦠Ïῶμα ) of the mode and of the aim. [66] Paul accomplishes that á¼ÎΤÎÎÎÎ ÎÎΡÎῦΠin his flesh , [67] which in its natural weakness, exposed to suffering and death, receives the affliction from without and feels it psychically (comp. 2 Corinthians 4:11 ; Galatians 4:14 ; 1 Peter 4:1 ), for the benefit of the body of Christ, which is the church (comp. Colossians 1:18 ), for the confirmation, advancement, and glory of which (comp. above on á½Ïá½²Ï á½Î¼á¿¶Î½ ) he endures the Christ-sufferings. Comp. Ephesians 3:13 . The significant purpose of the addition of á¼Î ΤῠΣÎΡÎá¿ Î . Τ . Î . is to bring out more clearly and render palpable, in connection with the á¼ÎΤÎÎÎÎ ÎÎΡῶ Î . Τ . Î . , what lofty happiness he experiences in this very á¼Î½ÏαναÏληÏοῦν . He is therein privileged to step in with his mortal ΣÎΡΠfor the benefit of the holy and eternal body of Christ, which is the church.
[61] See upon ver. 24, Lücke, Progr. 1833; Huther in the Stud. u. Krit. 1838, p. 189 ff.
[62] So also Bisping, who, however, explains it of the meritoriousness of good works availing for others.
[63] Many ideas are arbitrarily introduced by commentators, in order to bring out of the á¼Î½Ïί in á¼Î½ÏαναÏλ . a reciprocal relation. See e.g. Clericus: “Ille ego, qui olim ecclesiam Christi vexaveram, nunc vicissim in ejus utilitatem pergo multa mala perpeti.” Others (see already Oecumenius) have found in it the meaning: for requital of that which Christ suffered for us; comp. also Grimm in his Lexicon. Wetstein remarks shortly and rightly: “ á¼Î½Ïá½¶ á½ÏÏεÏήμαÏÎ¿Ï succedit ÏλήÏÏμα ,” or rather á¼Î½Î±ÏλήÏÏμα .
[64] When de Wette describes our view of Î¸Î»Î¯Ï . Ï . Χ . as tame, and Schenkel as tautological, the incorrectness of this criticism arises from their not observing that the stress of the expression lies on á¼Î½ÏαναÏληÏá¿¶ , and not on Ï . θλ . Ï . Χ .
[65] Comp. also Sabatier, l’apôtre Paul, p. 213.
[66] Steiger rightly perceived that á¼Î½ Ï . ÏαÏκί μ . and á½Ïá½²Ï Ï . Ï . á¼ . belong together; but he erroneously coupled both with Ïῶν θλ . Ï . Χ . (“the sufferings which Christ endures in my flesh for His body”), owing to his incorrect view of the θλίÏÎµÎ¹Ï Ï . Χ
[67] Hofmann thinks, without reason, that, according to our explanation of á¼Î½ÏαναÏληÏá¿¶ κ . Ï . λ ., we ought to join á¼Î½ Ïá¿ ÏαÏκί Î¼Î¿Ï with Ïῶν Î¸Î»Î¯Ï . Ï . Χ ., as the latter would otherwise be without any reference to the person of the apostle. It has, in fact, this reference through the very statement, that the á¼Î½ÏαναÏληÏοῦν κ . Ï . λ . takes places in the flesh of the apostle.
Colossians 1:25 . That He suffers thus, as is stated in Colossians 1:24 , for the good of the church , is implied in his special relation of service to the latter; hence the epexegetical relative clause á¼§Ï á¼Î³ÎµÎ½Ïμην κ . Ï . λ . (comp. on Colossians 1:18 ): whose servant I have become in conformity with my divine appointment as preacher to the Gentiles ( καÏá½° Ï . οἰκον . κ . Ï . λ .). In this way Paul now brings this his specific and distinctive calling into prominence after the general description of himself as servant of the gospel in Colossians 1:23 , and here again he gives expression to the consciousness of his individual authority by the emphasized á¼Î³Ï . The relation of the testimony regarding himself in Colossians 1:25 to that of Colossians 1:23 is climactic , not that of a clumsy duplicate (Holtzmann).
καÏá½° Ïὴν οἰκονομ . κ . Ï . λ .] in accordance with the stewardship of God, which is given to me with reference to you . The οἰκονομία Ï . Îεοῦ is in itself nothing else than a characteristic designation of the apostolic office, in so far as its holder is appointed as administrator of the household of God (the οἰκοδεÏÏÏÏÎ·Ï ), by which, in the theocratic figurative conception, is denoted the church (comp. 1 Timothy 3:15 ). Comp. 1 Corinthians 9:17 ; 1 Corinthians 4:1 ; Titus 1:7 . Hence such an one is, in consequence of this office conferred upon him, in his relation to the church the servant of the latter (2 Corinthians 4:5 ), to which function God has appointed him, just because he is His steward. This sacred stewardship then receives its more precise distinguishing definition, so far as it is entrusted to Paul , by the addition of Îµá¼°Ï á½Î¼á¾¶Ï κ . Ï . λ . It is purely arbitrary, and at variance with the context ( Ïὴν δοθ . μοι ), to depart from the proper signification, and to take it as institution, arrangement (see on Ephesians 1:10 ; Ephesians 3:2 ). So Chrysostom and his successors (with much wavering), Beza, Calvin, Estius, Rosenmüller, and others. It is well said by Cornelius a Lapide: “in domo Dei, quae est ecclesia, sum oeconomus, ut dispensem ⦠bona et dona Dei domini mei.” Comp. on 1 Corinthians 4:1 .
Îµá¼°Ï á½Î¼á¾¶Ï ] although the office concerned Gentile Christians generally; a concrete appropriation, as in Colossians 1:24 . Comp. on Philippians 1:24 . It is to be joined with Ï . δοθεá¿Ïάν μοι , as in Ephesians 3:2 ; not with ÏληÏá¿¶Ïαι κ . Ï . λ . (Hofmann), with the comprehensive tenor of which the individualizing “ for you ” is not in harmony, when it is properly explained (see below).
[68] Who rightly says: “Nimirum impletur ita verbum non ratione sui ceu imperfectum, sed ratione hominum, cum ad plures sese diffundit.”
[69] In a similarly artificial fashion, emptying the purposely chosen expression of its meaning, Hofmann comes ultimately to the bare sense: “to proclaim God’s word,” asserting that the word is a fact, and so he who proclaims the fact fulfils it.
Colossians 1:26 . Appositional more precise definition of the λÏÎ³Î¿Ï Ïοῦ Îεοῦ , and that as regards its great contents .
As to Ïὸ Î¼Ï ÏÏήÏιον κ . Ï . λ ., the decree of redemption , hidden from eternity in God, fulfilled through Christ, and made known through the gospel, see on Ephesians 1:9 . It embraces the Gentiles also; and this is a special part of its nature that had been veiled (see Ephesians 3:5 ), which, however, is not brought into prominence till Colossians 1:27 . Considering the so frequent treatment of this idea in Paul’s writings, and its natural correlation with that of the γνῶÏÎ¹Ï , an acquaintance with the Gospel of Matthew (Matthew 13:11 ) is not to be inferred here (Holtzmann). [70]
á¼Ïὸ Ïῶν αἰÏνÏν κ . á¼Ïὸ Ïῶν γενεῶν ] This twofold description, as also the repetition of á¼ÏÏ , has solemn emphasis: from the ages and from the generations . The article indicates the ages that had existed (since the beginning), and the generations that have lived. As to á¼Ïὸ Ïῶν αἰÏνÏν , comp. on Ephesians 3:9 . Paul could not write ÏÏὸ Ïῶν αἰÏν ., because while the divine decree was formed prior to all time (1 Corinthians 2:7 ; 2 Timothy 1:9 ), its concealment is not conceivable before the beginning of the times and generations of mankind, to whom it remained unknown. Expressions such as Romans 16:25 , ÏÏÏÎ½Î¿Î¹Ï Î±á¼°ÏÎ½Î¯Î¿Î¹Ï , [71] and Titus 1:2 (see Huther in loc .), do not conflict with this view. á¼Ïὸ Ï . γενεῶν does not occur elsewhere in the N. T.; but comp. Acts 15:21 . The two ideas are not to be regarded as synonymous (in opposition to Huther and others), but are to be kept separate ( times men ).
Ïοá¿Ï á¼ÎÎÎÎÏ Îá½Î¤Îῦ ] i.e . not: to the apostles and prophets of the N. T . (Flatt, Bähr, Böhmer, Steiger, Olshausen, Baumgarten-Crusius, following Estius and. older expositors, and even Theodoret, who, however, includes other Christians also), a view which is quite unjustifiably imported from Ephesians 3:5 , [72] whence also the reading á¼ÏοÏÏÏÎ»Î¿Î¹Ï (instead of á¼ÎÎÎÎÏ ) in F G has arisen. It refers to the Christians generally . The mystery was indeed announced to all (Colossians 1:23 ), but was made manifest only to the believers, who as such are the κληÏοὶ ἠγιοι belonging to God, Romans 1:7 ; Romans 8:30 ; Romans 9:23 f. Huther wrongly desires to leave ΤÎá¿Ï á¼ÎÎÎÎÏ indefinite , because the Î¼Ï ÏÏήÏιον , so far as it embraced the Gentiles also, had not come to be known to many Jewish-Christians. But, apart from the fact that the Judaists did not misapprehend the destination of redemption for the Gentiles in itself and generally, but only the direct character of that destination (without a transition through Judaism, Acts 15:1 , et al .), the á¼ÏανεÏÏθη Ïοá¿Ï á¼Î³Î¯Î¿Î¹Ï αá½Ïοῦ is in fact a summary assertion, which is to be construed a potiori , and does not cease to be true on account of exceptional cases, in which the result was not actually realized.
[70] Just as little ground is there for tracing καÏá½° Ïá½° á¼Î½ÏάλμαÏα κ . Ï . λ ., in Colossians 2:22 , to Matthew 15:9 ; οὠκÏαÏῶν , in Colossians 2:19 , to Matthew 7:3-4 ; á¼ÏάÏη , in Colossians 2:8 , to Matthew 13:22 ; and in other instances. The author, who manifests so much lively copiousness of language, was certainly not thus confined and dependent in thought and expression.
[71] According to Holtzmann, indeed, p. 309 ff., the close of the Epistle to the Romans is to be held as proceeding from the post-apostolic auctor ad Ephesios , a position which is attempted to be proved by the tones (quite Pauline, however) which Romans 16:15-27 has in common with Colossians 1:26 f.; Ephesians 3:20 ; Ephesians 3:9-10 ; Ephesians 5:21 ; and in support of it an erroneous interpretation of διὰ γÏαÏῶν ÏÏοÏηÏικῶν , in Romans 16:26 , is invoked.
[72] Holtzmann also, p. 49, would have the apostles thought of “first of all.” The resemblances to Ephesians 3:3 ; Ephesians 3:5 do not postulate the similarity of the conception throughout. This would assume a mechanical process of thought, which could not be proved.
Colossians 1:27 . Not exposition of the á¼ÏÎ±Î½ÎµÏ . Ïοá¿Ï á¼Î³ . αá½Ïοῦ , since the γνÏÏίÏαι has for its object not the Î¼Ï ÏÏήÏιον itself, but the glory of the latter among the Gentiles . In reality, Î¿á¼·Ï subjoins an onward movement of the discourse, so that to the general Ïὸ Î¼Ï ÏÏήÏιον á¼ÏανεÏÏθη Ïοá¿Ï á¼Î³ . αá½Ïοῦ a particular element is added: “The mystery was made manifest to His saints, to them, to whom ( quippe quibus ) God withal desired especially to make known that , which is the riches of the glory of this mystery among the Gentiles.” Along with the general á¼ÏανεÏÏθη Ïοá¿Ï á¼Î³Î¯Î¿Î¹Ï αá½Ïοῦ God had this special definite direction of His will. From this the reason is plain why Paul has written, not simply Î¿á¼·Ï á¼Î³Î½ÏÏιÏεν á½ ÎεÏÏ , but Î¿á¼·Ï á¼ Î¸ÎλεÏεν á½ ÎÎµá½¸Ï Î³Î½ÏÏίÏαι . The meaning that is usually discovered in ἠθÎληÏεν , free grace , and the like (so Chrysostom, Theodoret, Calvin, Beza, and many others, including Bähr, Böhmer, de Wette; Huther is, with reason, doubtful), is therefore not the aim of the word, which is also not intended to express the joyfulness of the announcement (Hofmann), but simply and solely the idea: “He had a mind.”
γνÏÏίÏαι ] to make known , like á¼ÏανεÏÏθη from which it differs in meaning not essentially, but only to this extent, that by á¼ÏÎ±Î½ÎµÏ . the thing formerly hidden is designated as openly displayed (Romans 1:19 ; Romans 3:21 ; Romans 16:26 ; Ephesians 5:13 , et al .), and by γνÏÏίÏαι that which was formerly unknown as brought to knowledge . Comp. Romans 16:26 ; Romans 9:22 ; Ephesians 1:9 ; Ephesians 3:3 ; Ephesians 3:5 ; Ephesians 3:10 ; Ephesians 6:19 ; Luke 2:15 , et al . The latter is not related to á¼ÏÎ±Î½ÎµÏ . either as a something more (Bähr: the making fully acquainted with the nature); or as its result (de Wette); or as entering more into detail (Baumgarten-Crusius); or as making aware, namely by experience (Hofmann).
Ïί Ïὸ ÏλοῦÏÎ¿Ï Ïá¿Ï δÏÎ¾Î·Ï Îº . Ï . λ .] what is the riches of the glory of this mystery among the Gentiles , i.e. what rich fulness of the glory contained in this mystery exists among the Gentiles , since, indeed, this riches consists in the fact ( á½ Ï á¼ÏÏι ), that Christ is among you, in whom ye have the hope of glory. In order to a proper interpretation, let it be observed: (1) Ïί occupies with emphasis the place of the indirect á½ Ïι (see Poppo, ad Xen. Cyrop . i. 2. 10; Kühner, ad Mem . i. 1. 1; Winer, p. 158 f. [E. T. 210]), and denotes “ quae sint divitiae” as regards degree : how great and unspeakable the riches, etc. Comp. on Ephesians 1:18 ; Ephesians 3:18 . The text yields this definition of the sense from the very connection with the quantitative idea Ïὸ ÏλοῦÏÎ¿Ï . (2) All the substantives are to be left in their full solemn force, without being resolved into adjectives (Erasmus, Luther, and many others: the glorious riches; Beza: “divitiae gloriosi hujus mysterii”). Chrysostom aptly remarks: ÏÎµÎ¼Î½á¿¶Ï Îµá¼¶Ïε καὶ á½Î³ÎºÎ¿Î½ á¼ÏÎθηκεν á¼Ïὸ Ïολλá¿Ï διαθÎÏεÏÏ , á¼ÏιÏάÏÎµÎ¹Ï Î¶Î·Ïá¿¶Ï á¼ÏιÏάÏεÏν . Comp. Calvin: “ magniloquus est in extollenda evangelii dignitate.” (3) As Ïá¿Ï δÏÎ¾Î·Ï is governed by Ïὸ ÏλοῦÏÎ¿Ï , so also is Ïοῦ Î¼Ï ÏÏηÏÎ¯Î¿Ï governed by Ïá¿Ï δÏÎ¾Î·Ï , and á¼Î½ Ïοá¿Ï á¼Î¸Î½ . belongs to the á¼ÏÏί which is to be supplied, comp. Ephesians 1:18 . (4) According to the context, the δÏξα cannot be anything else (see immediately below, ἡ á¼Î»Ïá½¶Ï Ïá¿Ï δÏÎ¾Î·Ï ) than the Messianic glory, the glory of the kingdom (Romans 8:18 ; Rom 8:21 ; 2 Corinthians 4:17 , et al .), the glorious blessing of the κληÏονομία (comp. Colossians 1:12 ), which before the Parousia (Romans 8:30 ; Colossians 3:3 f.) is the ideal ( á¼Î»ÏÎ¯Ï ), but after it is the realized, possession of believers. Hence it is neither to be taken in the sense of the glorious effects generally , which the gospel produces among the Gentiles (Chrysostom, Theophylact, and many others, including Huther, comp. Dalmer), nor in that specially of their conversion from death to life (Hofmann), whereby its glory is unfolded. Just as little, however, is the δÏξα of God meant, in particular His wisdom and grace, which manifest themselves objectively in the making known of the mystery, and realize themselves subjectively by moral glorification and by the hope of eternal glory (de Wette), or the splendor internus of true Christians, or the bliss of the latter combined with their moral dignity (Böhmer). (5) The genitive of the subject, Ïοῦ Î¼Ï ÏÏηÏÎ¯Î¿Ï ÏοÏÏÎ¿Ï , defines the δÏξα as that contained in the Î¼Ï Î±ÏήÏιον , previously unknown, but now become manifest with the mystery that has been made known, as the blessed contents of the latter. Comp. Colossians 1:23 : á¼Î»ÏÎ¯Ï Ïοῦ εá½Î±Î³Î³ÎµÎ»Î¯Î¿Ï . To take the δÏξα as attribute of the mystery , is forbidden by what immediately follows, according to which the idea can be none other than the familiar one of that glory, which is the proposed aim of the saving revelation and calling, the object of faith and hope (in opposition to Hofmann and many others); Colossians 3:4 . Comp. on Romans 5:2 .
á¼Î½ Ïοá¿Ï á¼Î¸Î½ÎµÏιν ] ÏαίνεÏαι δὲ á¼Î½ á¼ÏÎÏÎ¿Î¹Ï , Ïολλῷ δὲ ÏλÎον á¼Î½ ÏοÏÏÎ¿Î¹Ï á¼¡ Ïολλὴ Ïοῦ Î¼Ï ÏÏηÏÎ¯Î¿Ï Î´Ïξα , Chrysostom. “Qui tot saeculis demersi fuerant in morte, ut viderentur penitus desperati,” Calvin.
[73] Hence also to be rendered not in vobis (Luther, Böhmer, Olshausen), but inter vos. The older writers combated the rendering in vobis from opposition to the Fanatics.
Colossians 1:28 . Christ was not proclaimed by all in the definite character just expressed, namely, as “ Christ among the Gentiles, the hope of glory;” other teachers preached Him in a Judaistic form, as Saviour of the Jews, amidst legal demands and with theosophic speculation. Hence the emphasis with which not the simply epexegetic ὠν (Erasmus and others), but the ἡμεá¿Ï , which is otherwise superfluous, is brought forward; [74] by which Paul has meant himself along with Timothy and other like-minded preachers to the Gentiles ( we, on our part ). This emphasizing of ἡμεá¿Ï , however, requires the ὠν to be referred to Christ regarded in the Gentile-Messianic character, precisely as the ἡμεá¿Ï make Him known (comp. Philippians 1:17 f.), thereby distinguishing themselves from others; not to Christ generally (Hofmann), in which case the emphasizing of ἡμεá¿Ï is held to obtain its explanation only from the subsequent clause of purpose, ἵνα ÏαÏαÏÏ . κ . Ï . λ .
The specification of the mode of announcement Î½Î¿Ï Î¸ÎµÏοῦνÏÎµÏ and διδάÏκονÏÎµÏ , admonishing and teaching , corresponds to the two main elements of the evangelical preaching μεÏανοεá¿Ïε and ÏιÏÏεÏεÏε (Acts 20:21 ; Acts 26:18 ; Romans 3:3 ff.; Mark 1:15 ). Respecting the idea of Î½Î¿Ï Î¸ÎµÏεá¿Î½ , see on Ephesians 6:4 . It occurs also joined with διδάÏκ . [75] in Plato, Legg . viii. p. 845 B, Prot . p. 323 D, Apol . p. 26 A; Dem. 130. 2.
á¼Î½ ÏάÏá¿ ÏοÏίᾳ ] belongs to ÎÎÎ¥ÎÎΤ . and ÎÎÎÎΣΠ. :by means of every wisdom (comp. Colossians 3:16 ) which we bring to bear thereon. It is the Ïá¿¶Ï of the process of warning and teaching, comp. 1 Corinthians 3:10 , in which no sort of wisdom remains unemployed. The fact that Paul, in 1 Corinthians 1:17 , comp. Colossians 2:1 ; Colossians 2:4 , repudiates the ΣÎΦÎÎ ÎÎÎÎÎ¥ in his method of teaching, is not taking into consideration the sense in which ΣÎΦÎÎ there occurs at variance, but rather in keeping, with the present assertion, which applies, not to the wisdom of the world , but to Christian wisdom in its manifold forms.
The thrice repeated. ÏάνÏα á¼Î½Î¸ÏÏÏον (in opposition to the Judaizing tendency of the false teachers) “maximam habet ÎÎÎÎÎΤÎΤΠac vim,” Bengel. The proud feeling of the apostle of the world expresses itself. [76]
ἵνα ÏαÏαÏÏÎ®Ï . κ . Ï . λ .] The purpose of the ὠἡμεá¿Ï καÏαγγÎλλομεν down to ÏοÏίᾳ . This purpose is not in general, that man may so appear (Bleek), or come to stand so (Hofmann), but it refers, as in Colossians 1:22 , and without mixing up the conception of sacrifice (in opposition to Bähr and Baumgarten-Crusius), to the judgment (comp. on 2 Corinthians 4:14 ), at which it is the highest aim and glory (1 Thessalonians 2:19 f.) of the apostolic teachers to make every man come forward ÏÎλειον á¼Î½ Χ . á¼Î½ ΧÏιÏÏá¿· contains the distinguishing specialty of the ÏελειÏÏÎ·Ï , as Christian , which is not based on anything outside of Christ, or on any other element than just on Him. It is perfection in respect of the whole Christian nature; not merely of knowledge (Chrysostom, Theophylact, and others, including Böhmer), but also of life. Moreover, this á¼Î½ Χ . is so essential to the matter, and so current with the apostle, that there is no ground for finding in it an opposition to a doctrine of the law and of angels (Chrysostom, Theophylact, and others). Theophylact, however (comp. Chrysostom), rightly observes regarding the entire clause of purpose: Ïί λÎÎ³ÎµÎ¹Ï ; ÏάνÏα á¼Î½Î¸ÏÏÏον ; ναί , ÏηÏι , ÏοῦÏο ÏÏÎ¿Ï Î´Î¬Î¶Î¿Î¼ÎµÎ½ · εἰ δὲ μὴ γÎνηÏαι , οá½Î´á½²Î½ ÏÏá½¸Ï á¼¡Î¼á¾¶Ï .
[74] Without due reason, Holtzmann, p. 153, finds the use of the plural disturbing, and the whole verse tautological as coming after ver. 25. It is difficult, however, to mistake the full and solemn style of the passage, to which also the thrice repeated ÏάνÏα á¼Î½Î¸ÏÏÏον belongs.
[75] In Colossians 3:16 the two words stand in the inverse order, because there it is not the μεÏανοεá¿Î½ preceding the ÏίÏÏÎ¹Ï which is the aim of the Î½Î¿Ï Î¸ÎµÏία , but mutual improvement on the part of believers.
[76] Which Hofmann groundlessly calls in question, finding in ÏάνÏα á¼Î½Î¸ÏÏÏον the idea: “every one singly and severally.” This is gratuitously introduced, and would have been significantly expressed by Paul through á¼Î½Î± á¼ÎºÎ±ÏÏον (Acts 20:31 ), or through the addition of καθʼ á¼Î½Î± , or otherwise; comp. also 1 Thessalonians 2:11 . Calvin hits the thought properly: “ut sine exceptione totus mundus ex me discat.”
Colossians 1:29 . On the point of now urging upon the readers their obligation to fidelity in the faith (Colossians 2:4 ), and that from the platform of the personal relation in which he stood towards them as one unknown to them by face (Colossians 2:1 ), Paul now turns from the form of expression embracing others in common with himself , into which he had glided at Colossians 1:28 in harmony with its contents, back to the individual form (the first person singular ), and asserts, first of all, in connection with Colossians 1:28 , that for the purpose of the ÏαÏαÏÏá¿Ïαι κ . Ï . λ . ( Îµá¼°Ï á½ , comp. 1 Timothy 4:10 ) he also gives himself even toil ( κοÏιῶ , comp. Romans 16:6 ; Romans 16:12 ; 1 Corinthians 4:12 ), striving, etc.
καί ] also , subjoins the κοÏιᾶν to the καÏαγγÎλλειν κ . Ï . λ ., in which he subjects himself also to the former; it is therefore augmentative , in harmony with the climactic progress of the discourse; not a mere equalization of the aim and the striving (de Wette). Neither this καί , nor even the transition to the singular of the verb, especially since the latter is not emphasized by the addition of an á¼Î³Ï , can justify the interpretation of Hofmann, according to which Îµá¼°Ï á½ is, contrary to its position, to be attached to á¼Î³ÏνιζÏÎ¼ÎµÎ½Î¿Ï , and κοÏιῷ is to mean: “ I become weary and faint ” (comp. John 4:6 ; Revelation 2:3 , and Düsterdieck in loc .). Paul, who has often impressed upon others the μὴ á¼ÎºÎºÎ±ÎºÎµá¿Î½ , and for himself is certain of being more than conqueror in all things (Romans 8:37 ; 2 Corinthians 4:8 , et al. ), can hardly have borne testimony about himself in this sense, with which, moreover, the á¼Î³ÏνίζεÏθαι in the strength of Christ is not consistent. In his case, as much as in that of any one, the οá½Îº á¼ÎºÎ¿ÏίαÏÎ±Ï of Revelation 2:3 holds good.
á¼Î³ÏνιζÏÎ¼ÎµÎ½Î¿Ï ] Compare 1 Timothy 4:10 . Here, however, according to the context, Colossians 2:1 ff., the inward striving (comp. Luke 13:24 ) against difficulties and hostile forces, the striving of solicitude, of watching, of mental and emotional exertion, of prayer, etc., is meant; as respects which Paul, like every regenerate person (Galatians 5:17 ), could not be raised above the resistance of the ÏάÏξ to the Ïνεῦμα ruling in him. Comp. Chrysostom: καὶ οá½Ï á¼ÏÎ»á¿¶Ï ÏÏÎ¿Ï Î´Î¬Î¶Ï , ÏηÏιν , οá½Î´á½² á½¡Ï á¼ÏÏ Ïεν , á¼Î»Î»á½° κοÏιῶ á¼Î³ÏνιζÏÎ¼ÎµÎ½Î¿Ï Î¼ÎµÏá½° Ïολλá¿Ï Ïá¿Ï ÏÏÎ¿Ï Î´á¿Ï , μεÏá½° Ïολλá¿Ï Ïá¿Ï á¼Î³ÏÏ ÏÎ½Î¯Î±Ï . It is not: “tot me periculis ac malis objicere” (Erasmus, comp. Grotius, Estius, Heinrichs, Bähr, and others), which outward struggling, according to Flatt, de Wette, Baumgarten-Crusius, and others, should be understood along with that inward striving; Colossians 2:1 only points to the latter; comp. Colossians 4:12 .
καÏá½° Ïὴν á¼Î½ÎÏγειαν κ . Ï . λ .] for Paul does not contend, amid the labours of his office, according to the measure of his own strength, but according to the effectual working of Christ ( αá½Ïοῦ is not to be referred to God , as is done by Chrysostom, Grotius, Flatt, Baumgarten-Crusius, and others), which worketh in him . Comp. Philippians 4:13 . How must this consciousness, at once so humble and confident of victory, have operated upon the readers to stir them up and strengthen them for stedfastness in the faith!
Ïὴν á¼Î½ÎµÏÎ³Î¿Ï Î¼ .] is middle; see on 2 Corinthians 1:6 ; Galatians 5:6 ; Ephesians 3:20 . The modal definition to it, á¼Î½ Î´Ï Î½Î¬Î¼ÎµÎ¹ , mightily (comp. on Romans 1:4 ), is placed at the end significantly, as in 2 Thessalonians 1:11 ; it is groundlessly regarded by Holtzmann as probably due to the interpolator.
Bibliographical Information Meyer, Heinrich. "Commentary on Colossians 1". Meyer's Critical and Exegetical Commentary on the New Testament. https://studylight.org/commentaries/eng/hmc/colossians-1.html. 1832.
Introduction
ΠαÏÎ»Î¿Ï á¼ÏιÏÏολὴ ÏÏá½¸Ï ÎολοÏÏαεá¿Ï
A B K min. Copt. have the superscription ÏÏá½¸Ï ÎολαÏÏαεá¿Ï . So Matth. Lachm. and Tisch. Comp. on Colossians 1:2 .
CHAPTER 1
Colossians 1:1 . The arrangement ΧÏιÏÏοῦ ἸηÏοῦ (Lachm. Tisch.) has preponderant testimony in its favour, but not the addition of ἸηÏοῦ after ΧÏιÏÏοῦ in Colossians 1:2 (Lachm.).
Colossians 1:2 . ÎολοÏÏαá¿Ï ] K P, also C and × in the subscription, min. Syr. utr. Copt. Or. Nyss. Amphiloch. Theodoret, Damasc. et. al. have ÎολαÏÏαá¿Ï . Approved by Griesb., following Erasm. Steph. Wetst.; adopted by Matth. Lach. Tisch. 7. The Recepta is supported by B D E F G L × , min. Vulg. It. Clem. Chrys. Theophyl. Tert. Ambrosiast. Pelag. The matter is to be judged thus: (1) The name in itself correct is undoubtedly ÎολοÏÏαί , which is supported by coins of the city (Eckhel, Doctr. num. III. p. 107) and confirmed by Herod. vii. 30 (see Wessel. and Valck. in loc.); Xen. Anab. i. 2. 6 (see Bornem. in loc.); Strabo, xii. 8, p. 576; Plin. N. H. v. 32. (2) But since the form ÎολαÏÏαί has so old and considerable attestation, and is preserved in Herodotus and Xenophon as a various reading, as also in Polyaen. viii. 16, and therefore a mere copyist’s error cannot be found in the case the more especially as the copyists, even apart from the analogy which suggested itself to them of the well-known κολοÏÏÏÏ , would naturally be led to the prevalent form of the name ÎολοÏÏαί , we must assume that, although ÎολοÏÏαί was the more formally correct name, still the name ÎολαÏÏαί was also (vulgarly) in use, that this was the name which Paul himself wrote, and that ÎολοÏÏαá¿Ï is an ancient correction. If the latter had originally a place in the text, there would have been no occasion to alter the generally known and correct form of the name.
After ÏαÏÏá½¸Ï á¼¡Î¼á¿¶Î½ , Elz. (Lachm. in brackets) has καὶ ÎºÏ ÏÎ¯Î¿Ï á¼¸Î·Ïοῦ ΧÏιÏÏοῦ , in opposition to B D E K L, min. vss. and Fathers. A complementary addition in accordance with the openings of other epistles, especially as no ground for intentional omission suggests itself (in opposition to Reiche, Comm. crit. p. 351 f.).
Colossians 1:3 . καὶ ÏαÏÏί ] Lachm. and Tisch. 7: ÏαÏÏί . So B C*, vss. and Fathers, while D* F G, Chrys. have Ïá¿· ÏαÏÏί . Since, however, Paul always writes á½ ÎÎµá½¸Ï ÎºÎ±á½¶ ÏαÏá½´Ï Ïοῦ ÎºÏ ÏÎ¯Î¿Ï ( Rom 15:6 ; 2 Corinthians 1:3 ; 2 Corinthians 11:31 ; Ephesians 1:3 ; also 1 Corinthians 15:24 ; Ephesians 5:20 ), and never á½ ÎÎµá½¸Ï á½ ÏαÏá½´Ï Ï . κ . or á½ ÎÎµá½¸Ï ÏαÏá½´Ï Ï . κ ., the Recepta, which has in its favour A C** D*** E K L P × , min. Vulg. and Fathers, is with Tisch. 8 to be retained. The καί was readily omitted in a mechanical way after the immediately preceding Îεοῦ ÏαÏÏÏÏ .
Instead of ÏεÏί , Lachm. reads á½ÏÎÏ , which is also recommended by Griesb., following B D* E* F G, min. Theophyl. Not attested by preponderating evidence, and easily introduced in reference to Colossians 1:9 (where á½ÏÎÏ stands without variation).
Colossians 1:4 . Instead of ἣν á¼ÏεÏε (which is recommended by Griesb., adopted by Lachm. and Tisch.), Elz. Matth. Scholz have Ïήν merely, but in opposition to A C D* E* F G P × , min. vss. (including Vulg. It.) Fathers. If Ïήν were originally written, why should it have been exchanged for ἣν á¼ÏεÏε ? On the other hand, ἣν á¼ÏεÏε , as it could be dispensed with for the sense, might easily drop out, because the word preceding concludes with the syllable HN, and the word following ( Îµá¼°Ï ), like á¼ÏεÏε , begins with E. The grammatical gap would then, following Ephesians 1:15 , be filled up by Ïήν .
Colossians 1:6 . καὶ á¼ÏÏι ] καί is wanting in A B C D* E* P × , min. and some vss. and Fathers; condemned by Griesb., omitted by Lachm. and Tisch. 8. But, not being understood, this καί , which has the most important vss. and Fathers in its favour, was omitted in the interest of simplicity as disturbing the connection.
καὶ αá½Î¾Î±Î½Ïμενον ] is wanting in Elz. Matth., who is of opinion that Chrys. introduced it from Colossians 1:10 . But it is so decisively attested, that the omission must be looked upon as caused by the homoeoteleuton, the more especially as a similar ending and a similar beginning here came together (ONKA).
Ver 7. ÎºÎ±Î¸á½¼Ï ÎºÎ±Î¯ ] καί is justly condemned by Griesb. on decisive evidence, and is omitted by Lachm. and Tisch. A mechanical repetition from the preceding.
á½Î¼á¿¶Î½ ] ABD*GF × *, min.: ἡμῶν ; approved by Griesb., adopted by Lachm. But since the first person both precedes and follows ( ἡμῶν ⦠ἡμá¿Î½ ), it was put here also by careless copyists.
Colossians 1:10 . After ÏεÏιÏαÏá¿Ïαι , Elz. Tisch. 7 have á½Î¼á¾¶Ï , against decisive testimony; a supplementary addition.
Îµá¼°Ï Ïὴν á¼ÏίγνÏÏιν ] Griesb. Lachm. Scholz. Tisch. 8 have Ïá¿ á¼ÏιγνÏÏει . So A B C D* E* F G P × , min. Clem. Cyr. Maxim. But it lacks the support of the vss., which (Vulg. It. in scientia Dei) have read the Recepta Îµá¼°Ï Ï . á¼Ïίγν . attested by D*** E** K L and most min., also Theodoret, Dam. Theophyl. Oec., or with × ** and Chrys. á¼Î½ Ïá¿ á¼ÏιγνÏÏει . The latter, as well as the mere Ï á¿Í á¼Ïιγν ., betrays itself as an explanation of the difficult Îµá¼°Ï Ï . á¼Ïίγν ., which, we may add, belongs to the symmetrical structure of the whole discourse, the participial sentences of which all conclude with a destination introduced by Îµá¼°Ï .
Colossians 1:12 . ἱκανÏÏανÏι ] Lachm.: καλÎÏανÏι καὶ ἱκανÏÏανÏι , according to B, whilst D* F G, min. Arm. Aeth. It. Didym. Ambrosiast. Vigil. have καλÎÏανÏι merely. Looking at the so isolated attestation of καλ . κ . ἱκαν ., we must assume that καλÎÏανÏι was written on the margin by way of complement, and then was in some cases inserted with καί , and in others without καί substituted for ἱκανÏÏ .
Instead of á¼¡Î¼Î±Ï , Tisch. 8 has á½Î¼á¾¶Ï ; but the latter, too weakly attested by B × , easily slipped in by means of the connection with εá½ÏÎ±Ï .
Colossians 1:14 . After á¼ÏÎ¿Î»Ï ÏÏ . Elz. has διὰ Ïοῦ αἵμαÏÎ¿Ï Î±á½Ïοῦ , against decisive testimony; from Ephesians 1:7 .
Colossians 1:16 . Ïá½° á¼Î½ Ïοá¿Ï οá½Ïανοá¿Ï καὶ Ïά ] Lachm. has erased the first Ïά and bracketed the second. In both cases the Ïά is wanting in B × *, Or.; the first Ïά only is wanting in D* E* F G P and two min. But how easily might TA be absorbed in the final syllable of Ïάν TA; and this would then partially involve the omission of the second Ïά ! The assumption that the final syllable of ÏάνÏα was written twice would only be warranted, if the omitting witnesses, especially in the case of the second Ïά , were stronger.
Colossians 1:20 . The second δἰ αá½Ïοῦ is wanting in B D* F G L, min. Vulg. It. Sahid. Or. Cyr. Chrys. Theophyl. and Latin Fathers. Omitted by Lachm. It was passed over as superfluous, obscure, and disturbing the sense.
Colossians 1:21 . Instead of the Recepta á¼ÏοκαÏήλλαξεν , Lachm., following B, has á¼ÏοκαÏηλλάγηÏε . D* F G, It. Goth. Ir. Ambrosiast. Sedul. have á¼ÏοκαÏαλλαγÎνÏÎµÏ . Since, according to this, the passive is considerably attested, and the active á¼ÏοκαÏήλλαξεν , although most strongly attested (also by × ), may well be suspected to be a syntactic emendation, we must decide, as between the two passive readings á¼ÏοκαÏηλλάγηÏε and á¼ÏοκαÏαλλαγÎνÏÎµÏ , in favour of the former, because the latter is quite unsuitable. If the Recepta were original, the construction would be so entirely plain, that we could not at all see why the passive should have been introduced.
Colossians 1:22 . After θανάÏÎ¿Ï , A P × , min. vss. Ir. have αá½Ïοῦ , which Lachm. has admitted in brackets. It is attested so weakly, as to seem nothing more than a familiar addition.
Colossians 1:23 . Ïá¿ before κÏίÏει is, with Lachm. and Tisch., to be omitted, following A B C D* F G × , min. Chrys.
Instead of Î´Î¹Î¬ÎºÎ¿Î½Î¿Ï , P × have κήÏÏ Î¾ κ . á¼ÏÏÏÏÎ¿Î»Î¿Ï . A gloss; comp. 1 Timothy 2:7 . In A all the three words κήÏÏ Î¾ κ . á¼Ï . κ . δίακ . are given.
Colossians 1:24 . νῦν ] D* E* F G, Vulg. It. Ambrosiast. Pel. have á½ Ï Î½á¿¦Î½ . Rightly; the final syllable of Î´Î¹Î¬ÎºÎ¿Î½Î¿Ï in Colossians 1:23 , and the beginning of a church-lesson, co-operated to the suppression of á½ Ï , which, however, is quite in keeping with the connection and the whole progress of the discourse.
After Ïαθήμ . Elz. has Î¼Î¿Ï , against decisive testimony.
á½ á¼ÏÏιν ] C D* E, min.: á½ Ï á¼ÏÏιν . So Lachm. in the margin. A copyist’s error.
Colossians 1:27 . The neuter Ïί Ïὸ ÏλοῦÏÎ¿Ï (Matth. Lachm. Tisch.) is attested by codd. and Fathers sufficiently to make the masculine appear as an emendation: comp. on 2 Corinthians 8:2 .
á½ Ï á¼ÏÏιν ] A B F G P, min. (quod in Vulg. It. leaves the reading uncertain): á½ á¼ÏÏιν . So Lachm. A grammatical alteration, which, after Colossians 1:24 , was all the more likely.
Colossians 1:28 . After διδάÏκ ., ÏάνÏα á¼Î½Î¸ÏÏÏον is wanting in D* E* F G, min. vss. and Fathers. Suspected by Griesb., but is to be defended. The whole καὶ διδάÏκ . ÏάνÏα á¼Î½Î¸ÏÏÏ . was omitted owing to the homoeoteleuton (so still in L, min. Clem.), and then the restoration of the words took place incompletely.
After ΧÏιÏÏá¿· Elz. has ἸηÏοῦ , against decisive testimony.
Verses 1-2
Colossians 1:1-2 . Îιὰ θελήμ . Îεοῦ ] see on 1 Corinthians 1:1 . Comp. 2 Corinthians 1:1 ; Ephesians 1:1 .
καὶ ΤιμÏθ .] see on 2 Corinthians 1:1 ; Philippians 1:1 . Here also as subordinate joint-author of the letter , who at the same time may have been the amanuensis , but is not here jointly mentioned as such (comp. Romans 16:22 ). See on Philippians 1:1 .
á½ á¼Î´ÎµÎ»ÏÏÏ ] see on 1 Corinthians 1:1 ; referring, not to official (Chrys.: οá½ÎºÎ¿á¿¦Î½ καὶ αá½Ïá½¸Ï á¼ÏÏÏÏÎ¿Î»Î¿Ï ), but generally to Christian brotherhood.
Ïοá¿Ï á¼Î½ Îολ . á¼Î³ . κ . Ï . λ .] to the saints who are in Colossae . To this theocratic designation, which in itself is not as yet more precisely defined (see on Romans 1:7 ), is then added their distinctively Christian character: and believing brethren in Christ . Comp. on Ephesians 1:1 . á¼Î³Î¯Î¿Î¹Ï is to be understood as a substantive, just as in all the commencements of epistles, where it occurs (Romans 1:7 ; Romans 1:0 Cor.; 2 Cor.; Eph.; Phil.); and á¼Î½ ΧÏιÏÏá¿· is closely connected with ÏιÏÏ . á¼Î´ ., with which it blends so as to form one conception (hence it is not Ïοá¿Ï á¼Î½ Χ .), expressly designating the believing brethren as Christians , so that á¼Î½ Χ . forms the element of demarcation, in which the readers are believing brethren, and outside of which they would not be so in the Christian sense. Comp. on 1 Corinthians 4:17 ; Ephesians 6:21 ; in which passages, however, ÏιÏÏÏÏ is faithful , a meaning which it has not here (in opposition to Baumgarten-Crusius, Ewald, Dalmer), because everywhere in the superscriptions of the Epistles it is only the Christian standing of the readers that is described. No doubt á¼Î½ ΧÏιÏÏá¿· was in itself hardly necessary; but the addresses have a certain formal stamp. If á¼Î³Î¯Î¿Î¹Ï is taken as an adjective : “the holy and believing brethren” (de Wette), á¼Î½ ΧÏιÏÏá¿· being made to apply to the whole formula, then ÏιÏÏοá¿Ï coming after á¼Î³Î¯Î¿Î¹Ï (which latter word would already have , through á¼Î½ Χ ., its definition in a Christian sense, which, according to our view, it still has not ) would be simply a superfluous and clumsy addition, because á¼Î³Î¯Î¿Î¹Ï would already presuppose the ÏιÏÏοá¿Ï .
The fact that Paul does not expressly describe the church to which he is writing as a church (as in 1 Cor.; 2 Cor.; Galatians 1:0 and 2 Thess.) has no special motive (comp. Rom., Eph., Phil.), but is purely accidental. If it implied that he had not founded the church and stood in no kind of relation to it as such , and especially to its rulers (de Wette, by way of query), he would not have written of a ÎαοδικÎÏν á¼ÎºÎºÎ»Î·Ïία (Colossians 4:16 ). Indeed, the principle of addressing as churches those communities only which he had himself founded, is not one to be expected from the apostle’s disposition of mind and wisdom; and it is excluded by the inscription of the Epistle to the Ephesians (assuming its genuineness and destination for the church at Ephesus), as also by Philippians 1:1 (where the mention of the bishops and deacons would not compensate for the formal naming of the church). It is also an accidental matter that Paul says á¼Î½ ΧÏιÏÏá¿· merely, and not á¼Î½ Χ . ἸηÏοῦ (1 Cor.; Eph.; Phil.; 2 Thess.), although Mayerhoff makes use of this, among other things, to impugn the genuineness of the epistle; just as if such a mechanical regularity were to be ascribed to the apostle!
ÏάÏÎ¹Ï á½Î¼á¿Î½ κ . Ï . λ .] See on Romans 1:7 .
Verse 3
Colossians 1:3 f. Thanksgiving for the Christian condition of the readers, down to Colossians 1:8 . ε á½ ÏαÏιÏÏο Í Ï Î¼ÎµÎ½ ] I and Timothy; plural and singular alternate in the Epistle (Colossians 1:23-24 ; Colossians 1:28-29 ff., Colossians 4:3 ); but not without significant occasion.
καὶ ÏαÏÏá½¶ κ . Ï . λ .] who is at the same time the Father, etc. See on Ephesians 1:3 .
ÏάνÏοÏε ] belongs to εá½ÏÎ±Ï ., as in 1 Corinthians 1:4 ; 1 Thessalonians 1:2 ; 2 Thessalonians 1:3 ; Philemon 1:4 , and not to ÏεÏá½¶ á½Î¼ . ÏÏοÏÎµÏ Ï . (Chrysostom, Oecumenius, Theophylact, Erasmus, Luther, Castalio, Beza, Calvin, Grotius, Bengel, and many others, including Böhmer, Olshausen, Dalmer) a connection opposed to the parallel Ephesians 1:16 , as well as to the context, according to which the thanksgiving is the main point here , and the prayer merely a concomitant definition; and it is not till Colossians 1:9 that the latter is brought forward as the object of the discourse, and that as unceasing . This predicate belongs here to the thanking , and in Colossians 1:9 to the praying , and ÏεÏá½¶ á½Î¼á¿¶Î½ ÏÏοÏÎµÏ Ï . words which are not, with Bähr, to be separated from one another (whereby ÏÏοÏÎµÏ Ï . would unduly stand without relation) is nothing but a more precise definition of ÏάνÏοÏε : “ always ( each time , Philippians 1:4 ; Romans 1:10 [11] ), when we pray for you .”
á¼ÎºÎ¿ÏÏανÏÎµÏ Îº . Ï . λ .] with reference to time; after having heard , etc. Comp. Colossians 1:9 . In that, which Paul had heard of them, lies the ground of his thanksgiving. The ÏίÏÏÎ¹Ï is faith (Romans 1:8 ; 1 Thessalonians 1:3 ; 2 Thessalonians 1:3 ) not faithfulness (Ewald), as at Philemon 1:5 , where the position of the words is different. That Paul has heard their faith praised , is self-evident from the context. Comp. Ephesians 1:15 ; Philemon 1:5 .
á¼Î½ Χ . Ἰ .] on Christ , in so far, namely, as the faith has its basis in Christ . See on Mark 1:15 ; Galatians 3:26 ; Ephesians 1:13 ; Ephesians 1:15 . As to the non-repetition of Ïήν , see on Galatians 3:26 .
ἫΠá¼Î§ÎΤΠ] Paul so writes, not by joining on immediately ( Τá¿Î á¼ÎÎÎ ÎÎ Îá¼¸Ï Î ÎÎΤÎÏ Î . Τ . Î . ), nor yet by the mere repetition of the article, as in Ephesians 1:15 (so the Recepta , see the critical remarks), because he has it in view to enter more fully upon this point of á¼Î³Î¬Ïη , and indeed definitely upon the reason why they cherished it .
[11] For a like use of á¼ÎµÎ¯ , see Stallbaum, ad Plat. Rep. p. 360 A.
Verse 5
Colossians 1:5 . Îιὰ Ïὴν á¼Î»Ïίδα κ . Ï . λ .] on account of the hope , etc., does not belong to εá½ÏÎ±Ï . Colossians 1:3 (Bengel, “ex spe patet, quanta sit causa gratias agendi pro dono fidei et amoris;” comp. Bullinger, Zanchius, Calovius, Elsner, Michaelis, Zachariae, Storr, Rosenmüller, Hofmann, and others), because the ground for the apostolic thanksgiving at the beginnings of the Epistles, as also here at Colossians 1:4 , always consists in the Christian character of the readers (Romans 1:8 ; 1 Corinthians 1:4 ff.; Ephesians 1:15 ; Philippians 1:5 ; 1Th 1:3 ; 2 Thessalonians 1:3 ; 2 Timothy 1:5 ; Philemon 1:5 ), and that indeed as a ground in itself , [12] and therefore not merely on account of what one has in future to hope from it; and, moreover, because εá½ÏαÏιÏÏεá¿Î½ with ÎÎÎ and the accusative does not occur anywhere in the N. T. It is connected with ἫΠá¼Î§ÎΤΠΠ. Τ . Î . , and thus specifies the motive ground of the love; for love guarantees the realization of the salvation hoped for. So correctly, Chrysostom, Theodoret, Oecumenius, Theophylact, Erasmus, Calvin, Estius, Steiger, Bleek, and others. The more faith is active through love, the richer one becomes Îµá¼°Ï ÎεÏν (Luke 12:21 ), and this riches forms the contents of hope. He who does not love remains subject to death (1 John 3:14 ), and his faith profits him nothing (1 Corinthians 13:1-3 ). It is erroneous to refer it jointly to ÏίÏÏÎ¹Ï , so as to make the hope appear here as ground of the faith and the love; so Grotius and others, including Bähr, Olshausen, and de Wette; comp. Baumgarten-Crusius and Ewald. For ἣν á¼ÏεÏε (or the Rec . Ïήν ) indicates a further statement merely as regards Τá¿Î á¼ÎÎÎ ÎÎ ; and with this accords the close of the whole outburst, which in Colossians 1:8 emphatically reverts to Τá¿Î á½Îá¿¶Î á¼ÎÎÎ ÎÎ .
The á¼ÎÎ ÎÏ is here conceived objectively (comp. á¼Î»Ï . βλεÏομÎνη , Romans 8:24 ): our hope as to its objective contents , that which we hope for. Comp. Job 6:8 ; 2Ma 7:14 , and see on Romans 8:24 and Galatians 5:5 ; Zöckler, de vi ac notione voc . á¼Î»ÏÎ¯Ï , Giss. 1856, p. 26 ff.
Τá¿Î á¼Î ÎÎÎÎÎ . á½Îá¿Î á¼Î Τ . Îá½Î¡ . ] What is meant is the Messianic salvation forming the contents of the hope (1 Thessalonians 5:8 ; Romans 5:2 ; Romans 8:18 ff.; Colossians 3:3 f.), which remains deposited , that is, preserved, laid up (Luke 19:20 ), in heaven for the Christian until the Parousia, in order to be then given to him. [13] On á¼Ïοκ . comp. 2 Timothy 4:8 ; 2Ma 12:45 ; Kypke, II. p. 320 f.; Loesner, p. 360; Jacobs, ad Ach. Tat . p. 678. Used of death, Hebrews 9:27 ; of punishments, Plat. Locr . p. 104 D, 4Ma 8:10 . As to the idea, comp. the conception of the treasure in heaven (Matthew 6:20 ; Matthew 19:21 ; 1 Timothy 6:19 ), of the reward in heaven (see on Matthew 5:12 ), of the ÏολίÏÎµÏ Î¼Î± in heaven (see on Philippians 3:20 ), of the κληÏονομία ÏεÏηÏημÎνη á¼Î½ οá½Ïαν . (1 Peter 1:4 ), and of the βÏαβεá¿Î¿Î½ Ïá¿Ï á¼Î½Ï κλήÏεÏÏ (Philippians 3:14 ).
ἣν ÏÏοηκοÏÏαÏε κ . Ï . λ .] Certainty of this hope, which is not an unwarranted subjective fancy, but is objectively conveyed to them through the word of truth previously announced. The ÏÏÏ in ÏÏοηκοÏÏαÏε (Herod, viii. 79; Plat. Legg vii. p. 797 A; Xen. Mem . ii. 4. 7; Dem. 759. 26, 955. 1; Joseph. Antt . viii. 12. 3) does not denote already formerly , whereby Paul premises se nihil allaturum novi (Calvin and many), but must be said with reference to the future , to which the hope belongs; hence the sense imported by Ewald: where with the word of truth began among you (Mark 1:15 ), is the less admissible. The conception is rather, that the contents of the á¼Î»ÏÎ¯Ï , the heavenly salvation, is the great future blessing, the infallible pre-announcement of which they have heard . As previously announced , it is also previously heard .
Ïá¿Ï á¼Î»Î·Î¸ÎµÎ¯Î±Ï is the contents of the λÏÎ³Î¿Ï (comp. on Ephesians 1:13 ); and by Ïοῦ εá½Î±Î³ ., the á¼Î»Î®Î¸ÎµÎ¹Î± , that is, the absolute truth, is specifically defined as that of the gospel , that is, as that which is announced in the gospel . Both genitives are therefore to be left in their substantive form (Erasmus, Heinrichs, Baumgarten-Crusius, and many others understand Ïá¿Ï á¼Î»Î·Î¸ . as adjectival: sermo verax; comp. on the contrary, on á¼Î»Î®Î¸ . Ïοῦ εá½Î±Î³Î³ ., Galatians 2:5 ; Galatians 2:14 ), so that the expression advances to greater definiteness. The circumstantiality has something solemn about it (comp. 2 Corinthians 9:4 ); but this is arbitrarily done away, if we regard Ïοῦ εá½Î±Î³Î³ . as the genitive of apposition to Ïá¿· λÏγῳ Ïá¿Ï á¼Î»Î·Î¸ . (Calvin, Beza, and many others, including Flatt, Bähr, Steiger, Böhmer, Huther, Olshausen, de Wette, Hofmann); following Ephesians 1:13 , Paul would have written Ïá¿· εá½Î±Î³Î³ÎµÎ»Î¯á¿³ .
[12] In opposition to the view of Hofmann, that Paul names the reason why the news of the faith and love of the readers had become to him a cause of thanksgiving.
[13] It is erroneous to say that the Parousia no longer occurs in our Epistle. It is the substratum of the á¼Î»Ïá½¶Ï á¼Ïοκ . á¼Î½ Ï . οá½Ï . Comp. Colossians 3:1 ff. (in opposition to Mayerhoff, and Holtzmann, p. 203 f.).
Verse 6
Colossians 1:6 . In what he had just said, ἣν ÏÏοηκοÏÏαÏε ⦠εá½Î±Î³Î³ÎµÎ»Î¯Î¿Ï , Paul now desires to make his readers sensible of the great and blessed fellowship in which, through the gospel, they are placed, in order that they may by this very consciousness feel themselves aroused to faithfulness towards the gospel, in presence of the heretical influences; á¼Ïειδὴ μάλιÏÏα οἱ Ïολλοὶ á¼Îº Ïοῦ κοινÏÎ½Î¿á½ºÏ á¼Ïειν ÏÎ¿Î»Î»Î¿á½ºÏ Ïῶν δογμάÏÏν ÏÏηÏίζονÏαι , Chrysostom. Comp. Oecumenius: ÏÏÎ¿Î¸Ï Î¼Î¿ÏÎÏÎ¿Ï Ï Î±á½ÏÎ¿á½ºÏ ÏεÏá½¶ Ïὴν ÏίÏÏιν Ïοιεῠá¼Îº Ïοῦ á¼Ïειν ÏάνÏÎ±Ï ÎºÎ¿Î¹Î½ÏνοÏÏ .
Îµá¼°Ï á½Î¼á¾¶Ï ] not á¼Î½ á½Î¼á¿Î½ , because the conception of the previous arrival predominates; 1Ma 11:63 . Often so with ÏαÏεá¿Î½Î±Î¹ in classical authors (Herod. i. 9, vi. 24, viii. 60; Polyb. xviii. 1.1; comp. Acts 12:20 ). See Bornemann and Kühner, ad Xen. Anab. i. 2. 2; Bremi, ad Aeschin . p. 320; and generally, Nägelsbach, z. Ilias , p. 158 f., Exodus 3:0 . Observe, moreover, the emphasis of Ïοῦ ÏαÏÏνÏÎ¿Ï : it is there! it has not remained away; and to the presence is then added the bearing fruit .
ÎºÎ±Î¸á½¼Ï ÎºÎ±á½¶ á¼Î½ ÏανÏá½¶ Ï . κÏÏμῳ ] A popular hyperbole. Comp. Romans 1:8 ; Acts 17:6 , and see Colossians 1:23 . The expression is neither arbitrarily to be restricted, nor to be used against the genuineness of the Epistle (Hilgenfeld), nor yet to be rationalized by “as regards the idea ” (Baumgarten-Crusius) and the like; although, certainly, the idea of the catholicity of Christianity is expressed in the passage (comp. Romans 10:18 ; Mark 14:9 ; Mark 16:15 ; Matthew 24:14 ).
καὶ á¼ÏÏι καÏÏÎ¿Ï . κ . Ï . λ .] Instead of continuing: καὶ καÏÏοÏοÏÎ¿Ï Î¼ÎÎ½Î¿Ï Îº . Ï . λ ., Paul carries onward the discourse with the finite verb, and thus causes this element to stand out more independently and forcibly: [14] “ and it is fruit-bearing and growing ” (see Maetzner, ad Lycurg. Leocr . p. 108; Heindorf, ad Plat. Soph . p. 222 B; Winer, p. 533 [E. T. 717]), by which is indicated the fact, that the gospel, wherever it is present, is also in course of living dynamical development , and this state of development is expressed by á¼ÏÏι with the participle. This general proposition based on experience: καὶ á¼ÏÏι καÏÏÎ¿Ï . κ . αá½Î¾Î±Î½ ., is then by ÎÎÎá¿ºÏ Î . á¼Î á½Îá¿Î confirmed through the experience found also among the readers; so that Paul’s view passes, in the first clause ( Ïοῦ ÏαÏÏνÏÎ¿Ï â¦ ÎºÏÏμῳ ), from the special to the general aspect, and in the second, from the general to the special. With ÎÎΡΠÎΦÎΡ . (not occurring elsewhere in the middle ) is depicted the blissful working in the inward and outward life (comp. Galatians 5:22 ; Ephesians 5:9 ); and with αá½Î¾Î±Î½Ïμ . the continuous diffusion , whereby the gospel is obtaining more and more adherents and local extension. Comp. Theodoret: καÏÏοÏοÏίαν Ïοῦ εá½Î±Î³Î³ . κÎκληκε Ïὴν á¼ÏÎ±Î¹Î½Î¿Ï Î¼Îνην ÏολιÏείαν · αá½Î¾Î·Ïιν δὲ Ïῶν ÏιÏÏÎµÏ ÏνÏÏν Ïὸ Ïλá¿Î¸Î¿Ï . Huther and de Wette groundlessly refrain from deciding whether Îá½Î . is intended to refer to the outward growth or to the inward (so Steiger), or to both . See Acts 6:7 ; Acts 12:24 ; Acts 19:20 . Comp. Luke 13:19 ; Matthew 13:32 . The μᾶλλον ÏÏηÏίζεÏθαι , which Chrysostom finds included in αá½Î¾ ., is not denoted , but presupposed by the latter. Comp. Theophylact. The figure is taken from a tree , in which the καÏÏοÏοÏία does not exclude the continuance of growth (not so in the case of cereals).
á¼Î¦Ê¼ á¼¯Ï á¼©ÎÎΡ . Î . Τ . Î . ] since the first beginning of your conversion which so happily took place (through true knowledge of the grace of God), that development of the gospel proceeds among you; how could ye now withdraw from it by joining yourselves to false teachers?
Τá¿Î ΧÎΡÎΠΤÎῦ ÎÎÎῦ ] contents of the gospel, which they have heard; the object of ἠκοÏÏ . is the gospel, and Τ . ΧÎΡÎΠΤ . ÎÎÎῦ belongs to á¼Î ÎÎÎΩΤΠ; and by á¼Î á¼ÎÎÎÎÎá¾¼ (2 Corinthians 7:14 ), equivalent to á¼ÎÎÎá¿¶Ï (John 17:8 ), the qualitative character of this knowledge is affirmed: it was a true knowledge, corresponding to the nature of the ÏάÏÎ¹Ï , without Judaistic and other errors . Comp. on John 17:19 . Holtzmann hears in ἠκοÏÏαÏε ⦠á¼Î»Î·Î¸á¿¶Ï “the first tones of the foreign theme,” which is then in Colossians 1:9-10 more fully entered upon. But how conceivable and natural is it, that at the very outset the danger which threatens the right knowledge of the readers should be present to his mind!
[14] If καί is not genuine, as Bleek, Hofmann, and others consider (see the critical remarks), the passage is to be translated: as it also in the whole world is fruit-hearing, by which Paul would say that the gospel is present among the readers in the same fruit-bearing quality which it developes on all sides. But in that case the following ÎºÎ±Î¸á½¼Ï ÎºÎ±á½¶ á¼Î½ á½Î¼á¿Î½ would necessarily appear as very superfluous. No doubt we might, after the preceding ÏαÏÏνÏÎ¿Ï , take the á¼ÏÏί , with F. Nitzsch, as equivalent to ÏάÏεÏÏι (see Stallb. ad Plat. Phaed. p. 59 B); and to this comes also the punctuation in Tisch. 8, who puts a comma after á¼ÏÏίν . But how utterly superfluous would this á¼ÏÏί then be!
Verse 7
Colossians 1:7 f. ÎαθÏÏ ] not quandoquidem (Flatt, comp. Bähr), but the as of the manner in which . So, namely, as it had just been affirmed by á¼Î½ á¼Î»Î·Î¸ÎµÎ¯á¾³ that they had known the divine grace, had they learned it (comp. Philippians 4:9 ) from Epaphras . Notwithstanding this appropriate connection, Holtzmann finds in this third καθÏÏ a trace of the interpolator.
Nothing further is known from any other passage as to Epaphras the Colossian (Colossians 4:12 ); according to Philemon 1:23 , he was ÏÏ Î½Î±Î¹ÏμάλÏÏÎ¿Ï of the apostle. That the latter circumstance is not mentioned in our Epistle is not to be attributed to any special design (Estius: that Paul was unwilling to make his readers anxious). See, on the contrary, on Colossians 4:10 . Against the identity of Epaphras with Epaphroditus , see on Philippians 2:25 . The names even are not alike (contrary to the view of Grotius and Ewald, who look upon Epaphras as an abbreviation); á¼ÏαÏÏá¾¶Ï and the corresponding feminine name á¼ÏαÏÏÏ are found on Greek inscriptions.
ÏÏ Î½Î´Î¿ÏÎ»Î¿Ï ] namely, of Christ (comp. Philippians 1:1 ). The word, of common occurrence, is used elsewhere by Paul in Colossians 4:7 only.
á½ Ï á¼ÏÏιν κ . Ï . λ .] This faithfulness towards the readers, and also, in the sequel, the praise of their love , which Epaphras expressed to the apostle, are intended to stir them up “ne a doctrina, quam ab eo didicerant, per novos magistros abduci se patiantur,” Estius. The emphasis is on ÏιÏÏÏÏ .
á½Ïá½²Ï á½Î¼á¿¶Î½ ] for, as their teacher, he is the servant of Christ for them, for their benefit . The interpretation, instead of you (“in prison he serves me in the gospel,” Michaelis, Böhmer), would only be possible in the event of the service being designated as rendered to the apostle ( διάκονÏÏ Î¼Î¿Ï á¼Î½ ΧÏιÏÏá¿· , or something similar). Comp. Philemon 1:13 . Even with Lachmann’s reading, á½Ï . ἡμῶν (Steiger, Olshausen, Ewald), it would not be necessary to take á½ÏÎÏ as instead; it might equally well be taken as for in the sense of interest, as opposite of the anti-Pauline working (comp. Luke 9:50 ). The present á¼ÏÏί (Paul does not put ἦν ) has its just warrant in the fact, that the merit, which the founder of the church has acquired by its true instruction, is living and continuous , reaching in its efficacy down to the present time. This is an ethical relation, which is quite independent of the circumstance that Epaphras was himself a Colossian (in opposition to Hofmann), but also makes it unnecessary to find in á¼ÏÏι an indirect continuance of Epaphras’ work for the Colossians (in opposition to Bleek).
ὠκαὶ δηλÏÏÎ±Ï Îº . Ï . λ ] who also (in accordance with the interest of this faithful service) has made us to know; comp. 1 Corinthians 1:11 . The á¼Î³Î¬Ïη is here understood either of the love of the Colossians to Paul (and Timothy), as, following Chrysostom, most, including Huther, Bleek, and Hofmann, [15] explain it, or of the brotherly love already commended in Colossians 1:4 (de Wette, Olshausen, Ellicott, and others). But both these modes of taking it are at variance with the emphatic position of á½Î¼á¿¶Î½ (comp. 1 Corinthians 9:12 ; 2 Corinthians 1:6 ; 2 Corinthians 7:7 ; 2 Corinthians 8:13 , et al .), which betokens the love of the readers to Epaphras as meant. There had just been expressed, to wit, by á½Ì Ïá½²Ï á½Î¼á¿¶Î½ , the faithful, loving position of this servant of Christ towards the Colossians , and correlative to this is now the love which he met with from them , consequently the counter-love shown to him, of which he has informed the apostle. A delicate addition out of courtesy to the readers.
á¼Î½ ÏνεÏμαÏι ] attaches itself closely to á¼ÎÎÎ ÎÎ , so as to form one idea, denoting the love as truly holy not conditioned by anything outward, but divinely upheld which is in the Holy Spirit as the element which prompts and animates it; for it is the fruit of the Spirit (Galatians 5:22 ; Romans 15:30 ), οὠÏαÏκικὴ , á¼Î»Î»á½° ÏÎ½ÎµÏ Î¼Î±Ïική (Oecumenius). Comp. ΧÎΡᾺ á¼Î Î Î ., Romans 14:17 .
[15] Who, at the same time, makes the á¼Î½ ÏνεÏμαÏι suggest the reference, that the á¼Î³Î¬Ïη took place in a manner personally unknown which must have been conveyed in the context.
REMARK.
Since á¼Ïʼ á¼§Ï á¼¡Î¼ÎÏÎ±Ï á¼ ÎºÎ¿ÏÏαÏε κ . Ï . λ ., Colossians 1:6 , refers the readers back to the first commencement of their Christianity, and ÎºÎ±Î¸á½¼Ï á¼Î¼Î¬Î¸ÎµÏε á¼Ïὸ á¼ÏαÏÏá¾¶ κ . Ï . λ ., Colossians 1:7 , cannot, except by pure arbitrariness, be separated from it as regards time and regarded as something later, it results from our passage that Epaphras is to be considered as the first preacher of the gospel at Colossae, and consequently as founder of the church . This exegetical result remains even if the Recepta ÎºÎ±Î¸á½¼Ï ÎºÎ±Î¯ is retained. This καί would not, as Wiggers thinks (in the Stud. u. Krit . 1838, p. 185), place the preaching of Epaphras in contradistinction to an earlier one, and make it appear as a continuation of the latter (in this case ÎºÎ±Î¸á½¼Ï ÎºÎ±á½¶ á¼Ïὸ á¼ÏαÏÏ . á¼Î¼Î¬Î¸ÎµÏε or ÎºÎ±Î¸á½¼Ï á¼Î¼Î¬Î¸ÎµÏε καὶ á¼Ïὸ á¼ÏαÏÏ . would have been employed); but it is to be taken as also, not otherwise , placing the á¼Î¼Î¬Î¸ÎµÏε on a parity with the á¼ÏÎγνÏÏε . This applies also in opposition to Vaihinger, in Herzog’s Encykl . iv. p. 79 f.
Verse 9
Colossians 1:9 . Intercession , down to Colossians 1:12 .
διὰ ÏοῦÏο ] on account of all that has been said from á¼ÎºÎ¿ÏÏανÏÎµÏ in Colossians 1:4 onward: induced thereby, we also cease not , etc. This reference is required by á¼Ïʼ á¼§Ï á¼¡Î¼ÎÏÎ±Ï á¼ ÎºÎ¿ÏÏαμεν , which cannot correspond to the δηλÏÏÎ±Ï á¼¡Î¼á¿Î½ , belonging as that does merely to an accessory thought, but must take up again (in opposition to Bleek and Hofmann) the á¼ÎºÎ¿ÏÏανÏÎµÏ which was said in Colossians 1:4 . This resumption is emphatic , not tautological (Holtzmann).
καὶ ἡμεá¿Ï ] are to be taken together , and it is not allowable to join καί either with διὰ ÏοῦÏο (de Wette), or even with ÏÏοÏÎµÏ Ï . (Baumgarten-Crusius). The words are to be rendered: We also (I and Timothy), like others , who make the same intercession for you, and among whom there is mentioned by name the founder of the church, who stood in closest relation to them.
ÏÏοÏÎµÏ Ï .] “ Precum mentionem generatim fecit, Colossians 1:3 ; nunc exprimit, quid precetur” (Bengel).
καὶ αἰÏοÏμενοι ] adds the special ( asking ) to the general ( praying ). Comp. 1Ma 3:44 ; Matthew 21:22 ; Mark 11:24 ; Ephesians 6:18 ; Philippians 4:6 . As to the popular form of hyperbole, οὠÏÎ±Ï Ïμ ., comp. on Ephesians 1:16 . On á½Ïá½²Ï á½Î¼á¿¶Î½ , so far as it is also to be taken with κ . αἰÏοÏμ ., comp. Lys. c. Alc . p. 141.
ἵνα ÏληÏÏθ .] Contents of the asking in the form of its purpose . Comp. on Philippians 1:9 . The emphasis lies not on ÏληÏÏθ . (F. Nitzsch, Hofmann), but on the object (comp. Romans 15:14 ; Romans 1:29 , al .), which gives to the further elucidation in Colossians 1:9-10 its specific definition of contents.
Ïὴν á¼Ïίγν . Ïοὺ θελ . αá½Ïοῦ ] with the knowledge of His will , accusative, as in Philippians 1:11 ; αá½Ïοῦ applies to God as the subject, to whom prayer and supplication are addressed. The context in Colossians 1:10 shows that by the θÎλημα is meant, not the counsel of redemption (Ephesians 1:9 ; Chrysostom, Oecumenius, Theophylact, and many others, including Huther and Dalmer), but, doubtless (Matthew 6:10 ), that which God wills in a moral respect (so Theodoret, who makes out a contrast with the νομικαá¿Ï ÏαÏαÏηÏήÏεÏιν ). Comp. Romans 2:18 ; Romans 12:2 ; Ephesians 5:17 ; Ephesians 6:6 ; Colossians 4:12 . The distinction between γνῶÏÎ¹Ï and á¼ÏίγνÏÏÎ¹Ï , which both here and also in Colossians 1:10 ; Colossians 2:2 ; Colossians 3:10 , is the knowledge which grasps and penetrates into the object, is incorrectly denied by Olshausen. See on Ephesians 1:17 .
á¼Î½ ÏάÏῠκ . Ï . λ .] instrumental definition of manner, how, namely, this ÏληÏÏθá¿Î½Î±Î¹ Ïὴν á¼Ïίγν . Ï . θελ . αá½Ïοῦ (a knowledge which is to be the product not of mere human mental activity, but of objectively divine endowment by the Holy Spirit) must be brought about: by every kind of spiritual wisdom and insight , by the communication of these from God; comp. on Ephesians 1:8 . A combination with the following ÏεÏιÏαÏá¿Ïαι (comp. Colossians 4:5 : á¼Î½ ÏοÏίᾳ ÏεÏÎ¹Ï .), such as Hofmann suggests, is inappropriate, because the two parts of the whole intercession stand to one another in the relation of the divine ethical foundation , (Colossians 1:9 ), and of the corresponding practical conduct of life (Colossians 1:10 f.); hence the latter portion is most naturally and emphatically headed by the expression of this Christian practice, the ÏεÏιÏαÏá¿Ïαι , to which are then subjoined its modal definitions in detail. Accordingly, ÏεÏιÏαÏá¿Ïαι is not, with Hofmann, to be made dependent on Ïοῦ θελήμ . αá½Ïοῦ and taken as its contents, but Ï . θελ . Ï . Î . is to be left as an absolute idea, as in Colossians 4:12 . On ÏÎ½ÎµÏ Î¼Î±ÏικÏÏ , proceeding from the Holy Spirit , [16] comp. Rom 1:11 ; 1 Corinthians 2:13 ; 1 Corinthians 12:1 ; Ephesians 1:3 ; Ephesians 5:19 , et al . The ÏÏνεÏÎ¹Ï is the insight , in a theoretical and (comp. on Mark 12:33 ) practical respect, depending upon judgment and inference, Ephesians 3:4 ; 2 Timothy 2:7 . For the opposite of the pneumatic ÏÏνεÏÎ¹Ï , see 1 Corinthians 1:19 . It is related to the ÏοÏία as the special to the general , since it is peculiarly the expression of the intelligence in the domain of truth, [17] while the ΣÎΦÎÎ concerns the collective faculties of the mind, the activities of knowledge, willing, and feeling, the tendency and working of which are harmoniously subservient to the recognised highest aim, if the wisdom is ÏÎ½ÎµÏ Î¼Î±Ïική ; its opposite is the ΣÎΦÎΠΣÎΡÎÎÎÎ (2 Corinthians 1:12 ; James 3:15 ), being of man, and not of God, in its aim and efforts. According as ΦΡÎÎÎΣÎÏ is conceived subjectively or objectivized, the ΣÎÎÎΣÎÏ may be considered either as synonymous with it (Ephesians 1:8 ; Daniel 2:21 ; Plat. Crat . p. 411 A), or as an attribute of it ( Sir 1:4 : ÏÏνεÏÎ¹Ï ÏÏονήÏεÏÏ ).
[16] Hence ἡ á¼Î½Ïθεν ÏοÏία , James 3:15 ; James 3:17 . The predicate, although in the case of divine endowment with ÏοÏία and ÏÏνεÏÎ¹Ï obvious of itself (as Hofmann objects), was yet all the more apposite for expressly bringing the point into prominence, the greater the danger which threatened Colossae from non-divine, fleshly wisdom; comp. Colossians 2:23 .
[17] Comp. Dem. 269. 24: ÏÏνεÏÎ¹Ï , á¾ Ïá½° καλὰ καὶ αἰÏÏÏá½° διαγινÏÏκεÏαι .
Verse 10
Colossians 1:10 . The practical aim [18] which that ÏληÏÏθá¿Î½Î±Î¹ κ . Ï . λ . is to accomplish; á¼Îµá½¶ Ïá¿ ÏίÏÏει Ïá½Î¶ÎµÏÎ³Î½Ï Ïι Ïὴν ÏολιÏείαν , Chrysostom. The Vulgate renders correctly: ut ambuletis (in opposition to Hofmann, see on Colossians 1:9 ).
á¼Î¾Î¯ÏÏ Ïοῦ ÎºÏ ÏÎ¯Î¿Ï ] so that your behaviour may stand in morally appropriate relation to your belonging to Christ. Comp. Romans 16:2 ; Ephesians 4:1 ; Php 1:27 ; 1 Thessalonians 2:12 ; 3 John 1:6 . The genitive (and in the N. T. such is always used with á¼Î¾Î¯ÏÏ ) does not even “perhaps” (Hofmann) belong to the following Îµá¼°Ï Ï . á¼ÏεÏκ ., especially as á¼ÏεÏκεία , in the Greek writers and in Philo (see Loesner, p. 361), stands partly with, partly without, a genitival definition, and the latter is here quite obvious of itself. Such a combination would be an unnecessary artificial device. Comp. Plat. Conv . p. 180 D: á¼Î¾Î¯ÏÏ Ïοῦ Îεοῦ .
Îµá¼°Ï Ïá¾¶Ïαν á¼ÏεÏκείαν ] on behalf of every kind of pleasing , that is, in order to please Him in every way. The word only occurs here in the N. T., but the apostle is not on that account to be deprived of it (Holtzmann); it is found frequently in Polybius, Philo, et al.; also Theophr. Char . 5; LXX. Proverbs 31:30 (Proverbs 30:30 ); Symmachus, Psalms 80:12 . On Ïá¾¶Ïαν á¼Ï . comp. Polybius, xxxi. 26. 5: Ïᾶν γÎÎ½Î¿Ï á¼ÏεÏÎºÎµÎ¯Î±Ï ÏÏοÏÏεÏÏÎ¼ÎµÎ½Î¿Ï . Among the Greeks, á¼ÏεÏκεία (to be accentuated thus, see Winer, p. 50 [E. T. 57]; Buttmann, Neut. Gr . p. 11 [E. T. 12]) bears, for the most part, the sense of seeking to please . Comp. Proverbs 31:30 : ÏÎµÏ Î´Îµá¿Ï á¼ÏεÏκείαι .
á¼Î½ ÏανÏá½¶ á¼Ïγῳ κ . Ï . λ .] There now follow three expositions , in order to define more precisely the nature and mode of the ÏεÏιÏαÏá¿Ïαι á¼Î¾Î¯ÏÏ Îº . Ï . λ . We must, in considering these, notice the homogeneous plan of the three clauses, each of which commences with a prepositional relation of the participial idea, viz. (1) á¼Î½ ÏανÏá½¶ á¼Ïγῳ κ . Ï . λ ., (2) á¼Î½ ÏάÏá¿ Î´Ï Î½Î¬Î¼ÎµÎ¹ , (3) μεÏá½° ÏαÏá¾¶Ï , and ends with a relation expressed by Îµá¼°Ï , viz. (1) Îµá¼°Ï Ï . á¼Ïίγν . Ï . Îεοῦ , (2) Îµá¼°Ï Ïá¾¶Ï . á½Ïομ . κ . μακÏÎ¿Î¸Ï Î¼ ., (3) Îµá¼°Ï Ïὴν μεÏίδα κ . Ï . λ . The construction would be still more symmetrical if, in the third clause, á¼Î½ ÏάÏá¿ ÏαÏá¾· (Romans 15:32 ) had been written instead of μεÏá½° ÏαÏá¾¶Ï which was easily prevented by the versatility of the apostle’s form of conception.
á¼Î½ ÏανÏá½¶ á¼Ïγῳ á¼Î³Î±Î¸á¿· καÏÏÎ¿Ï . is to be taken together (and then again, αá½Î¾Î±Î½Ïμ . Îµá¼°Ï Ïὴν á¼Ïίγν . Ï . Îεοῦ ), inasmuch as ye by every good work (by your accomplishing every morally good action) bear fruit , as good trees, comp. Matthew 7:17 . But not as if the καÏÏοÏοÏεá¿Î½ and the Ïá½Î¾Î¬Î½ÎµÏθαι were separate things; they take place, as in Colossians 1:6 , jointly and at the same time , although, after the manner of parallelism, a special more precise definition is annexed to each. Moreover, á¼Î½ ÏανÏá½¶ á¼Ïγ . á¼Î³ . is not to be connected with Îµá¼°Ï Ïá¾¶Ïαν á¼ÏεÏκ . (Oecumenius, Theophylact, Erasmus, and others, also Steiger); otherwise we mistake and destroy the symmetrical structure of the passage.
καὶ αá½Î¾Î±Î½Ïμ . Îµá¼°Ï Ï . á¼Ïίγν . Ï . Î .] and , inasmuch as with this moral fruit-bearing at the same time ye increase in respect to the knowledge of God , that is, succeed in knowing Him more and more fully. The living, effective knowledge of God, which is meant by á¼Ïίγν . Ï . Îεοῦ (Colossians 1:6 ; Colossians 3:10 ; Colossians 2:2 ), sustains an ethically necessary action and reaction with practical morality. Just as the latter is promoted by the former, so also knowledge grows through moral practice in virtue of the power of inward experience of the divine life (the ζÏá½´ Ïοῦ Îεοῦ , Ephesians 4:18 ), by which God reveals Himself more and more to the inner man. The fact that here Ïοῦ Îεοῦ generally is said, and not Ïοῦ θελήμαÏÎ¿Ï Îεοῦ repeated, is in keeping with the progressive development set forth; there is something of a climax in it. On Îµá¼°Ï , used of the telic reference, and consequently of the regulative direction of the growth, comp. on Ephesians 4:15 ; 2 Peter 1:8 . The reading Ïá¿ á¼ÏιγνÏÏει Ï . Î . would have to be taken as instrumental , with Olshausen, Steiger, Huther, de Wette, Bleek, who follow it, but would yield after Colossians 1:9 something quite self-evident. We may add that αá½Î¾Î¬Î½ ., with the dative of spiritual increase by something, is frequent in Plato and classic writers.
As to the nominatives of the participles, which are not to be taken with ÏληÏÏθ . (Beza, Bengel, Reiche, and others), but relate to the logical subject of ÏεÏιÏÎ±Ï . á¼Î¾Î¯ÏÏ , comp. on Ephesians 4:2 ; 2 Corinthians 1:7 .
[18] Not to be attached as object of the request immediately to ÏÏοÏÎµÏ ÏÏμενοι , and all that intervenes to be assigned to the interpolator (Holtzmann, p. 85). Yet, according to Holtzmann, p. 123, á¼Î½ ÏανÏá½¶ á¼Ïγῳ down Ïοῦ Îεοῦ is alleged to be simply an interpolated duplicate of ver. 6; in which case, however, it would not be easy to see why καÏÏοÏοÏοÏμενοι was not written, after the precedent of ver. 6, but on the contrary καÏÏοÏοÏοῦνÏÎµÏ .
Verse 11
Colossians 1:11 is co-ordinate with the foregoing á¼Î½ ÏανÏá½¶ á¼Ïγῳ ⦠Îεοῦ .
á¼Î½ ÏάÏá¿ Î´Ï Î½ . Î´Ï Î½Î±Î¼ .] á¼Î½ is instrumental, as in Colossians 1:9 (Ephesians 6:10 ; 2 Timothy 2:1 ); hence not designating that, in the acquiring of which the invigoration is supposed to consist (Hofmann), but: by means of every (moral) power (by its bestowal on God’s part) becoming empowered . Î´Ï Î½Î±Î¼ÏÏ (Lobeck, ad Phryn . p. 605) does not occur in Greek authors, and is only found here and at Hebrews 11:34 , Lachm. in the N. T.; in the LXX. at Ecclesiastes 10:10 ; Daniel 9:27 ; Ps. 67:31; in Aquila; Job 36:9 ; Psalms 64:4 . Paul elsewhere uses á¼Î½Î´Ï ναμοῦν .
καÏá½° Ïὸ κÏάÏÎ¿Ï Ïá¿Ï δÏξ . αá½Ï .] according to the might of His majesty; with this divine might (see as to κÏάÏÎ¿Ï on Ephesians 1:19 ), through the powerful influence of which that strengthening is to be imparted to them, it is also to be correspondent and thereby its eminent strength and efficacy are characterized ( καÏά in Ephesians 1:19 has another sense). Comp. 2 Thessalonians 2:9 ; Philippians 3:21 . And Ïὸ κÏάÏÎ¿Ï Ï . δÏξ . αá½Ï . is not His glorious power (Luther, Castalio, Beza, and others; also Flatt and Bähr), against which αá½Ïοῦ should have been a sufficient warning; but Ïὸ κÏάÏÎ¿Ï is the appropriate attribute of the divine majesty (of the glorious nature of God). Comp. Ephesians 3:16 ; Sir 18:5 . The κÏάÏÎ¿Ï therefore is not the glory of God (Böhmer), but the latter has the former, and the δÏξα is not to be referred to a single aspect of the divine greatness (Grotius: power; Huther: love ), but to its glorious whole . Comp. on Romans 6:4 .
Îµá¼°Ï Ïá¾¶Ïαν á½Ïομ . κ . μακÏοθ .] in respect to every endurance (in affliction, persecution, temptation, and the like, comp. Romans 5:3 ; 2 Corinthians 1:6 ; 2 Corinthians 6:4 ; James 1:3 f.; Luke 8:15 ; Romans 2:7 , et al .) and long-suffering (towards the offenders and persecutors), that is, so as to be able to exercise these virtues in every way by means of that divine strengthening. The distinction of Chrysostom: μακÏÎ¿Î¸Ï Î¼Îµá¿ ÏÎ¹Ï ÏÏá½¸Ï á¼ÎºÎµÎ¯Î½Î¿Ï Ï Î¿á½Ï Î´Ï Î½Î±Ïὸν καὶ á¼Î¼ÏναÏθαι · á½ÏομÎνει δὲ , οá½Ï οὠδÏναÏαι á¼Î¼ÏναÏθαι , is arbitrary. See, on the contrary, for instance, Hebrews 12:2-3 . Others understand it variously; but it is to be observed, that á½Ïομονή expresses the more general idea of endurance, and that μακÏÎ¿Î¸Ï Î¼Î¯Î± , the opposite of which is á½Î¾Ï Î¸Ï Î¼Î¯Î± (Eur. Andr . 729; James 1:19 ) and á½Î¾Ï θÏμηÏÎ¹Ï (Artem. iv. 69), always refers in the N. T. to the relation of patient tolerance towards offenders. Comp. Colossians 3:12 ; Galatians 5:22 ; Romans 2:4 ; Ephesians 4:2 ; also Hebrews 6:12 ; James 5:10 .
μεÏá½° ÏαÏá¾¶Ï ] is joined with Ïá¾¶Ïαν á½Ïομ . κ . μακÏοθ . by Theodoret, Luther, Beza, Castalio, Calvin, Grotius, Calovius, Bengel, Heinrichs, and many others, including Olshausen, Bähr, Steiger, de Wette, Baumgarten-Crusius, Dalmer, so that the true, joyful patience (comp. Colossians 1:24 ) is denoted. But the symmetry of the passage (see on Colossians 1:10 ), in which the two previous participles are also preceded by a prepositional definition, points so naturally to the connection with what follows (Syr., Chrysostom, Oecumenius, Theophylact, Erasmus, Estius, and others, including Lachmann, Tischendorf, Böhmer, Huther, Ewald, Ellicott, Bleek, Hofmann), that it cannot be abandoned without arbitrariness. Even in that case, indeed, the thought of joyful patience, which is certainly apostolic (Romans 5:3 ; 1 Peter 1:6 ; Romans 12:12 ; comp. Matthew 5:12 ), is not lost, when the intercession rises from patience to joyful thanksgiving . Observe also the deliberate juxtaposition of μεÏá½° ÏαÏá¾¶Ï Îµá½ÏαÏιÏÏ .
Verse 12
Colossians 1:12 . While ye give thanks with joyfulness , etc., a third accompanying definition of ÏεÏιÏαÏá¿Ïαι á¼Î¾Î¯ÏÏ Îº . Ï . λ . (Colossians 1:10 ), co-ordinate with the two definitions preceding, and not to be connected with οὠÏÎ±Ï Ïμεθα κ . Ï . λ . (Chrysostom, Theophylact, Calvin: “iterum redit ad gratulationem,” Calovius, Böhmer, Baumgarten-Crusius).
Ïá¿· ÏαÏÏί ] of Jesus Christ; comp. Colossians 1:13 , and Ïοῦ ÎÏ ÏÎ¯Î¿Ï in Colossians 1:10 , not: “the Father absolutely ” (Hofmann). It is always in Paul’s writings to be gathered from the context, whose Father God is to be understood as being (even at Ephesians 1:17 ); never does he name God absolutely ( in abstracto ) á½ ÏαÏÎ®Ï . Comp. Colossians 1:3 , which, however, is held by Holtzmann to be the original, suggesting a repetition by the editor at our passage, in spite of the fact that the two passages have different subjects. Just as little does Îµá¼°Ï Ïὴν μεÏίδα κ . Ï . λ . betray itself as an interpolation from Ephesians 1:18 ; Ephesians 1:11 (Holtzmann), seeing that, on the one hand, the expression at our passage is so wholly peculiar, and, on the other hand, the idea of κληÏονομία is so general in the N. T. Comp. especially Acts 26:18 . [19]
Ïá¿· ἱκανÏÏανÏι κ . Ï . λ .] Therein lies the ground of the thanksgiving, quippe qui , etc. God has made us fit ( á¼¡Î¼á¾¶Ï applies to the letter-writers and readers, so far as they are Christians ) for a share in the Messianic salvation through the light , inasmuch as, instead of the darkness which previously prevailed over us, He has by means of the gospel brought to us the á¼Î»Î®Î¸ÎµÎ¹Î± , of which light is the distinctive element and the quickening and saving principle (Ephesians 5:9 ) of the Christian constitution both in an intellectual and ethical point of view (Acts 26:18 ); hence Christians are children of the light ( Eph 5:8 ; 1 Thessalonians 5:5 ; Luke 16:8 ). Comp. Romans 13:12 ; 2Co 6:14 ; 1 Peter 2:9 . In Christ the light had attained to personal manifestation (John 1:4 ff; John 3:9 ; John 8:12 ; Matthew 4:16 , et al .), as the personal revelation of the divine nature itself (1 John 1:5 ), and the gospel was the means of its communication (Ephesians 3:9 ; Hebrews 6:4 ; 2 Corinthians 4:4 ; Acts 26:23 , et al .) to men, who without this enlightenment were unfit for the Messianic salvation (Ephesians 2:1 ff; Ephesians 4:18 ; Ephesians 5:11 ; Eph 6:12 ; 1 Thessalonians 5:4 , et al .). The instrumental definition á¼Î½ Ïá¿· ÏÏÏί is placed at the end , in order that it may stand out with special emphasis; hence, also, the relative sentence which follows refers to this very element. An objection has been wrongly urged against our view (which is already adopted by Chrysostom, Oecumenius, Theophylact; comp. Estius and others, including Flatt and Steiger), that Paul must have used Ïνεῦμα instead of Ïá¿¶Ï (see Olshausen). The ἱκανοῦν á¼Î½ Ïá¿· ÏÏÏί is, indeed, nothing else than the καλεá¿Î½ Îµá¼°Ï Ïὸ Ïá¿¶Ï (1 Peter 2:9 ) conceived in respect of its moral efficacy, and the result thereof on the part of man is the εἶναι Ïá¿¶Ï á¼Î½ ÎºÏ Ïίῳ (Ephesians 5:8 ), or the εἶναι Ï á¼±á½¸Î½ Ïοῦ ÏÏÏÏÏ (1 Thessalonians 5:5 ; John 12:36 ), á½¡Ï ÏÏÏÏá¿ÏÎµÏ á¼Î½ κÏÏμῳ (Philippians 2:15 ). But the light is a power; for it is Ïὸ Ïá¿¶Ï Ïá¿Ï ζÏá¿Ï (John 8:12 ), has its armour (Romans 13:12 ), produces its fruit (Ephesians 5:9 ), effects the Christian á¼Î»ÎγÏειν (Ephesians 5:13 ), endurance in the conflict of affliction (Hebrews 10:32 ), etc. á¼Î½ Ïá¿· ÏÏÏί is usually connected with Ïοῦ κλήÏÎ¿Ï Ïῶν á¼Î³Î¯Ïν , so that this κλá¿ÏÎ¿Ï is described as existing or to be found in light, as the kingdom of light; in which case we may think either of its glory (Beza and others, Böhmer, Huther), or of its purity and perfection (Olshausen, de Wette, and Dalmer) as referred to. But although the connecting article Ïοῦ might be wanting, and the κλá¿ÏÎ¿Ï Ï . á¼Î³ . á¼Î½ Ïá¿· ÏÏÏί might thus form a single conception, it may be urged as an objection that the heritage meant cannot be the temporal position of Christians, but only the future blessedness of the Messianic glorious kingdom; comp. Colossians 1:13 , Ïὴν βαÏιλ . Ïοῦ Ï á¼±Î¿á¿¦ . Hence not á¼Î½ Ïá¿· ÏÏÏί , but possibly á¼Î½ ÏῠδÏξῠ, á¼Î½ ÏῠζÏá¿ , á¼Î½ Ïοá¿Ï οá½Ïανεá¿Ï , or the like, would be a fitting definition of κλá¿ÏÎ¿Ï , which, however, already has in Ïῶν á¼Î³Î¯Ïν its definite description (comp. Ephesians 1:18 ; Acts 20:32 ; Acts 26:18 ). Just as little for the same reason, and because Ï . μεÏίδα already carries with it its own definition (share in the κλá¿ÏÎ¿Ï ) is á¼Î½ Ïá¿· ÏÏÏί to be made dependent on Ïὴν μεÏίδα , whether á¼Î½ be taken locally (Bengel: “Lux est regnum Dei, habentque fideles in hoc regno partem beatam”) or as in Acts 8:21 (Ewald), in which case Hofmann finds the sphere expressed (comp. also Bleek), where the saints have got their peculiar possession assigned to them , so that the being in light stands related to the future glory as that which is still in various respects conditioned stands to plenitude as if κλá¿ÏÎ¿Ï (comp. on Acts 26:18 ) had not already the definite and full eschatological sense of the possession of eternal glory. This κλá¿ÏÎ¿Ï , of which the Christians are possessors ( Ïῶν á¼Î³Î¯Ïν ), ideally before the Parousia, and thereafter really, is the theocratic designation ( × ××× ) of the properly of the Messianic kingdom (see on Galatians 3:18 ; Ephesians 1:11 ), and the ÎÎΡá¿Ï ( ×××§ ) ΤÎῦ ÎÎÎΡÎÎ¥ is the share of individuals [20] in the same. Comp. Sir 44:23 .
[19] The mode in which Acts 26:18 comes into contact as regards thought and expression with Colossians 1:12-14 , may be sufficiently explained by the circumstance that in Acts 26:0 also Paul is the speaker. Holtzmann justly advises caution with reference to the apparent echoes of the Book of Acts in general, as Luke originally bears the Pauline stamp.
[20] Comp. also Bleek. Hofmann incorrectly says that Ïοῦ κληÏοῦ serves only to designate the μεÏÎ¯Ï as destined for special possession. In that case, at least, the qualitative genitive of the abstract must have been put Ïá¿Ï κληÏÎ¿Î½Î¿Î¼Î¯Î±Ï , as in Psalms 16:5 ). But the concrete Ïοῦ κλήÏÎ¿Ï Ï . á¼Î³ . is, as the literal sense of μεÏÎ¯Ï , portio, most naturally suggests, the genitivus partitivus (G. totius ), so that the individual is conceived as μεÏίÏÎ·Ï of the κλá¿ÏÎ¿Ï of the saints, in which he for his part ÏÏ Î¼Î¼ÎµÏÎκει .
Verse 13
Colossians 1:13 . A more precise elucidation of the divine benefit previously expressed by Ïá¿· ἱκανÏÏανÏι ⦠ÏÏÏί . This verse forms the transition, by which Paul is led on to the instructions as to Christ, which he has it in view to give down to Colossians 1:20 . [21]
á¼Îº Ïá¿Ï á¼Î¾Î¿Ï Ï . Ïοῦ ÏÎºÎ¿Ï .] Ïοῦ ÏÎºÎ¿Ï . is not genitive of apposition (Hofmann), but, corresponding to the Îµá¼°Ï Ïὴν βαÏιλείαν that follows, genitive of the subject: out of the power, which darkness has . The latter, as the influential power of non-Christian humanity (of the κÏÏÎ¼Î¿Ï , which is ruled by the devil, Ephesians 2:2 ), is personified; its essence is the negation of the intellectual and ethical divine á¼Î»Î®Î¸ÎµÎ¹Î± , and the affirmation of the opposite. Comp. Luke 22:53 ; Matthew 4:16 ; Acts 26:18 ; Romans 13:12 ; Ephesians 5:8 ; Ephesians 6:12 , et al . The act of the á¼á¿¤á¿¥ÏÏαÏο has taken place by means of the conversion to Christ, which is the work of God , Romans 8:29 f.; Ephesians 2:4 ff. It is to be observed, that the expression á¼Îº Ï . á¼Î¾Î¿Ï Ï . Ï . ÏκÏÏÎ¿Ï Ï is chosen as the correlative of á¼Î½ Ïá¿· ÏÏÏί in Colossians 1:12 .
καὶ μεÏÎÏÏηÏεν ] The matter is to be conceived locally ( Îµá¼°Ï á¼ÏεÏον ÏÏÏον , Plat. Legg . vi. p. 762 B), so that the deliverance from the power of darkness appears to be united with the removing away into the kingdom, etc. Comp. Plat. Rep . p. 518 A: á¼Îº Ïε ÏÏÏá½¸Ï Îµá¼°Ï ÏκÏÏÎ¿Ï Î¼ÎµÎ¸Î¹ÏÏαμÎνÏν καὶ á¼Îº ÏκÏÏÎ¿Ï Ï Îµá¼°Ï Ïá¿¶Ï .
Îµá¼°Ï Ïὴν βαÏιλ . κ . Ï . λ ., that is, into the kingdom of the Messiah , Eph 5:5 ; 2 Peter 1:11 ; for this and nothing else is meant by ἡ βαÏιλεία ΧÏιÏÏοῦ ( Ïοῦ Îεοῦ , Ïῶν οá½Ïανῶν ) in all passages of the N. T. Comp. Colossians 4:11 ; and see on Rom 14:17 ; 1 Corinthians 4:20 ; Matthew 3:2 ; Matthew 6:10 . The aorist μεÏÎÏÏ . is to be explained by the matter being conceived proleptically ( Ïá¿ Î³á½°Ï á¼Î»Ïίδι á¼ÏÏθημεν , Romans 8:24 ), as something already consummated (comp. on á¼Î´ÏξαÏε , Romans 8:30 ). Thus the kingdom which is nigh is, by means of their fellowship of life with their Lord (Ephesians 2:6 ), as certain to the redeemed as if they were already translated into it. The explanation which refers it to the Christian church (so still Heinrichs, Bähr, Huther, and most expositors) as contrasted with the κÏÏÎ¼Î¿Ï , is just as unhistorical as that which makes it the invisible inward, ethical kingdom (see especially Olshausen, following an erroneous view of Luke 17:21 ), to which also Bleek and Hofmann ultimately come. Certainly all who name Christ their Lord are under this king (Hofmann); but this is not yet his βαÏιλεία ; that belongs to the future αἰÏν , Ephesians 5:5 ; 1Co 6:9 f., 1 Corinthians 15:24 ; 1 Corinthians 15:50 ; Galatians 5:21 , et al.; John 18:36 .
Ïá¿Ï á¼Î³Î¬ÏÎ·Ï Î±á½Ïοῦ ] in essential meaning, indeed, nothing else than Ïοῦ Ï á¼±Î¿á¿¦ αá½Ïοῦ Ïοῦ á¼Î³Î±ÏηÏοῦ (Matthew 3:17 ; Matthew 17:5 , et al .), or Ïοῦ Ï á¼±Î¿á¿¦ Ïοῦ á¼Î³Î±ÏηÏοῦ αá½Ïοῦ (Matthew 12:18 ; Mark 12:6 ), but more prominently singling out the attribute (Buttmann, Neut. Gr . p. 141 [E. T. 162]): of the Son of His love , that is, of the Son who is the object of His love, genitive of the subject . Comp. Genesis 35:18 : Ï á¼±á½¸Ï á½Î´ÏÎ½Î·Ï Î¼Î¿Ï . Entirely parallel is Ephesians 1:6 f.: á¼Î½ Ïá¿· ἠγαÏημÎνῳ , á¼Î½ á¾§ á¼Ïομεν κ . Ï . λ . Augustine, de Trin . xv. 19, understood it as genitive of origin , making á¼Î³Î¬Ïη αá½Ïοῦ denote the divine substantia . [22] So again Olshausen, in whose view the expression is meant to correspond to the Johannine ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÏ . This is entirely without analogy in the N. T. mode of conception, according to which not the procreation (Colossians 1:15 ), but the sending of the Son is referred to the divine love as its act; and the love is not the essence of God (in the metaphysical sense), but His essential disposition (the essence in the ethical sense), even in 1Jn 4:8 ; 1 John 4:16 . Consequently it might be explained: “of the Son, whom His love has sent ,” if this were suggested by the context; so far, however, from this being the case, the language refers to the exalted Christ who rules ( βαÏιλείαν ). The expression itself, á½ Î¥á¼¹á¿¸Ï Î¤á¿Ï á¼ÎÎÎ . Îá½Î¤Îῦ , is found in the N. T. only here, but could not he chosen more suitably or with deeper feeling to characterize the opposite of the God-hated element of ÏκÏÏÎ¿Ï , which in its nature is directly opposed to the divine love. The view, that it is meant to be intimated that the sharing in the kingdom brings with it the ΥἹÎÎÎΣÎÎ (Huther, de Wette), imports what is not expressed, and anticipates the sequel. Holtzmann without ground, and unfairly, asserts that in comparison with Ephesians 1:6 our passage presents “stereotyped modes of connection and turns of an ecclesiastical orator,” under which he includes the Hebraizing á½ Î¥á¼¹á¿¸Ï Î¤á¿Ï á¼ÎÎÎ ÎÏ Îá½Î¤ . as being thoroughly un-Pauline as if the linguistic resources of the apostle could not even extend to an expression which is not indeed elsewhere used by him, but is in the highest degree appropriate to a specially vivid sense of the divine act of love; something sentimental in the best sense.
[21] This Chiristological outburst runs on in the form of purely positive statement, although having already in view doctrinal dangers of the kind in Colossae. According to Holtzmann, the Christology belongs to the compiler; the whole passage, vv. 14 20, is forced and without motive, and it is only in ver. 21 that we find the direct sequel to ver. 13. The latter statement is incorrect. And why should this excursus, as a grand basis for all the exhortations and warnings that follow, be held without due motive? Holtzmann forms too harsh a judgment as to the whole passage Colossians 1:9-23 , when he declares it incompatible with any strict exegetical treatment.
[22] Theodore of Mopsuestia finds in the expression the contrast that Christ was the Son of God οὠÏÏÏει , á¼Î»Î»Ê¼ á¼Î³Î¬Ïá¿ Ïá¿Ï Ï á¼±Î¿Î¸ÎµÏÎ¯Î±Ï .
Verse 14
Colossians 1:14 . Not a preliminary condition of the Ï á¼±Î¿Î¸ÎµÏία (de Wette), nor the benefit of which Christians become partakers in the kingdom of the Son of God (Huther; against which it may be urged that the βαÏιλεία does not denote the kingdom of the church ); nor yet a mark of the deliverance from darkness having taken place (Ritschl in the Jahrb. f. Deutsche Theol . 1863, p. 513), since this deliverance necessarily coincides with the translation into the kingdom; but it is the abiding ( á¼Ïομεν , habemus , not accepimus ) relation, in which that transference into the kingdom of God has its causal basis . The ransoming (from the punishment of sin, see the explanatory Ïὴν á¼ÏεÏιν Ïῶν á¼Î¼Î±ÏÏ .) we have in Christ , inasmuch as He, by the shedding of His blood as the purchase-price (see on 1 Corinthians 6:20 ; Galatians 3:13 ; Galatians 4:5 ), has given Himself as a λÏÏÏον (Matthew 20:28 ; Mark 10:45 ; 1 Timothy 2:6 ); and this redemption, effected by His ἱλαÏÏήÏιον (Romans 3:21 ff.), remains continually in subsistence and efficacy. Hence: á¼Î½ á¾§ , which specifies wherein the subjective á¼Ïομεν is objectively based, as its causa meritoria (Romans 3:24 ). Comp., moreover, on Ephesians 1:7 , whence διὰ Ïοῦ αἵμαÏÎ¿Ï Î±á½Ïοῦ has found its way hither as a correct gloss. But the deleting of this addition by no means implies that we should make Ïῶν á¼Î¼Î±ÏÏιῶν also belong to Ïὴν á¼ÏολÏÏÏÏÏιν (Hofmann), as in Hebrews 9:15 , especially as Paul elsewhere only uses á¼ÏολÏÏÏÏÏÎ¹Ï either absolutely (Romans 3:24 ; 1 Corinthians 1:30 ; Ephesians 1:7 ; Ephesians 4:30 ) or with the genitive of the subject (Romans 8:23 ; Ephesians 1:14 ). The expression á¼ÏεÏÎ¹Ï Ï . á¼Î¼Î±ÏÏ . is not used by him elsewhere in the epistles (comp., however, Romans 4:7 ), but at Acts 13:38 ; Acts 26:28 . Holtzmann too hastily infers that the writer had read the Synoptics.
Verse 15
Colossians 1:15 . As to Colossians 1:15-20 , see Schleiermacher in the Stud. u. Krit . 1832, p. 497 ff. ( Werke z. Theol . II. p. 321 ff.), and, in opposition to his ethical interpretation (of Christ as the moral Reformer of the world), Holzhausen in the Tüb. Zeitschr . 1832, 4, p. 236 ff.; Osiander, ibid . 1833, 1, 2; Bähr, appendix to Komment . p. 321 ff.; Bleek on Hebrews 1:2 . See generally also Hofmann, Schriftbew . I. p. 153 ff., II. 1, p. 357 ff.; Beyschlag in the Stud. u. Krit . 1860, p. 446 f.
After having stated, in Colossians 1:14 , what we have in Christ (whose state of exaltation he has in view, see Colossians 1:13 , Ïὴν βαÏιλείαν ), Paul now, continuing his discourse by an epexegetical relative clause, depicts what Christ is , namely, as regards His divine dignity having in view the influences of the false teachers, who with Gnostic tendencies depreciated this dignity. The plan of the discourse is not tripartite (originator of the physical creation, Colossians 1:15 f.; maintainer of everything created, Colossians 1:17 ; relation to the new moral creation, Colossians 1:18 ff., so Bähr, while others divide differently [23] ), but bipartite , in such a way that Colossians 1:15-17 set forth the exalted metaphysical relation of Christ to God and the world , and then Colossians 1:18 ff., His historical relation of dignity to the church . [24] This division, which in itself is logically correct (whereas Colossians 1:17 is not suited, either as regards contents or form, to be a separate, co-ordinate part), is also externally indicated by the two confirmatory clauses á½ Ïι á¼Î½ αá½Ïá¿· κ . Ï . λ . in Colossians 1:16 and Colossians 1:19 , by which the two preceding [25] affirmations in Colossians 1:15 and Colossians 1:18 are shown to be the proper parts of the discourse. Others (see especially Bengel, Schleiermacher, Hofmann, comp. also Gess, Pers. Chr . p. 77) have looked upon the twice-expressed á½ Ï á¼ÏÏιν in Colossians 1:15 and Colossians 1:18 as marking the beginning of the two parts. But this would not be justifiable as respects the second á½Ï á¼Î£Î¤ÎÎ ; for the main idea, which governs the whole effusion, Colossians 1:15-20 , is the glory of the dominion of the Son of God , in the description of which Paul evidently begins the second part with the words καὶ αá½ÏÏÏ , Colossians 1:18 , passing over from the general to the special, namely, to His government over the church to which He has attained by His resurrection. On the details, see below.
á½ Ï á¼ÏÏιν κ . Ï . λ .] It is to be observed that Paul has in view Christ as regards His present existence, consequently as regards the presence and continuance of His state of exaltation (comp. on. Colossians 1:13-14 ); hence he affirms, not what Christ was , but what He is . On this á¼ÏÏίν , comp. Colossians 1:17-18 , and 2 Corinthians 4:4 . Therefore not only the reference to Christ’s temporal manifestation (Calvin, Grotius, Heinrichs, Baumgarten-Crusius, and others), but also the limitation to Christ’s divine nature or the Logos (Calovius, Estius, Wolf, and many others, including Bähr, Steiger, Olshausen, Huther) is incorrect. The only correct reference is to His whole person , which, in the divine-human state of its present heavenly existence, is continually that which its divine nature this nature considered in and by itself was before the incarnation; so that, in virtue of the identity of His divine nature, the same predicates belong to the exalted Christ as to the Logos. See Philippians 2:6 ; John 17:5 .
εἰκὼν Ïοῦ Îεοῦ Ïοῦ á¼Î¿ÏάÏÎ¿Ï ] image of God the invisible . Comp. on 2 Corinthians 4:4 . As, namely, Christ in His pre-existence [26] down to His incarnation already possessed the essential divine glory, so that He was as to nature á¼´Ïα Îεῷ , and as to form of appearance á¼Î ÎÎΡΦῠÎÎÎῦ á½Î ÎΡΧΩΠ(see on Philippians 2:6 ); so, after He had by means of the incarnation divested Himself, not indeed of His God-equal nature, but of His divine ÎÎÎÎ , and had humbled Himself, and had in obedience towards God died even the death of the cross, He has been exalted again by God to His original glory (Philippians 2:9 ; John 17:5 ), so that the divine ÎÎÎÎ now exists (comp. on Colossians 2:9 ) in His glorified corporeal manifestation (Philippians 3:21 ); and He the exalted Christ in this His glory, which is that of His Father, represents and brings to view by exact image God, who is in Himself invisible. He is á¼Î ÎÎÎÎΣÎΠΤá¿Ï ÎÎÎÎÏ ÎÎῠΧÎΡÎÎΤá¿Î¡ Τá¿Ï á½Î ÎΣΤÎΣÎÎ©Ï ÎÎÎῦ (Hebrews 1:3 ), [27] and, in this majesty, in which He is the exactly similar visible revelation of God, He will present Himself to all the world at the Parousia (Matthew 16:27 ; Matthew 25:31 ; Philippians 3:20 ; 2 Thessalonians 1:7 ; 1 Peter 4:13 ; Titus 2:13 , et al .). The predicate Ïοῦ á¼Î¿ÏάÏÎ¿Ï , placed as it is in its characteristically significant attributive position (Bornemann, Schol. in Luc . p. xxxvi.; Bernhardy, p. 322 f.) behind the emphatic Ïοῦ Îεοῦ , posits for the conception of the exact image visibility (Hebrews 12:14 ; 2 Corinthians 3:18 ; Acts 22:11 ); but the assumption that Paul had thus in view the Alexandrian doctrine of the Logos , the doctrine of the hidden and manifest God (see Usteri, Lehrbegr . p. 308; comp. Bähr, Olshausen, Steiger, Huther), the less admits of proof, because he is not speaking here of the pre-existence , but of the exalted Christ, including, therefore, His human nature; hence, also, the comparison with the angel Metatron of Jewish theology (comp. Hengstenberg, Christol . III. 2, p. 67) is irrelevant. The Fathers, moreover, have, in opposition to the Arians, rightly laid stress upon the fact (see Suicer, Thes . I. p. 415) that, according to the entire context, εἰκὼν Ïοῦ Îεοῦ is meant in the eminent sense, namely of the adequate , and consequently consubstantial, image of God ( μÏÎ½Î¿Ï â¦ ÎºÎ±á½¶ á¼ÏαÏαλλάκÏÏÏ Îµá¼°ÎºÏν , Theophylact), and not as man (Genesis 1:26 ; comp. also 1 Corinthians 11:7 ; Colossians 3:10 ) or the creation (Romans 1:20 ) is God’s image. In that case, however, the invisibility of the εἰκÏν is not at all to be considered as presupposed (Chrysostom, Calovius, and others); this, on the contrary, pertains to the Godhead in itself (1 Timothy 1:17 ; Hebrews 11:27 ), so far as it does not present itself in its εἰκÏν ; whereas the notion of ÎἸÎÎÎ necessarily involves perceptibility (see above); “Dei inaspecti aspectabilis imago,” Grotius. This visibility and that not merely mental (Romans 1:20 ) had been experienced by Paul himself at his conversion, and at Christ’s Parousia will be fully experienced by all the world. Different from this is the (discursive) cognoscibility of God, which Christ has brought about by His appearance and working. John 1:18 ; John 14:9 . This applies against the view of Calvin, Clericus, and many others, including de Wette: “in His person, appearance, and operation ⦠God has made Himself as it were visible; ” comp. Grotius: “Adam imago Dei fuit, sed valde tenuis; in Christo perfectissime apparuit, quam Deus esset sapiens, potens, bonus;” Baumgarten-Crusius: “the affinity to God (which is held to consist in the destination of ruling over the spirit-world) as Christ showed it upon earth.” Thus the substantiality of the exact image is more or less turned into a quasi or quodammodo , and the text is thus laid open to every kind of rationalizing caprice. We may add that Christ was already, as λÏÎ³Î¿Ï á¼ÏαÏÎºÎ¿Ï , necessarily the image of God, but á¼Î ÎÎΡΦῠÎÎÎῦ , in purely divine glory; not, as after His exaltation, in divine-human δÏξα ; consequently, the doctrine of an eternal humanity of Christ (Beyschlag) is not to be based on ÎἸÎῺΠΤÎῦ ÎÎÎῦ . Comp. Wis 7:26 , and Grimm, Handb . p. 161 f. The idea, also, of the prototype of humanity , which is held by Beyschlag here to underlie that of the image of God (comp. his Christol . p. 227), is foreign to the context. Certainly God has in eternity thought of the humanity which in the fulness of time was to be assumed by His Son (Acts 15:18 ); but this is simply an ideal pre-existence (comp. Delitzsch, Psychol . p. 41 ff.), such as belongs to the entire history of salvation, very different from the real antemundane existence of the personal Logos.
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÎ¿ÎºÎ¿Ï ÏάÏÎ·Ï ÎºÏίÏεÏÏ ] After the relation of Christ to God now follows His relation to what is created , in an apologetic interest of opposition to the Gnostic false teachers; βοÏλεÏαι δεá¿Î¾Î±Î¹ , á½ Ïι ÏÏὸ ÏάÏÎ·Ï Ïá¿Ï κÏίÏεÏÏ á¼ÏÏιν á½ Ï á¼±ÏÏ Â· Ïá¿¶Ï á½¤Î½ ; διὰ γενήÏεÏÏ Â· οá½ÎºÎ¿á¿¦Î½ καὶ Ïῶν á¼Î³Î³ÎλÏν ÏÏÏÏεÏÎ¿Ï , καὶ οá½ÏÏÏ á½¥ÏÏε καὶ αá½Ïá½¸Ï á¼ÎºÏιÏεν αá½ÏοÏÏ , Theophylact. The false teachers denied to Christ the supreme unique rank in the order of spirits. But he is first-born of every creature , that is, born before every creature having come to personal existence , [28] entered upon subsistent being, ere yet anything created was extant (Romans 1:25 ; Romans 8:39 ; Hebrews 4:13 ). Analogous, but not equivalent, is Proverbs 8:22 f. It is to be observed that this predicate also belongs to the entire Christ, inasmuch as by His exaltation His entire person is raised to that state in which He, as to His divine nature, had already existed before the creation of the world, corresponding to the Johannine expression á¼Î½ á¼ÏÏῠἦν ὠλÏÎ³Î¿Ï , which in substance, although not in form, is also Pauline; comp. Philippians 2:6 . Philo’s term ÏÏÏÏÏÎ³Î¿Î½Î¿Ï , used of the Logos, denotes the same relation; but it is not necessary to suppose that Paul appropriated from him this expression , which is also current among classical authors, or that the apostle was at all dependent on the Alexandrian philosophic view. The mode in which he conceived of the personal pre-existence of Christ before the world as regards (timeless) origin, is not defined by the figurative ÏÏÏÏÏÏÎ¿ÎºÎ¿Ï more precisely than as procession from the divine nature (Philo illustrates the relation of the origin of the Logos, by saying that the Father á¼Î½ÎÏειλεν Him), whereby the premundane Christ became subsistent á¼Î½ μοÏÏá¿ Îεοῦ and á¼´Ïα Îεῷ (Philippians 2:6 ). The genitive ÏάÏÎ·Ï ÎºÏίÏεÏÏ , moreover, is not the partitive genitive (although de Wette still, with Usteri, Reuss, and Baur, holds this to be indubitable), because the anarthrous Ïá¾¶Ïα κÏίÏÎ¹Ï does not mean the whole creation , or everything which is created (Hofmann), and consequently cannot affirm the category or collective whole [29] to which Christ belongs as its first-born individual (it means: every creature; comp. on Ïá¾¶Ïα οἰκοδομή , Ephesians 2:21 [30] ); but it is the genitive of comparison , corresponding to the superlative expression: “ the first-born in comparison with every creature ” (see Bernhardy, p. 139), that is, born earlier than every creature. Comp. Bähr and Bleek, Ernesti, Urspr. d. Sünde, I. p. 241; Weiss, Bibl. Theol . p. 424; Philippi, Glaubensl. II. p. 214, Exodus 2:0 . In Revelation 1:5 , ÏÏÏÏÏÏοκ . Ïῶν νεκÏῶν , the relation is different, Ï . νεκÏῶν pointing out the category; comp. ÏÏÏÏÏÏοκ . á¼Î½ Ïολλοá¿Ï á¼Î´ ., Romans 8:29 . The genitive here is to be taken quite as the comparative genitive with ÏÏá¿¶ÏÎ¿Ï ; see on John 1:15 , and generally, Kühner, II. 1, p. 335 f. The element of comparison is the relation of time ( ÏÏὸ Ïοῦ Ïὸν κÏÏμον εἶναι , John 17:5 ), and that in respect of origin . But because the latter in the case of every ÎΤÎΣÎÏ is different from what it is in the case of Christ, neither ÏÏÏÏÏκÏιÏÏÎ¿Ï nor ÏÏÏÏÏÏλαÏÏÎ¿Ï is made use of, [31] terms which would indicate for Christ, who is withal Son of God, a similar mode of origin as for the creature but the term ÏÏÏÏÏÏÎ¿ÎºÎ¿Ï is chosen, which, in the comparison as to time of origin, points to the peculiar nature of the origination in the case of Christ , namely, that He was not created by God, like the other beings in whom this is implied in the designation κÏίÏÎ¹Ï , but born , having come forth homogeneous from the nature of God. And by this is expressed, not a relation homogeneous with the κÏίÏÎ¹Ï (Holtzmann), a relation kindred to the world (Beyschlag, Christol . p. 227), but that which is absolutely exalted above the world and unique. Theodoret justly observes: οá½Ï á½¡Ï á¼Î´ÎµÎ»Ïὴν á¼ÏÏν Ïὴν κÏίÏιν , á¼Î»Î»Ê¼ á½¡Ï ÏÏὸ Ïá¾¶ÏÎ·Ï ÎºÏίÏεÏÏ Î³ÎµÎ½Î½Î·Î¸ÎµÎ¯Ï . At variance with the words, therefore, is the Arian interpretation, that Christ is designated as the first creature; so also Usteri, p. 315, Schwegler, Baur, Reuss. With this view the sequel also conflicts, which describes Christ as the accomplisher and aim of creation; hence in His case a mode of origin higher and different from the being created must be presupposed, which is, in fact, characteristically indicated in the purposely-chosen word ÏÏÏÏÏÏÎ¿ÎºÎ¿Ï . The Socinian interpretation is also incorrect [32] (Grotius, Wetstein, Nösselt, Heinrichs, and others), that κÏίÏÎ¹Ï denotes the new ethical creation, along with which there is, for the most part, associated the reference of ÏÏÏÏÏÏοκ . to the highest dignity (Pelagius, Melanchthon, Cameron, Hammond, Zachariae, and others, including Storr and Flatt; comp. de Wette), which is assumed also by many who understand it of the physical creation. It is decisive against this interpretation, that κÏίÏÎ¹Ï would necessarily require for the moral notion a more precise definition, either by a predicate ( καινή , 2 Corinthians 5:17 ; comp. Barnabas, ep. c. xvi.: λαβÏνÏÎµÏ Ïὴν á¼ÏεÏιν Ïῶν á¼Î¼Î±ÏÏιῶν καὶ á¼Î»ÏίÏανÏÎµÏ á¼Ïá½¶ Ïá¿· á½Î½ÏμαÏι Ïοῦ ÎºÏ ÏÎ¯Î¿Ï , á¼Î³ÎµÎ½Ïμεθα καινοὶ , Ïάλιν á¼Î¾ á¼ÏÏá¿Ï κÏιζÏμενοι ), or at least by a context which admitted of no doubt; also, that ÏÏÏÏÏÏÎ¿ÎºÎ¿Ï never means the most excellent , and can only have this sense ex adjuncto (as at Psalms 89:28 ; Romans 8:29 ), which in this passage is not by any means the case, as the context (see Colossians 1:16 , and ÏÏὸ ÏάνÏÏν in Colossians 1:17 ; comp. also ÏÏÏÏÏÏÎ¿ÎºÎ¿Ï á¼Îº Ïῶν νεκÏῶν in Colossians 1:18 ) brings prominently forward the relation of time . Chrysostom justly says: οá½Ïá½¶ á¼Î¾Î¯Î±Ï κ . Ïιμá¿Ï , á¼Î»Î»á½° ÏÏÏÎ½Î¿Ï Î¼Ïνον á¼ÏÏá½¶ ÏημανÏικÏν , and already Theophilus, ad Autol . ii. 31, p. 172: á½ ÏοÏε δὲ ἠθÎληÏεν á½ ÎÎµá½¸Ï Ïοιá¿Ïαι á½ Ïα á¼Î²Î¿Ï λεÏÏαÏο , ÏοῦÏον Ïὸν λÏγον á¼Î³ÎννηÏε ÏÏοÏοÏικÏν , ÏÏÏÏÏÏοκον ÏάÏÎ·Ï ÎºÏίÏεÏÏ . This ÏÏÏÏÏÏοκον εἶναι belongs to the high dignity of Christ (comp. Revelation 3:14 : ἡ á¼ÏÏá½´ Ïá¿Ï κÏίÏεÏÏ Ïοῦ Îεοῦ ), but it does not signify it. Comp. Justin, c. Tr . 100: ÏÏÏÏÏÏοκον μὲν Ïοῦ Îεοῦ κ . ÏÏὸ ÏάνÏÏν Ïῶν κÏιÏμάÏÏν . The ethical [33] interpretation of the passage appears all the more mistaken, since according to it, even if ÏÏÏÏÏÏοκ . is understood temporally (Baumgarten-Crusius: “ ÎΤÎΣÎÏ is that which is remodelled , and ÏÏÏÏÏÏÎ¿ÎºÎ¿Ï , He who has come first under this category, has first received this higher spiritual dignity”), Christ is made to be included under the κÏίÏÎ¹Ï , which is at variance both with the context in Colossians 1:16 f., and with the whole N. T. Christology, especially the sinlessness of Christ. If, however, in order to obviate this ground of objection, ΠΡΩΤÎΤÎÎÎÏ is combined as an adjective with ÎἸÎÎÎ , we not only get a complicated construction, since both words have their genitival definition, but ΠΡΩΤÎΤÎÎÎÏ (instead of ΠΡΩΤÎΤΥΠÎÏ ) would be an inappropriate predicate for εἰκÏν . This applies against Schleiermacher, who, taking ÎΤÎΣÎÏ as “disposition and arrangement of human things,” educes the rationalizing interpretation, that Christ is in the whole compass of the spiritual world of man the first-born image, the original copy of God; that all believers ought to be formed in the image of Christ, and thence the image of God would likewise necessarily arise in them an image of the second order. In the interest of opposition to heresy, some, following Isidore of Pelusium, Ep . iii. 31, p. 237, and Basil the Great, c. Eunom . iv. p. 104, have made the first- born even into the first- bringer-forth ( ÏÏÏÏοÏÏÎºÎ¿Ï , as paroxytone, according to the classical usage, Hom. Il . xvii. 5; Plat. Theaet . p. 161 A, 151C; Valckenaer, Schol . II. p. 389), as, with Erasmus in his Annot . (but only permissively) Erasmus Schmid and Michaelis did, although ÏÏÏÏοÏÏÎºÎ¿Ï in an active sense occurs only of the female sex, and the very ΠΡΩΤÎΤÎÎÎÏ á¼Î Τ . ÎÎÎΡ . of Colossians 1:18 ought to have dissuaded from such an idea, to say nothing of the unfitness and want of delicacy of the figure [34] as relating to Christ’s agency in the creation of the world, and of the want of reference in the ÏÏá¿¶Ïον to the idea of a δεÏÏεÏον an idea which, with the usual interpretation, is implied in κÏίÏεÏÏ .
Colossians 1:15 f. is, moreover, strikingly opposed to that assumption of a world without beginning (Schleiermacher, Rothe).
[23] e.g . Calovius: “Redemptoris descriptio a Deitale: ab opere creationis,” and “quod caput ecclesiae sit.” Comp. Schmid, Bibl. Theol. II. p. 299 f.
[24] Olshausen brings the two divisions under the exegetically erroneous point of view that, in vv. 15 17, Christ is described without reference to the incarnation, and in vv. 18 20, with reference to the same.
[25] In conformity with the confirmatory function of the á½ Ïι , according to which not the clause introduced by á½ Ïι , but the clause which it is to confirm, contains the leading thought, to which á½ Ïι κ . Ï . λ . is logically subordinated. Hence the two parts are not to be begun with the two clauses á½ Ïι á¼Î½ αá½Ïá¿· themselves (so Rich. Schmidt, Paulin. Christol. p. 182), in which case, moreover, ver. 15 is supposed to be quite aloof from this connection a supposition at variance with its even verbally evident association with ver. 16.
[26] Sabatier, p. 290, without reason represents the apostle as in a state of indistinct suspense in regard to his conception of this pre-existence. And Pfleiderer (in Hilgenfeld’s Zeitschr. 1871, p. 533) sees in the pre-existence a subjective product, the consequence, namely, of the fact that Christ is the ideal of the destiny of the human mind, hypostasized in a single person, to which is transferred the eternity and unchanged self-equality of the idea.
[27] This is the chief point of agreement between our Epistle and the Epistle to the Hebrews; and it is explained by the Pauline basis and footing, on which the author of the latter stood. The subsequent ÏÏÏÏÏÏÎ¿ÎºÎ¿Ï ÏÎ±Ï . κÏÎ¯Ï ., however, has nothing to do with ÏÏÏÏÏÏÎ¿ÎºÎ¿Ï , Hebrews 1:6 , where the absolute word is rather to be explained in accordance with Romans 8:29 . We make this remark in opposition to Holtzmann, according to whom “the autor ad Ephesios as to his Christology walks in the track opened by the Epistle to the Hebrews.” Other apparent resemblances to this letter are immaterial, and similar ones can be gathered from all the Pauline letters.
[28] According to Hofmann ( Schriftbew.), the expression is also intended to imply that the existence of all created things was brought about through Him. But this is only stated in what follows, and is not yet contained in ÏÏÏÏÏÏÎ¿ÎºÎ¿Ï by itself, which only posits the origin of Christ (as λÏÎ³Î¿Ï ÏÏοÏοÏικÏÏ ) in His temporal relation to the creature; and this point is the more purely to he adhered to, seeing that Christ Himself does not belong to the category of the κÏίÏÎ¹Ï Calvin also has understood it as Hofmann does; comp. also Gess, v. d. Pers. Chr. p. 79, and Beyschlag, p. 446, according to whom Christ is at the same time to be designated as the principle of the creature, whose origin bears in itself that of the latter.
[29] Comp. Stallb. ad Plat. Rep. p. 608 C. The article would necessarily be added, as Ïá¾¶Ïα ἡ κÏίÏÎ¹Ï , Jdt 16:14 , or ἡ Ïá¾¶Ïα κÏίÏÎ¹Ï , 3Ma 6:2 , or ἡκÏίÏÎ¹Ï Ïá¾¶Ïα . Comp. also ὠλη ἡ κÏίÏÎ¹Ï , Wis 19:6 .
[30] Hofmann, Schriftbew. I. p. 156: “In relation to all that is created, Christ occupies the position which a first-born has towards the household of his father.” Essentially similar is his view in his Heil. Schr. N. T., p. 16, where Ï . κÏÎ¯Ï . is held to mean “all creation,” and to signify “all that is created in its unity,” which is also the opinion of Rich. Schmidt, Paul. Christol. p. 211. The interpretation of Hofmann (comp. Gess, Pers. Chr. p. 79) is incorrect, because there would thereby be necessarily affirmed a homogeneous relation of origin for Christ and all the κÏίÏÎ¹Ï The κÏίÏÎ¹Ï would stand to Christ in the relation of the μεÏαÏεÏÎ¸ÎµÎ¯Ï , to the ÏÏÏÏÏÏÎµÎºÎ¹Ï , of the á¼ÏÎ¯Î³Î¿Î½Î¿Ï to the ÏÏÏÏÏÎ³Î¿Î½Î¿Ï . Hofmann indeed (Heil. Schr. in loc.) opines that ÏάÏÎ·Ï ÎºÏίÏεÏÏ is simply genitive “of the definition of relation.” But this, in fact, explains nothing, because the question remains, What relation is meant to be defined by the genitive? The ÏÏÏÏÏÏÎ¿ÎºÎ¿Ï ÏάÏÎ·Ï ÎºÏίÏεÏÏ is not at all to be got over so easily as it is by Hofmann, namely, with a grammatically erroneous explanation of the anarthrous Ïá¾¶Ïα κÏίÏÎ¹Ï , and with appeal to Psalms 89:28 (where, in fact, ÏÏÏÏÏÏÎ¿ÎºÎ¿Ï stands without genitive, and ×Ö¼Ö°××Ìר in the sense of the first rank).
[31] How much, however, the designations ÏÏÏÏÏκÏιÏÏÎ¿Ï , κÏίÏμα , κÏίζειν κ . Ï . λ ., as applied to the origin of the Son, were in use among the Alexandrians (following Proverbs 8:22 , where Wisdom says: κÏÏÎ¹Î¿Ï á¼ÎºÏιÏΠμε , comp. Sir 1:4 ; Sir 24:8 f.), may be seen in Gieseler, Kirchengesch. I. 1, p. 327, Exodus 4:0 .
[32] The Socinian doctrine argues thus: “primogenitum unum ex eorum numero, quorum primogenitus est, esse necesse est;” but Christ could not be “unus e rebus conditis creationis veteris,” an assumption which would be Arian; He must consequently belong to the new creation, from which it follows, at the same time, that He does not possess a divine nature. See Catech. Racov. 167, p. 318, ed. Oeder.
[33] Both errors of the Socinians, etc., are already present in Theodore of Mop-suestia, namely, that ÏÏÏÏÏÏÎ¿ÎºÎ¿Ï ÏÎ¬Ï . κÏÎ¯Ï does not stand á¼Ïá½¶ ÏÏÏÎ½Î¿Ï , but á¼Ïá½¶ ÏÏοÏιμήÏεÏÏ and signifies á¼Ïá½¶ ÏÏÏÎ½Î¿Ï ; and that the following á¼Î½ αá½Ïá¿· κ . Ï . λ . does not denote Ïὴν ÏÏÏÏην , but Ïὴν á¼Î½ αá½Ïá¿· γενομÎνην á¼Î½Î¬ÎºÏιÏιν . Comp. also Photius, Amphil. 192.
[34] ÏÏá¿¶Ïον αá½Ïὸν ÏεÏοκÎναι , ÏοῦÏʼ á¼ÏÏι ÏιÏοιηκÎναι Ïὴν κÏίÏιν , Isidore, l.c.
Verse 16
Colossians 1:16 . For in Him were all things created , the logically correct confirmation of ÏÏÏÏÏÏÎ¿ÎºÎ¿Ï ÏÎ¬Ï . κÏίÏεÏÏ . For if the creation of all things took place in Christ, it is evident that He must stand before the series of created things, and be ÏÏÏÏÏÏÎ¿ÎºÎ¿Ï ÏάÏÎ·Ï ÎºÏίÏεÏÏ .
á¼Î½ αá½Ïá¿· ] is not equivalent to διʼ αá½Ïοῦ (Chrysostom, Oecumenius, Theophylact, Erasmus, Beza, Bleek, and many others), but: on Christ depended (causally) the act of creation, so that the latter was not done independently of Him in a causal connection apart from Him but it had in Him the ground essentially conditioning it. In Him lay, in fact, the potency of life, from which God made the work of creation proceed, inasmuch as He was the personal principle of the divine self-revelation, and therewith the accomplisher of the divine idea of the world. A well-known classical usage to denote the dependence of a state of things, the causality of which is contained in any one . See Bernhardy, p. 210; Kühner, II. 1, p. 403 f.; from the N. T., Winer, p. 364 [E. T. 521]. Not as if the “causa principalis ” of the creation lay in Christ, but the organic causality of the world’s becoming created was in Him; hence the following διʼ αá½Ïοῦ affirms not a different state of things , but the same thing under a varied form of conception and designation, by which it is brought out in greater definiteness. The primary ground of creation is ever God, Rom 11:36 ; 1 Corinthians 8:6 ; Hebrews 11:3 . The speculative interpretation of scholastic theology, which found here the “causa exemplaris ,” according to which the idea omnium rerum was in Christ, is indeed followed in the main again by Beyschlag, as earlier by Kleuker, Böhmer, Bähr, Neander, Schleiermacher, Steiger, Julius Müller, Olshausen (the latter saying: “the Son of God is the intelligible world, the κÏÏÎ¼Î¿Ï Î½Î¿Î·ÏÏÏ , that is, things in their very idea; He bears their essence in Himself”), but is destitute of confirmation from the modes of conception and expression elsewhere in the N. T., and, as á¼ÎºÏίÏθη denotes the historical fact of the having been created, it would require not á¼Î½ αá½Ïá¿· , but á¼Î¾ αá½Ïοῦ , by which the coming forth of the real from the ideal existence in Christ might be expressed. Huther finds the inward connection indicated by á¼Î½ αá½Ïá¿· in the idea, that the eternal essence of the universe is the divine essence itself, which in Christ became man. This idea in itself has no biblical ground; and Paul is speaking here, not of the existence and essence of the universe in Christ, but of the becoming created, which took place in Christ ( á¼Î½ αá½Ïá¿· ζÏá½´ ἦν , John 1:4 ), consequently of a divine act depending on Christ; comp. John 1:3 : ÏÏÏá½¶Ï Î±á½Ïοῦ á¼Î³ÎνεÏο οá½Î´á½² á¼Î½ ὠγÎγονεν ; Hebrews 1:2 ; and Bleek in loc . Lastly, de Wette finds in á¼Î½ besides the instrumental agency at the same time something of a telic idea (comp. also Ewald and Weiss, Bibl. Theol . p. 424 f.); but this blending together of two heterogeneous references is not justified by the διʼ αá½Ïοῦ καὶ Îµá¼°Ï Î±á½ÏÏν that follows.
á¼ÎºÏίÏθη ] physical act of creation; Schleiermacher ought not to have called in question the linguistic usage to this effect, with a view to favour the ethical interpretation of the founding of the church . See Wis 1:14 ; Wis 10:1 ; Wis 11:18 ; Deuteronomy 4:32 ; comp. Genesis 6:7 ; Sir 24:9 , comp. Sir 15:14 ; Jdt 13:18 ; comp. Genesis 1:1 ; 1 Corinthians 11:9 ; Ephesians 3:9 ; Romans 1:25 ; Revelation 10:6 , comp. Revelation 14:7 . The word may have the meaning adopted by Schleiermacher: to obtain its arrangement and constitution (Herod. i. 149, 167, 168; Thuc. i. 100; Aesch. Choeph . 484; Soph. Ant . 1101; Pind. Ol . vi. 116; 3 Esdr. 4:53), and that according to the relative nature of the notion implied in the word condere (comp. Blomf. Gloss, in Aesch. Pers . 294); but not here, where it is correlative with ÏάÏÎ·Ï ÎºÏίÏεÏÏ , and where the quite general and in no way to be restricted Ïá½° ÏάνÏα follows. Throughout the N. T., in general κÏÎ¯Î¶Ï , κÏίÏÎ¹Ï , κÏίÏμα , denote the original bringing forth, never merely the arrangement of that which exists; and even in such passages as Ephesians 2:10 ; Ephesians 2:15 ; Ephesians 4:24 , the relation is conceived, only in a popular manner, as actual creation .
Observe, moreover, the distinction of the tenses: á¼ÎºÏίÏθη , which denotes the act that took place; and then á¼ÎºÏιÏÏαι , which denotes the creation which has taken place and now subsists . See Winer, p. 255 [E. T. 340]; Kühner, II. 1, p. 143 f., and ad Xen. Mem . iii. 1. 4, iii. 7. 7.
Ïá½° ÏάνÏα ] the collective whole , namely, of what is created. This is then specified in a twofold way, as well in regard to place as in regard to nature.
Ïá½° á¼Î½ Ïοá¿Ï οá½Ïανοá¿Ï κ . Ï . λ .] the things to be found in the heavens and those to be found on earth . This is certainly a less exact designation of all created things than that in Revelation 10:6 ( Ïὸν οá½Ïανὸν καὶ Ïá½° á¼Î½ αá½Ïá¿· κ . Ï . λ .; comp. Nehemiah 9:6 ; Genesis 2:1 , et al .), but does not differ from it, as it does not exclude heaven and earth themselves, the constituent elements of which, in the popular view, are included in these two categories. Comp. 1 Chronicles 29:11 . It is incorrect, therefore, to press this expression in opposition to the explanation which refers it to the creation of the world (Wetstein: “non dicit ὠοá½ÏÎ±Î½á½¸Ï ÎºÎ±á½¶ ἡ γῠá¼ÎºÏίÏθη sed Ïá½° ÏάνÏα , etc., quo habitatores significantur, qui reconciliantur,” comp. Heinrichs and others, also Catech. Racov . 132, p. 214, ed. Oeder), and to think, with Schleiermacher, of the kingdom of heaven; but it is arbitrary also, especially after Ïá½° ÏάνÏα , to make the apostle mean primarily the living (Bähr, de Wette) or rational creatures. The expression embraces everything; hence there was neither need for the mention of the lower world , nor, looking at the bipartite form of enumeration, occasion for it (it is otherwise in Philippians 2:10 ; Revelation 5:3 ). The idea that Paul could not have adduced those under the earth as a special class of created beings, because God had not created them with the view of their being under the earth (de Wette), would imply a reflection alien to the vivid flow of the passage before us.
Ïá½° á½ÏαÏá½° κ . Ïá½° á¼ÏÏαÏα ] By the latter is meant the heavenly world of spirits , the angelic commonwealth, as is evident from the more precise enumeration which follows, and not the souls of men (Chrysostom, Theophylact, and others), which, on the contrary, as animating a portion of the á½ÏαÏά , are included among the latter. Theodoret erroneously asserts that even Ïá½° á½ÏαÏά applies to heavenly things (sun, moon, and stars); it applies to everything visible, as in Plat. Phaed . p. 79 A: θῶμεν οá½Î½ , εἰ βοÏλει , á¼Ïη , δÏο εἴδη Ïῶν á½Î½ÏÏν Ïὸ μὲν á½ÏαÏÏν , Ïὸ δὲ á¼ÎµÎ¹Î´ÎÏ .
The á¼ÏÏαÏα are now more precisely specified disjunctively by εἴÏε , sive ⦠sive (put more than twice; comp. Plat. Rep . p. 612 A, 493 D; Sir 41:4 ). As to the four denominations of angels which follow whose difference of rank Hofmann groundlessly denies, [35] understanding thereby merely “ spirits collectively, of whatever name they may be ” see on Ephesians 1:21 ; Romans 8:38 . In accordance with Ephesians 1:21 , where the grades of angels are mentioned in descending order, the arrangement here must be understood so, that the θÏÏνοι are the highest and the ÎºÏ ÏιÏÏηÏÎµÏ the lowest class, the á¼ÏÏαί and the á¼Î¾Î¿Ï Ïίαι being two middle orders lying between these two extremes. At Eph. l.c . Paul names also four grades of the angelic hierarchy; but neither there nor here has he intended to give a complete enumeration of them, for in the former case he omits the θÏÏνοι , and in the latter the Î´Ï Î½Î¬Î¼ÎµÎ¹Ï . The θÏÏνοι are not mentioned elsewhere in the N. T. (nor yet in Ignat. ad Trail . 5), but they occur in the Test. Levi , p. 548, in which they are placed in the seventh heaven ( á¼Î½ á¾§ á¼Îµá½¶ á½Î¼Î½Î¿Î¹ Ïá¿· θεῷ ÏÏοÏÏÎÏονÏαι ), also in Dionys. Areop. Hier. coel . 6 ff., and in the Rabbins (Buxtorf, Lex. Talm . p. 1097; Schoettgen, Hor . p. 808). As regards the expression , the last three denominations are to be taken as abstracts , which represent the respective concretes , and analogously the concrete noun θÏÏνοι is used for those to be found on the thrones (for those enthroned ); comp. Kühner, II. 1, p. 11; Ruhnken, ad Tim . p. 190. In this case the very natural supposition that the angels, whose designation by the term θÏÏνοι must have been in current use , were, in the imagery which gave sensuous embodiment to religious ideas, conceived as on thrones , is not to be called in question (in opposition to Fritzsche, ad Rom . II. p. 226). They were probably conceived as enthroned round the throne of God (comp. Revelation 4:4 ; Revelation 20:4 ). It is to be observed, moreover, generally that Paul presupposes the various classes of angels, which he names, as well known; although we are unacquainted with the details of the case, this much is nevertheless certain, that the apostle was far removed from the dreamy fancies indulged in on this point by the later Rabbins (see Eisenmenger, entdeckt. Judenth . II. p. 374). But very soon after the apostolic age (comp. Hermas, Past . vis. iii. 4), instruction as to ÏοÏοθεÏÎ¯Î±Ï Ïá½°Ï á¼Î³Î³ÎµÎ»Î¹ÎºÎ¬Ï was regarded as teaching for the more perfect . See Ignatius, ad Trall . 5. For the Christian faith there remains and suffices the testimony as to different and distinctively designated stages and categories in the angelic world, while any attempt to ascertain more than is written in Scripture passes into the fanciful domain of theosophy.
With á¼Î¾Î¿Ï Ïίαι is concluded the confirmatory sentence ( á½ Ïι ), so that a full stop is to be placed after á¼Î¾Î¿Ï Ï . With Ïá½° ÏάνÏα begins a new sentence, in which Ïá½° ÏάνÏα and αá½ÏÏÏ correspond to one another; hence a comma only must stand after á¼ÎºÏιÏÏαι . There is no reason for placing (with Lachmann) Ïá½° ÏάνÏα down to á¼ÎºÎºÎ»Î·Ï . in a parenthesis.
Ïá½° ÏάνÏα διʼ αá½Ïοῦ κ . Ï . λ .] a solemn recapitulation , [36] but in such a way that, instead of the act of creation previously mentioned, there is now presented the finished and ready result ( á¼ÎºÏιÏÏαι ); the causal relation which was previously denoted by á¼Î½ is now more precisely indicated as a relation of mediate agency ( διʼ αá½Ïοῦ , comp. 1 Corinthians 8:6 ); then in Îµá¼°Ï Î±á½ÏÏν a new element is added, and the emphasis which in Colossians 1:16 lay on á¼ÎºÏίÏθη , is now laid on Ïá½° ÏάνÏα which stands at the head of the sentence. We cannot say with Hofmann, that by διʼ αá½Ïοῦ and Îµá¼°Ï Î±á½ÏÏν the Son comes to stand in contradistinction to what has been created as Creator , after by á¼Î½ αá½Ïá¿· the creative act has been presented as one that had taken place only not without the Son . By the latter, á¼Î½ αá½Ïá¿· would become too general and indefinite a thought; while διʼ αá½Ïοῦ in fact leaves the Father as the Creator, which He is, and predicates of the Son merely the “causa medians ” of the execution of the work, just as Îµá¼°Ï Î±á½ÏÏν predicates the “causa finalis ” of the same.
Îµá¼°Ï Î±á½ÏÏν ] in reference to Him, for Him , as the aim and end, “in quo Pater acquiescit,” Beza. Comp. Romans 11:36 ; 1 Corinthians 8:6 ; Barnab. Ep . 12: á¼Î½ αá½Ïá¿· Ïá½° ÏάνÏα καὶ Îµá¼°Ï Î±á½ÏÏν . The more exact purport of this relation is apparent from all that follows down to Colossians 1:20 . Everything, namely, is created, in order to be dependent on Christ and to serve His will and aim . [37] Comp. on Ephesians 1:23 ; Ephesians 4:10 ; Philippians 2:9 ff. The final cause of the world, referred in Romans 11:36 to God , is here affirmed of Christ , and with equal right; for He, as He was the organ of God in creation, is the commissioned ruler to whom the ÎºÏ ÏιÏÏÎ·Ï Ïῶν ÏάνÏÏν is committed (Matthew 28:18 ; Php 2:9 ; 1 Corinthians 15:27 ; Hebrews 2:8 ), in order that everything created may have the ethical telic destination of serving Him. [38] More special definitions of the meaning of Îµá¼°Ï Î±á½ÏÏν are without due warrant, and in particular, the often-repeated one: to His glorification (Beza, Flatt, Böhmer, and others); it lays down Christ in general as the legitimus finis (Calvin).
The expositors, who explain the words as referring to the new moral creation, have summoned to their aid all kinds of arbitrary conjectures in detail a remark which applies not merely to Nösselt, Heinrichs, and others, but also to Schleiermacher, who holds (comp. Baumgarten-Crusius) that Ïá½° á¼Î½ Ï . οá½Ï . is everything that belongs to the kingdom of heaven, and ΤᾺ á¼Î ῠΤ . Îá¿Ï everything which belongs to civil order in earthly kingdoms; that ΤᾺ á½Î¡ÎΤΠand ΤᾺ á¼ÎΡÎΤΠapply only to the latter; that the ÎΡÎÎÎÎ Î . Τ . Î . are magisterial offices , and the like.
[35] See, on the other hand, Hahn, Theol. d. N. T. I. p. 292 f.; Philippi, Glaubensl. II. p. 308 f.; Kahnis, Dogm. I. p. 559.
[36] Ewald well says: “Just at this point the discourse breaks forth as if with fresh force, so as once more to express as clearly as possible the whole in all conceivable temporal relations.”
[37] And, if the world was created not merely διʼ αá½Ïοῦ but also Îµá¼°Ï Î±á½ÏÏν , conse-sequently in telic reference to Him, it is certain that with the counsel of creation there was also posited, in prospect of the entry of sin, the counsel of redemption. Comp. Thomasius, Christi Pers. u. Werk, I. p. 196 f.; Julius Müller, Dogm. Abhand. p. 121 ff.
[38] This Îµá¼°Ï Î±á½ÏÏν is wrongly found incompatible with 1 Corinthians 8:6 (see, after Mayerhoff, Baur, and others, especially Holtzmann, p. 219), where, in fact, it is said of the ethical existence of Christians that they exist for God through Christ, inasmuch as the subject of Îµá¼°Ï Î±á½ÏÏν (for God) and of διʼ αá½Ïοῦ (through Christ) is not the universe, but the ἡμεá¿Ï . The relation of subordination between Father and Son would be only done away with at our passage, in the event of its being said of Christ that Ïá½° ÏάνÏα were created á¼Î¾ αá½Ïοῦ . But by á¼Î½ αá½Ïá¿· , and by the more precise definition διʼ αá½Ïοῦ , it is guarded; and the subordination remains unaffected by the circumstance that the Îµá¼°Ï Î±á½ÏÏν is laid down by God for the world as its telic aim. This Îµá¼°Ï Î±á½ÏÏν á¼ÎºÏιÏÏαι is the necessary preliminary condition, on God’s part, to the universal dominion which he has destined for Christ, and which the latter shall one day, at the goal of consummation, hand over to the Father (1 Corinthians 15:24 ; 1 Corinthians 15:28 ). Moreover, what Paul says of the κÏίÏÎ¹Ï in Romans 8:0 is essentially connected with that Îµá¼°Ï Î±á½ÏÏν , which does not go beyond Paul or come at all into opposition to him. The resemblance of our passage to á½ ÏÏá¿¶ÏÎ¿Ï ÎºÎ±á½¶ á½ á¼ÏÏαÏÎ¿Ï , Revelation 1:17 ; Revelation 22:13 , rests upon the Christological basis of their common faith, not upon a dependence of our epistle on the Apocalypse, which would doubtless imply a post-Pauline date (in opposition to Holtzmann, p. 247).
Verse 17
Colossians 1:17 . Îαὶ αá½ÏÏÏ ] which is to be separated from the preceding by a comma only (see on Colossians 1:16 ), places, in contradistinction to the created objects in Colossians 1:16 ( Ïá½° ÏάνÏα ), the subject , the creating self: “ and He Himself, on His part , has an earlier existence than all things, and the collective whole subsists in Him.” Never is αá½ÏÏÏ in the nominative [39] the mere unemphatic “ he ” of the previous subject (de Wette), either in Greek authors or in the N. T., not even in passages such as Buttmann ( Neut. Gr . p. 94 [E. T. 107]) brings forward; see Fritzsche, ad Matth . p. 47; Winer, p. 141 f. [E. T. 187]; Kühner, II. 1, p. 563.
ÏÏὸ ÏάνÏÏν ] like ΠΡΩΤÎΤÎÎÎÏ , referring to time , not to rank (as the Socinians, Nösselt, Heinrichs, Schleiermacher, Baumgarten-Crusius, and others hold); Paul thus repeatedly and emphatically lays stress on the pre-existence of Christ. Instead of á¼ÏÏί , he might have written ἦν (John 1:1 ); but he makes use of the former, because he has in view and sets forth the permanence of Christ’s existence, and does not wish to narrate about Him historically, which is done only in the auxiliary clauses with á½ Ïι , Colossians 1:16 ; Colossians 1:19 . On the present, comp. John 8:58 . His existence is more ancient than that of all things ( Î ÎÎΤΩΠ, not masculine, as the Vulgate and Luther translate).
á¼Î Îá½Î¤á¿· ] as in Colossians 1:16 , referring to the causal dependence of the subsistence of all existing things on Christ .
ÏÏ Î½ÎÏÏηκε ] denotes the subsistence of the whole, the state of lasting interdependence and order , an idea which is not equivalent to that of creation, but presupposes it. Reiske, Ind. Dem . ed. Schaef. p. 481: “Corpus unum, integrum, perfectum, secum consentiens esse et permanere.” Comp. 2 Peter 3:5 ; Plat. Rep . p. 530 A: Î¾Ï Î½ÎµÏÏάναι Ïá¿· Ïοῦ οá½Ïανοῦ Î´Î·Î¼Î¹Î¿Ï Ïγῷ αá½ÏÏν Ïε καὶ Ïá½° á¼Î½ αá½Ïá¿· , Tim . 61 A: γá¿Î½ â¦ Î¾Ï Î½ÎµÏÏÎ·ÎºÏ á¿Î±Î½ , Legg . vii. p. 817 B: ἡ ÏολιÏεία Î¾Ï Î½ÎÏÏηκε μίμηÏÎ¹Ï Ïοῦ καλλίÏÏÎ¿Ï â¦ Î²Î¯Î¿Ï . Herod. vii. 225; Philo, quis rer. div. haer . p. 489: á½ á¼Î½Î±Î¹Î¼Î¿Ï á½Î³ÎºÎ¿Ï , á¼Î¾ á¼Î±Ï Ïοῦ Î´Î¹Î±Î»Ï Ïá½¸Ï á½¢Î½ καὶ νεκÏá½¸Ï , ÏÏ Î½ÎÏÏηκε κ . ζÏÏÏ Ïεá¿Ïαι ÏÏονοίᾳ Îεοῦ κ . Ï . λ . It expresses that there is in Christ not merely the creative cause, but also the cause which brings about organic stability and continuance in unity (preserving and governing) for the whole of existing things. Comp. Hebrews 1:3 . Of attempts at explanation under the moral interpretation, we may note that of Schleiermacher: the consolidating of earthly relations and institutions; and that of Baumgarten-Crusius: “in this new world He is Lord in recognition and in sway ”
[39] Bengel correctly observes on ver. 16: “Ipse hic saepe positum magnam significat majestatem et omnem excludit creaturam.”
REMARK.
The intentional prominence given to the fact of the creation of all things through Christ, and in particular of the creation of the angels in their various classes, justifies the supposition that the false teachers disparaged Christ in this respect, and that they possessed at least elements of the Gnostic- demiurgic doctrine which was afterwards systematically elaborated. There is no evidence, however, of their particular views, and the further forms assumed by the Gnostic elements, as they showed themselves according to the Fathers in Simon Magus (Iren. Haer . i. 20 “Eunoiam ⦠generare angelos et potestates, a quibus et mundum hunc factum dixit;” comp. Epiph. Haer . xxi. 4), Cerinthus , etc., and especially among the Valentinians , while certainly to be recognised as fundamentally akin to the Colossian doctrinal errors (comp. Heinrici, Valentinian. Gnosis , 1871), are not to be identified with them; nor are those elements to be made use of as a proof of the post-apostolic origin of the epistle, as still is done by Hilgenfeld (see his Zeitschr . 1870, p. 246 f.), and more cautiously by Holtzmann. Of Ebionitism only Essene elements are to be found in Colossae, mingled with other Gnostic doctrines, which were not held by the later Ebionites. In particular, the ÏÏὸ ÏάνÏÏν εἶναι , on which Paul lays so much stress, must have been doubted in Colossae, although a portion of the Ebionites expressly and emphatically taught it ( λÎÎ³Î¿Ï Ïιν á¼Î½Ïθεν μὲν á½Î½Ïα ÏÏὸ ÏάνÏÏν δὲ κÏιÏθÎνÏα , Epiph. Haer . XXX. 3). Moreover, the opinion that Paul derived the appellations of the classes of angels in Colossians 1:16 from the language of the heretics themselves (Böhmer, comp. Olshausen) is to be rejected, because in other passages also, where there is no contrast to the Gnostic doctrine of Aeons, he makes use in substance of these names (Romans 8:38 ; 1 Corinthians 15:24 ; comp. Ephesians 1:20 ff; Ephesians 3:10 ; Ephesians 6:11 ff.). They are rather to be regarded as well-known and generally-current appellations, which were derived from the terminology of later Judaism, and which heretics made use of in common with the orthodox. The anti-Gnostic element is contained, not in the technical expressions, but in the doctrinal contents of the passage; and it was strong enough to induce Marcion, who took offence at it, to omit Colossians 1:15-17 (Tertullian, c. Marcion , v. 19). See, besides, Räbiger, Christol. Paul . p. 51 f.; Lechler, apost. Zeit . p. 55 f.; Klöpper, l.c .
Verse 18
Colossians 1:18 . Second part (see on Colossians 1:15 ) of the exhibition of the exaltedness of Christ. To that which Christ is as ÏÏÏÏÏÏÎ¿ÎºÎ¿Ï ÏάÏÎ·Ï ÎºÏίÏεÏÏ (Colossians 1:16-17 ) is now added what He is as ÏÏÏÏÏÏÎ¿ÎºÎ¿Ï á¼Îº Ïῶν νεκÏῶν , namely, the Head of the Church, and thus His ÏÏÏÏεÏειν has its consummation ( á¼Î½ Ïá¾¶Ïιν ). The latter, namely, ἵνα γÎνηÏαι ⦠ÏÏÏÏεÏÏν , embraces also a retrospect to that ÏÏÏÏÏÏÎ¿ÎºÎ¿Ï ÏάÏÎ·Ï ÎºÏίÏεÏÏ , and includes it in á¼Î½ Ïá¾¶Ïιν , without its being necessary, however, to attach Colossians 1:18 to the carrying out of the relation to the world expressed in ÏÏÏÏÏÏοκ . Ï . κÏÎ¯Ï . (Hofmann, comp. Rich. Schmidt). The perspective proceeds from the dignity of the original state of our Lord to that of His state as Saviour , from His cosmical to His soteriological glory, and so at length exhibits Him to view as the á¼Î½ Ïá¾¶Ïι ÏÏÏÏεÏÏν .
That Colossians 1:18 , with its confirmation in Colossians 1:19 f., has an apologetic reference to the Gnostic false teaching, must be assumed from its connection with what goes before. The passage is to be looked upon as antagonistic to the worship of angels (Colossians 2:18 ), which disparaged Christ in His dignity as Head of the Church, but not (in opposition to Bähr and Huther) as antagonistic to a theological dogma, such as is found in the Cabbala, according to which the body of the Messiah (the Adam Kadmon) is the aggregate of the emanations. For the emphasis of the passage and its essential point of doctrine lie in the fact that Christ is the Head of the church, and not in the fact that He is the head of the church; it is not the doctrine of another Ïῶμα , but that of any other ÏÏÏÏεÏÏν , which is excluded.
καὶ αá½ÏÏÏ ] stands again, as κ . αá½ÏÏÏ in Colossians 1:17 , in significant reference to Ïá½° ÏάνÏα : et ipse, in quo omnia consistunt, est caput, etc ., so that the passage continues to divide itself as into the links of a chain.
Ïοῦ ÏÏμαÏÎ¿Ï Ïá¿Ï á¼ÎºÎºÎ»Î·Ï .] to be taken together; the second genitive is that of apposition (Winer, p. 494 [E. T. 666]), which gives to the word governing it concrete definiteness; comp. Müller in the Luther. Zeitschr . 1871, p. 611 ff. On the familiar Pauline mode of considering the church of believers, livingly and actively ruled by Christ as the head (Ephesians 3:10 ; Philippians 3:6 ; Acts 9:31 ), as His body , [40] comp. 1 Corinthians 10:17 ; 1 Corinthians 12:12 ff., 1 Corinthians 10:27 ; Ephesians 1:23 ; Ephesians 4:12 ; Ephesians 5:23 ; Ephesians 5:30 ; Romans 12:5 .
á½ Ï á¼ÏÏιν κ . Ï . λ .] epexegetical relative clause (as in Colossians 1:15 ), the contents of which are related by way of confirmation to the preceding statement (Matthiae, p. 1061 f.; Kühner, ad Xen. Mem . i. 2. 64; Stallbaum, ad Phil . p. 195 f.), like our: he, who, etc ., which might be expressed, but not necessarily , by á½ ÏÏÎ¹Ï (or á½Î£ÎÎ ). Comp. on Ephesians 1:14 . If Christ had not risen, He would not be Head of the church (Acts 2:24-36 ; 1 Corinthians 15:0 ; Romans 1:4 , et al .).
á¼ÏÏή ] beginning; which, however, is not to be explained either as “initium secundae et novae creationis ” (Calvin), progenitor of the regenerate (Bisping), or “ author of the church ” (Baumgarten-Crusius), or even “ ruler of the world ” (Storr, Flatt); but agreeably to the context in such a way, as to make it have with the appositional ÏÏÏÏÏÏÎ¿ÎºÎ¿Ï its definition in á¼Î ΤῶΠÎÎÎΡῶΠ, just as if the words ran: á¼Î¡Î§á¿ ΤῶΠÎÎÎΡῶΠ, ΠΡΩΤÎΤÎÎÎÏ á¼Î Îá½Î¤á¿¶Î , although Paul did not express himself thus, because at once upon his using the predicate á¼ÏÏή in and by itself the exegetical ΠΡΩΤÎΤÎÎÎÏ suggested itself to him. Accordingly Christ is called á¼Î¡Î§á¿ ( ΤῶΠÎÎÎΡῶΠ) , inasmuch as He is among all the dead the first arisen to everlasting life . It is arbitrary to discover in á¼ÏÏή an allusion to the offering of first-fruits sanctifying the whole mass (Chrysostom, Beza, Ewald, and others); especially as the term á¼ÏαÏÏή , which is elsewhere used for the first portion of a sacrifice (Romans 11:16 ), is not here employed, although it has crept in from 1 Corinthians 15:20 ; 1 Corinthians 15:23 , in a few minusculi and Fathers, as in Clement also, Cor . I. 24, Christ is termed á¼ÏαÏÏá½´ Ïá¿Ï á¼Î½Î±ÏÏάÏεÏÏ . To assume a reminiscence of 1 Corinthians 15:0 (Holtzmann) is wholly unwarranted, especially as á¼Î ÎΡΧΠis not used. On á¼Î¡Î§Î , used of persons , denoting the one who begins the series, as the first in order of time, comp. Genesis 49:3 , where á¼ÏÏá½´ ÏÎκνÏν Î¼Î¿Ï is equivalent to ΠΡΩΤÎΤÎÎÎÏ ÎÎÎ¥ , as also Deuteronomy 21:17 . In what respect any one is á¼ÏÏή of those concerned, must be yielded by the context, just as in this case it is yielded by the more precisely defining ΠΡΩΤÎΤÎÎÎÏ á¼Î Τ . ÎÎÎΡῶΠ; hence it has been in substance correctly explained, following the Fathers: á¼ÏÏή , ÏηÏίν , á¼ÏÏι Ïá¿Ï á¼Î½Î±ÏÏάÏεÏÏ , Ïοὸ ÏάνÏÏν á¼Î½Î±ÏÏÎ¬Ï , [41] Theophylact. Only Ïá¿Ï á¼Î½Î±ÏÏάÏεÏÏ is not to be mentally supplied , nor is it to be conjectured (de Wette) that Paul had intended to write á¼ÏÏá½´ Ï . á¼Î½Î±ÏÏάÏεÏÏ , but, on account of the word ÏÏÏÏÏÏÎ¿ÎºÎ¿Ï presenting itself to him from Colossians 1:15 , did not complete what he had begun. It follows, moreover, from the use of the word ÏÏÏÏÏÏÎ¿ÎºÎ¿Ï , that á¼ÏÏή is to be taken in the temporal sense, consequently as equivalent to primus , not in the sense of dignity (Wetstein), and not as principle (Bähr, Steiger, Huther, Dalmer, following earlier expositors).
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÎ¿ÎºÎ¿Ï á¼Îº Ï . Î½ÎµÎºÏ .] á¼Îº Ï . Î½ÎµÎºÏ . is conceived in the same way as in á¼Î½Î±ÏÏá¿Î½Î±Î¹ á¼Îº Ï . Î½ÎµÎºÏ . (Ephesians 5:14 ), so that it is the dead in Hades among whom the Risen One was, but from whom He goes forth ( separates Himself from them, hence also á¼Ïὸ Ï . Î½ÎµÎºÏ ., Matthew 14:2 ; Matthew 27:64 ; Matthew 28:7 ), and returning into the body, with the latter rises from the tomb. Comp. ÏÏá¿¶ÏÎ¿Ï á¼Î¾ á¼Î½Î±ÏÏάÏεÏÏ Î½ÎµÎºÏῶν , Acts 26:23 , also 1 Corinthians 15:22 f. This living exit from the grave is figuratively represented as birth; comp. Revelation 1:5 , where the partitive genitive Ïῶν Î½ÎµÎºÏ . (not á¼Îº . Ï . ν .) yields a form of conceiving the matter not materially different. Calvin takes ÏÏÏÏÏÏÎ¿ÎºÎ¿Ï á¼Îº . Ï . ν . as specifying the ground for á¼ÏÏή : “ principium (absolutely), quia primogenitus est ex mortuis; nam in resurrectione est rerum omnium instauratio.” Against this it may be urged, that á¼ÏÏή has no more precise definition; Paul must have written either á¼ÏÏá½´ Ïá¿Ï καινá¿Ï κÏίÏεÏÏ , or at least á¼§Ï instead of á½ Ï . Calvin was likewise erroneously of opinion (comp. Erasmus, Calovius) that Christ is called Primogenitus ex mortuis , not merely because He was the first to rise, but also “ quia restituit aliis vitam .” This idea is not conveyed either by the word or by the context, however true may be the thing itself; but a belief in the subsequent general resurrection of the dead is the presupposition of the expression ÏÏÏÏÏÏÎ¿ÎºÎ¿Ï ( αἰνίÏÏεÏαι δὲ ὠλÏÎ³Î¿Ï ÎºÎ±á½¶ Ïὴν ÏάνÏÏν ἡμῶν á¼Î½Î¬ÏÏαÏιν , Theodoret). This expression is purposely chosen in significant reference to Colossians 1:15 , as is intimated by Paul himself in the following ἵνα γÎνηÏαι á¼Î½ Ïá¾¶Ïιν κ . Ï . λ . But it is thus all the more certain, that ÏÏÏÏÏÏÎ¿ÎºÎ¿Ï á¼Îº Ï . Î½ÎµÎºÏ . is to be taken independently, and not adjectivally together with á¼ÏÏή (Heinrichs, Schleiermacher, Ewald), which would only amount to a tautological verboseness ( first-born beginning ); and, on the other hand, that á¼Îº Ïῶν νεκÏῶν may not be separated from ÏÏÏÏÏÏÎ¿ÎºÎ¿Ï in such a way as to emphasize the place, issuing forth from which Christ is what He is, namely, á¼ÏÏή , ÏÏÏÏÏÏÎ¿ÎºÎ¿Ï ; the former , “as the personal beginning of what commences with Him;” the latter , “in the same relation to those who belong to the world therewith coming into life as He held to the creation” (Hofmann). In this way the specific more precise definition, which is by means of á¼Îº Ï . νεκÏῶν in significant reference to Colossians 1:15 attached to the predicates of Christ, á¼ÏÏή and ÏÏÏÏÏÏÎ¿ÎºÎ¿Ï , would be groundlessly withdrawn from them, and these predicates would be left in an indefiniteness, in which they would simply be open vessels for receiving a gratuitously imported supplement.
ἵνα γÎνηÏαι κ . Ï . λ .] not to be restricted to the affirmation á¼Îº Ïῶν νεκÏῶν (Hofmann), [42] but to be referred to the whole sentence that Christ is á¼ÏÏή , ÏÏÏÏÏÏÎ¿ÎºÎ¿Ï á¼Îº Ï . Î½ÎµÎºÏ ., expressing the divine teleology of this position of Christ as the Risen One: in order that He may become , etc.; not: in order “that He may be held as ” (Baumgarten-Crusius), nor yet “that He may be ” (Vulgate, and so most expositors), as γίγνεÏθαι and εἶναι are never synonymous. The á¼Î½ Ïá¾¶Ïιν αá½Ïá½¸Ï ÏÏÏÏεÏει is looked upon by Paul as something which is still in course of development (comp. Steiger and Huther), and is only to be completed in the future, namely, when the Risen One shall have conquered all the power of the enemy (1 Corinthians 15:25 f.) and have erected the kingdom of the Messiah but of this result His resurrection itself was the necessary historical basis , and hence the future universal ÏÏÏÏεÏειν is the divinely intended aim of His being risen.
á¼Î½ Ïá¾¶Ïιν ] in all points , without excepting any relation, not, therefore, merely in the relation of creation (Colossians 1:15-17 ). Comp. Philippians 4:12 ; 1 Timothy 3:11 ; 1Ti 4:15 ; 2 Timothy 2:7 ; 2 Timothy 4:5 ; Titus 2:9 ; Hebrews 13:4 ; Hebrews 13:18 . á¼Î½ ÏανÏί is more commonly used by Paul ( 1Co 1:5 ; 2 Corinthians 4:8 , et al .). According to Beza, Ïá¾¶Ïιν is masculine : “inter omnes , videlicet fratres , ut Romans 8:29 .” So also Kypke and Heinrichs. But this would be here, after the universal bearing of the whole connection, much too narrow an idea, which, besides, is self-evident as to the Head of the church. According to Pelagius, it denotes: “tam in visibilibus quam in invisibilibus creaturis .” At variance with the text; this idea was conveyed by Colossians 1:16-17 , but in Colossians 1:18 another relation is introduced which does not refer to created things as such.
αá½ÏÏÏ ] emphatic, as in Colossians 1:17-18 .
ÏÏÏÏεÏÏν ] having the first rank , not used elsewhere in the N. T., but see Esther 5:11 ; 2Ma 6:18 ; 2Ma 13:15 ; Aquila, Zechariah 4:7 ; Plat. Legg . iii. p. 692 D, Dem . 1416. 25: ÏÏÏÏεÏειν á¼Î½ á¼ ÏαÏι κÏάÏιÏÏον . Xen. Cyr . viii. 2. 28; Mem . ii. 6. 26. This precedence in rank is to be the final result of the condition which set in with the ÏÏÏÏÏÏοκον εἶναι á¼Îº Ï . Î½ÎµÎºÏ .; but it is not contained in this ÏÏÏÏÏÏοκον εἶναι itself, an idea against which the very ἵνα γÎνηÏαι is logically decisive (in opposition to de Wette’s double signification of ÏÏÏÏÏÏοκ .).
[40] In which is expressed the idea of the invisible church. Comp. Julius Müller, Dogmat. Abh. p. 316 ff. And this conception and representation belong quite to the apostle’s general sphere of ideas, not specially to that of the Epistle to the Ephesians, into which the interpolator is supposed by Holtzmann again to enter here, after he has manifested a comparative independence in vv. 15 18.
[41] The Fathers have already correctly judged that even in regard to the isolated cases of rising from the dead, which have taken place through Christ and before Him, Christ remains the first-risen. Theophylact: εἰ Î³á½°Ï ÎºÎ±á½¶ á¼Î»Î»Î¿Î¹ ÏÏὸ ÏοÏÏÎ¿Ï á¼Î½ÎÏÏηÏαν , á¼Î»Î»á½° Ïάλιν á¼ÏÎθανον · αá½Ïá½¸Ï Î´á½² Ïὴν Ïελείαν á¼Î½Î¬ÏÏαÏιν á¼Î½ÎÏÏη . Comp. on 1 Corinthians 15:20 .
[42] So that it would express the design, which Christ Himself had in His coming forth from the dead.
Verse 19
Colossians 1:19 . [43] á½Î¤Î ] Confirmatory of the á¼½ÎÎ ÎÎÎÎΤÎÎ Î . Τ . Î . , just said: “about which divinely intended ÎÎÎÎÎΣÎÎÎ á¼Î ΠᾶΣÎÎ Îá½Î¤á¿¸Î ΠΡΩΤÎÎÎÎΤΠthere can be no doubt, for it has pleased , that in Him , etc.” How could He, who was thus destined to be possessor of the divine fulness and reconciler of the world, have been destined otherwise than to become á¼Î½ Ïá¾¶Ïιν ÏÏÏÏεÏÏν ! This confirmation, therefore, does not refer to the statement that Christ is the Head of the church (Steiger, Huther, comp. Calovius), which has already its confirmation by means of á½Ï á¼Î£Î¤ÎÎ á¼Î¡Î§á¿ Î . Τ . Î . , nor at all to á¼Î ΤῶΠÎÎÎΡῶΠ(Hofmann, following up his incorrect explanation of these words), as if the reason were specified why Christ should have gone to His high dignity as beginner of a new world by the path of deepest abasement a thought which Paul would have known how to express quite differently (comp. Philippians 2:7 f.) than by the bare á¼Îº Ïῶν Î½ÎµÎºÏ ., which is currently used everywhere of resurrection from death, and without conveying any special significance of humiliation. Nor yet does Paul move in a circle , by putting forward in Colossians 1:19 as ground of proof that from which in Colossians 1:15 ( á½ Ï á¼ÏÏιν εἰκὼν κ . Ï . λ .) he had started (de Wette); for Colossians 1:19 is a historical statement (observe the aorists ), whereas Colossians 1:15 expressed what Christ is , His habitual being .
á¼Î½ αá½Ïá¿· ] although belonging to ÎÎΤÎÎÎ . , is prefixed in emphatic transposition (Kühner, II. 2, p. 1101).
Îá½ÎÎÎÎΣΠ] He was pleased, placuit ei , that, etc. As to this use of εá½Î´Î¿ÎºÎµá¿Î½ in the later Greek (1 Corinthians 1:21 ; Galatians 1:15 , et al .), for which, in the classical language, δοκεá¿Î½ merely was employed, see Fritzsche, ad Rom . II. p. 370. On the accusative with infinitive , comp. 2Ma 14:35 ; Polyb. i. 8. 4. The subject , whose pleasure it is, is not expressed; but that it is God, is obvious from the context, which in ἵνα γÎνηÏαι κ . Ï . λ . has just stated the divine purpose. Among Greek authors also á½ ÎεÏÏ is not unfrequently omitted, where it is self-evident as the subject. See Kühner, II. 1, p. 30 c. According to Ewald and Ellicott (also Weiss, Bibl. Theol . p. 428, Exodus 2:0 , and Rich. Schmidt, Paul. Christol . p. 208), Ïᾶν Ïὸ ÏλήÏÏμα is the subject; and the whole fulness is a new expression for the Godhead, inasmuch as, going as it were out of itself, it fills something separate and thus becomes visible (= ×××× ×××× , ÎÎÎÎ , ÎÎÎÎÏ , Î ÎÎῦÎÎ ). Without support from N. T. usage; Î á¾¶Î , too, would be unsuitable for the subject of εá½Î´ÏκηÏε ; and Îµá¼°Ï Î±á½ÏÏν in Colossians 1:29 clearly shows that ÎεÏÏ is conceived as subject, to which εἰÏηνοÏοιήÏÎ±Ï then refers. According to Hofmann (comp. also his Schriftbew. II. 1, p. 357 f.), Christ is meant to be the subject of εá½Î´Ïκ . Colossians 1:20 itself, and Ephesians 1:9 , ought to have precluded this error. Throughout the whole of the N. T. it is never Christ, but always the Father , who in respect to the work of redemption to be executed gives the decree, while Christ executes it as obedient to the Father; hence also Paul, “beneficium Christi commemorans, nunquam dimittit memoriam Patris,” Bengel. Comp. Reiche, Comment. crit . p. 263.
Ïᾶν Ïὸ ÏλήÏÏμα καÏοικ .] that in Him the whole fulness was to take up its abode . The more precise definition of the absolute ΠᾶΠΤῸ Î ÎÎΡΩÎÎ is placed beyond doubt by the subject to be mentally supplied with Îá½ÎÎÎÎΣΠ, [44] namely, Ïὸ ÏλήÏÏμα Ïοῦ Îεοῦ (Ephesians 3:19 ; comp. ΤῸ Î ÎÎΡ . Τá¿Ï ÎÎÎΤÎΤÎÏ , Colossians 2:9 ). ΤῸ Î ÎÎΡΩÎÎ , the signification of which is not to be defined actively: id quod rem implet (in opposition to Storr, Opusc . I. p. 144 ff., Bähr, Steiger), but passively: id quo res impletur (see generally on Ephesians 1:10 ; Ephesians 3:19 , Fritzsche, ad Rom . II. p. 469), has here, as in Ephesians 3:9 , the derivative general notion of copia , ÏλοῦÏÎ¿Ï , like the German Fülle . What is meant, namely, is the whole charismatic riches of God , His whole gracious fulness of εá½Î»Î¿Î³Î¯Î± ÏÎ½ÎµÏ Î¼Î±Ïική (Ephesians 1:3 ), of which Christ became permanent ( ÎÎΤÎÎÎá¿Î£ÎÎ ) possessor and bearer, who was thereby capable of fulfilling the divine work of reconciliation (see the following ÎÎá¿ ÎÎʼ Îá½Î¤Îῦ á¼Î ÎÎÎΤÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ Î . Τ . Î . ). The case is otherwise in Colossians 2:9 , where the divine essence ( Ïá¿Ï θεÏÏηÏÎ¿Ï ) is indicated as the contents of the Î ÎÎΡΩÎÎ , and the ÎÎΤÎÎÎÎá¿Î of the same in Christ is affirmed as present and with reference to His state of exaltation . It would be an utterly arbitrary course mentally to supply here the Ïá¿Ï θεÏÏηÏÎ¿Ï , Colossians 2:9 , and to regard both passages as an echo of Ephesians 1:23 , where the notion of Î ÎÎΡΩÎÎ is a very different one (in opposition to Holtzmann). Inasmuch as the charismatic Î ÎÎΡΩÎÎ of God , meant in our passage, dwelt in Christ , and consequently Christ was the possessor and disposer of it, this divine fulness is not in substance different from the ÏλήÏÏμα ΧÏιÏÏοῦ , out of which grace passed over to men (John 1:16 ; Ephesians 4:13 ). The thought and expression in 1 Corinthians 15:28 are different from our passage, and different also from Ephesians 1:23 . Beza aptly observes: “cumulatissima omnium divinarum rerum copia, quam scholastici gratiam habitualem ⦠appellant, ex qua in Christo, tanquam inexhausto fonte, omnes gratiae in nos pro cujusque membri modulo deriventur;” comp. also Bleek. Observe, at the same time, the stress lying on the Ïᾶν , in contrast to a merely partial imparting out of this fulness, which would have been inadequate to the object of reconciling the universe. The ontological interpretation of the “fulness of the nature of God” (Huther, Dalmer, Weiss; Oecumenius, and Theodoret: the nature of the ÎÎµá½¸Ï Î»ÏÎ³Î¿Ï ; Calovius and others: of the communicatio hypostatica , that is, of the absolute immanence of God in Him, comp. Ernesti, Urspr. d. Sünde , I. p. 222; Rich. Schmidt, Paul. Christol . p. 201) does not correspond to the idea of εá½Î´ÏκηÏεν , for doubtless the sending of the Son, and that with the whole treasure of divine grace , into the world (John 3:17 ) for behoof of its reconciliation and blessedness, was the act of the divine pleasure and resolve; but not so the divine nature in Christ, which was, on the contrary, necessary in Him, [45] although by His incarnation He emptied Himself of the divine mode of appearance ( δÏξα or μοÏÏή , Philippians 2:6 ff.). The divine nature is presupposed in what is here said of Christ. Comp. Gess, v. d. Pers. Christi , p. 85. Some (see especially Steiger, Bähr, and Reuss) have regarded Ïὸ ÏλήÏÏμα as derived from the Gnostic terminology of the false teachers , who might perhaps, like Valentinus, have given this name to the aggregate of the Aeons (see Baur, Gnosis , p. 157), [46] and in opposition to whom Paul maintains that in Jesus there dwells the totality of all divine powers of life, and not merely a single emanated spirit; but this view is all the more unwarranted, because Paul himself does not intimate any such polemical destination of the word; on the contrary, in Ephesians 3:19 also he uses Ïᾶν Ïὸ ÏλήÏÏμα Ï . Îεοῦ evidently without any reference of the kind. And if he had wished to place the whole fulness of the efflux of divine power in contrast to an asserted single emanation, he must have prefixed, not á¼Î½ αá½Ïá¿· ( in Him and in none other ), but Ïᾶν ( the whole ÏλήÏÏμα , not merely a single constituent element of it) with the main emphasis, and have logically said: á½ Ïι Ïᾶν Ïὸ ÏλήÏÏμα εá½Î´ÏκηÏεν á¼Î½ αá½Ïá¿· καÏοικá¿Ïαι . Hofmann (comp. his Schriftbew . p. 29, 359), who in general has quite misunderstood Colossians 1:19 f. (comp. above on εá½Î´ÏκηÏεν ), takes Ïᾶν Ïὸ ÏλήÏÏμα as “the one-like totality of that which is; ” and holds that the will of Christ (to which εá½Î´Î¿Îº . applies) can only have been, “ that that may come to dwell in Him, which otherwise would not be in Him, consequently not what is in God, but what is out of God. ” This idea of the immanent indwelling of the universe in Christ, repeated by Schenkel in the sense of Christ being the archetype , would be entirely alien to the N. T. view of the relation of Christ to the world, and is not indicated either at Ephesians 1:10 or here in the context by Ïá½° ÏάνÏα á¼Î½ αá½Ïá¿· ÏÏ Î½ÎÏÏηκεν . Christ is not the place for the world , so that ultimately all comes to dwell in Him, as all has been created in Him and has in Him its subsistence; but the world originated and maintained through Him, which He was to redeem, is the place for Him . [47] If Paul had really entertained the obscure paradoxical conception attributed to him by Hofmann, he would have known how to express it simply by Ïὸ Ïᾶν (or Ïá½° ÏάνÏα ) καÏοικá¿Ïαι , or by Ïὸ ÏλήÏÏμα Ïοῦ ÏανÏá½¸Ï (or Ïῶν ÏάνÏÏν ) καÏοικá¿Ï . Lastly, at utter variance with both the word and the context, some have based on Ephesians 1:22 f. the interpretation of ÏλήÏÏμα as the church . So already Theodoret: ÏÎ»Î®Ï . Ïὴν á¼ÎºÎºÎ»Î·Ïίαν á¼Î½ Ïá¿ ÏÏá½¸Ï á¼ÏεÏÎ¯Î¿Ï Ï á¼ÎºÎ¬Î»ÎµÏεν , á½¡Ï Ïῶν θείÏν ÏαÏιÏμάÏÏν ÏεÏληÏÏμÎνην . ΤαÏÏην á¼Ïη εá½Î´Î¿Îºá¿Ïαι Ïὸν Îεὸν á¼Î½ Ïá¿· ΧÏιÏÏá¿· καÏοικá¿Ïαι , ÏÎ¿Ï ÏÎÏÏιν αá½Ïá¿· ÏÏ Î½á¿Ïθαι , and recently in substance Heinrichs, Baumgarten-Crusius, and others; comp. also Schleiermacher, who, in accordance with Romans 11:12 ; Romans 11:25 , understands “ the fulness of the Gentiles and the collective whole of Israel ,” the dwelling of whom in Christ is the “definitive abiding state,” which the total reconciliation (see the sequel) must necessarily have preceded, as this reconciliation is conditioned by the fact that both parties must have become peaceful.
καÏοικá¿Ïαι ] The ÏλήÏÏμα is personified, so that the abiding presence , which it was to have according to the divine εá½Î´Î¿ÎºÎ¯Î± in Christ, appears conceived under the form of taking up its abode; in which, however, the idea of the Shechinah would only have to be presupposed, in the event of the ÏλήÏÏμα being represented as appearance ( ×××× ×××× ). See on Romans 9:5 . Comp. John 1:14 . Analogous is the conception of the dwelling of Christ (see on Ephesians 3:17 ) or of the Spirit (see Theile on James 4:5 ) in believers. Comp. also 2 Peter 3:13 . In point of time , the indwelling of the divine fulness of grace according to God’s pleasure in Christ refers to the earthly life of the Incarnate One , who was destined by God to fulfil the divine work of the á¼ÏοκαÏαλλάξαι Ïá½° ÏάνÏα , and was to be empowered thereto by the dwelling in Him of that whole divine ÏλήÏÏμα . Without having completed the performance of this work, He could not become á¼Î½ Ïá¾¶Ïιν ÏÏÏÏεÏÏν ; but of this there could be no doubt, for God has caused it to be completed through Him ( á½ Ïι , Colossians 1:19 ). Ernesti, Urspr. d. Sünde, I. p. 215 f. (comp. also Weiss, Bibl. Theol. p. 428, Exodus 2:0 ), refers εá½Î´ÏκηÏε κ . Ï . λ . to the heavenly state of Christ, in which God, by way of reward for the completion of His work, has made Him the organ of His glory (Philippians 2:9 ); he also is of opinion that á¼Î ÎÎÎΤÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ in Colossians 1:20 does not apply to the reconciliation through His blood, but to the reunion of all created things through the exalted Lord, as a similar view is indicated in Philippians 2:10 . But this idea of the á¼Î ÎÎÎΤÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ is just the point on which this view breaks down. For Colossians 1:21 clearly shows that á¼Î ÎÎÎΤÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ is to be taken in the usual sense of the work of reconciliation completed through the á¼¹ÎÎΣΤÎΡÎÎÎ of Christ. Moreover, that which Christ received through His exaltation was not the divine Î ÎÎΡΩÎÎ , but the divine ÎÎÎÎ .
[43] Holtzmann, after having rejected vv. 14 18 entirely as an interpolation, allows to stand as original in vv. 19, 20 only the words: á½ Ïι á¼Î½ αá½Ïá¿· εá½Î´ÏκηÏεν καÏαλλάξαι , to which καÏαλλ . there is then attached in ver. 21, as object, καὶ á½Î¼á¾¶Ï , also you, with reference to á¼¡Î¼á¾¶Ï in ver. 13. How daring and violent, and yet how paltry (rescuing merely the καὶ á½Î¼á¾¶Ï ), would the procedure of the author thus have been!
[44] Hence not: “la totalité de l’être qui doit être realisée dans le monde,” Sabatier, l’apôtre Paul, p. 209.
[45] As in the Son of God in the metaphysical sense; hence the original being of God in Him cannot be conceived merely as ideal, which was to develope itself into reality, and the realization of which, when it at length became perfect, made Him the absolute abode of the fulness of Godhead. So Beyschlag, Christol. p. 232 f., according to whom Christ would be conceived as “man drawing down upon himself” this indwelling of God. He is conceived as the incarnate Son (comp. ver. 13 ff.), who, in accordance with the Father’s decree, has appeared as bearer ot the whole fulness of salvation. For He was its dwelling not merely in principle, but in fact and reality, when He appeared, and He employed it for the work, which the Father desired to accomplish by Him (ver. 20). Comp. Galatians 4:4 ; Romans 8:3 . The indwelling of the Ïᾶν Ïὸ ÏλήÏÏμα He had not, indeed, to achieve by his own effort; but He had, in obedience towards the Father, to preserve (comp. Hebrews 4:15 ), apply, communicate it; and so this indwelling is not merely in the risen One, but in His very work on the cross the presupposition of the universal reconciliation, ver. 20.
[46] Baur himself ( Paulus , II. p. 12 ff.) likewise explains ÏλήÏÏμα from the technical language of the Gnostics, especially of the Valentinian doctrine of Aeons, but finds the Gnosticism to belong to the (post-apostolic) writer of the epistle. According to Baur (see his Neutest. Theol. p. 258), Christ is the ÏλήÏÏμα of God as He “in whom that which God is in Himself, according to the abstract idea of His nature, is filled with its definite concrete contents.” Comp. also Hilgenfeld in his Zeitschr. 1870, p. 247, according to whom our passage is intended to affirm that the Pleroma of divine nature is to be sought not in the prolix series of the Aeons of the Gnostics, but in Christ alone. Holtzmann, with more caution, adheres to the view that the idea of the ÏλήÏÏμα forms a first step towards the extended use which the Gnostics make of the word; whereas Hilgen-feld ( Zeitschr. 1873, p. 195) finds the idea here already so firmly established, “that the ÏλήÏÏμα emerges as in a certain measure holding an independent position between God and Christ.”
[47] Comp. Rich. Schmidt, l.c. p. 208.
Verse 20
Colossians 1:20 . [48] “Haec inhabitatio est fundamentum reconciliationis,” Bengel. Hence Paul continues: καὶ διʼ αá½Ïοῦ á¼ÏοκαÏαλλάξαι Ïá½° ÏάνÏα , and through Him to reconcile the whole . As to the double compound á¼ÏοκαÏαλλ ., prorsus reconciliare , [49] see on Ephesians 2:16 . The considerations which regulate the correct understanding of the passage are: (1) that Ïá½° ÏάνÏα may not in any way be restricted (this has been appropriately urged by Usteri, and especially by Huther); that it consequently cannot be referred either merely to intelligent beings generally (the usual view), or to men (Cornelius a Lapide, Heinrichs, Baumgarten-Crusius, and others), especially the Gentiles (Olshausen), or to the “universam ecclesiam ” (Beza), but is, according to the context (see Colossians 1:16 ff.), simply to be taken as quite general: the whole of that which exists (has been created); (2) that the reconciling subject is here not Christ (Hofmann, in accordance with his incorrect reference of εá½Î´ÏκηÏε in Colossians 1:19 ), but God , who through Christ ( διʼ αá½Ïοῦ ) reconciled all things; (3) that consequently á¼ÏοκαÏαλλάξαι cannot be meant of the transforming of the misrelation between the world and Christ into a good relation (Hofmann), and just as little of the reconciliation of all things with one another , of the removal of mutual hostility among the constituent elements composing Ïá½° ÏάνÏα , but only of the universal reconciliation with the God who is hostile to sin, [50] as is clearly evident from the application to the readers in Colossians 1:21 . The only correct sense therefore is, that the entire universe has been reconciled with God through Christ . But how far? In answering this question, which cannot be disposed of by speculation beyond the range of Scripture as to the having entered into the finite and having returned again to the infinite (Usteri), nor by the idea imported into á¼ÏοκαÏαλλ . of gathering up into the unity of absolute final aim (Baur, neut. Theol . p. 257), the following considerations are of service: ( a ) The original harmony, which in the state of innocence subsisted between God and the whole creation, was annulled by sin, which first obtained mastery over a portion of the angels, and in consequence of this (2 Corinthians 11:3 ), by means of the transgression of Adam, over all mankind (Romans 5:12 ). Comp. on Ephesians 1:10 . ( b ) Not only had sinful mankind now become alienated from God by sin and brought upon themselves His hostility (comp. Colossians 1:21 ), but also the whole of the non-rational creation (Romans 8:19 ff.) was affected by this relation, and given up by God to μαÏαιÏÏÎ·Ï and Î´Î¿Ï Î»ÎµÎ¯Î± Ïá¿Ï ÏθοÏá¾¶Ï (see on Rom. l.c .). ( c ) Indeed, even the world of heavenly spirits had lost its harmony with God as it originally existed, since a portion of the angels those that had fallen formed the kingdom of the devil, in antagonism to God, and became forfeited to the wrath of God for the everlasting punishment which is prepared for the devil and his angels. ( d ) But in Christ, by means of His ἱλαÏÏήÏιον , through which God made peace ( εἰÏηνοÏοιήÏÎ±Ï Îº . Ï . λ .), the reconciliation of the whole has taken place, in virtue of the blotting out, thereby effected, of the curse of sin. Thus not merely has the fact effecting the reconciliation as its causa meritoria taken place, but the realization of the universal reconciliation itself is also entered upon , although it is not yet completed , but down to the time of the Parousia is only in course of development , inasmuch, namely, as in the present αἰÏν the believing portion of mankind is indeed in possession of the reconciliation, but the unreconciled unbelievers (the tares among the wheat) are not yet separated; inasmuch, further, as the non-intelligent creation still remains in its state of corruption occasioned by sin (Romans 8:0 ); and lastly, inasmuch as until the Parousia even the angelic world sees the kingdom of the devil which has issued from it still although the demoniac powers have been already vanquished by the atoning death, and have become the object of divine triumph (Colossians 2:15 ) not annulled, and still in dangerous operation (Ephesians 6:12 ) against the Christian church. But through the Parousia the reconciliation of the whole which has been effected in Christ will reach its consummation, when the unbelieving portion of mankind will be separated and consigned to Gehenna, the whole creation in virtue of the Palingenesia (Matthew 19:28 ) will be transformed into its original perfection, and the new heaven and the new earth will be constituted as the dwelling of δικαιοÏÏνη (2 Peter 3:13 ) and of the δÏξα of the children of God (Romans 8:21 ); while the demoniac portion of the angelic world will be removed from the sphere of the new world, and cast into hell. Accordingly, in the whole creation there will no longer be anything alienated from God and object of His hostility, but Ïá½° ÏάνÏα will be in harmony and reconciled with Him; and God Himself, to whom Christ gives back the regency which He has hitherto exercised, will become the only Ruler and All in All (1 Corinthians 15:24 ; 1 Corinthians 15:28 ). This collective reconciliation, although its consummation will not occur until the Parousia, is yet justly designated by the aorist infinitive á¼ÏοκαÏαλλάξαι , because to the telic conception of God in the εá½Î´ÏκηÏε it was present as one moment in conception.
The angels also are necessarily included in Ïá½° ÏάνÏα (comp. subsequently, Ïá½° á¼Î½ Ïοá¿Ï οá½Ïανοá¿Ï ); and in this case seeing that a reconciliation of the angels who had not fallen, who are holy and minister to Christ (Hahn, Theol. d. N. T. I. p. 269 ff.), considered in themselves as individuals, cannot be spoken of, and is nowhere spoken of in the N. T. [51] it is to be observed that the angels are to be conceived according to category , in so far, namely, as the hostile relation of God towards the fallen angels affected the angelic world viewed as a whole. The original normal relation between God and this higher order of spirits is no longer existing, so long as the kingdom of demons in antagonism to God still subsists which has had its powers broken no doubt already by the death of Christ (Colossians 2:14 f; Hebrews 2:14 ), but will undergo at length utter separation a result which is to be expected in the new transformation of the world at the Parousia. The idea of reconciliation is therefore, in conformity with the manner of popular discourse, and according to the variety of the several objects included in Ïá½° ÏάνÏα , meant partly in an immediate sense (in reference to mankind), partly in a mediate sense (in reference to the ÎΤÎΣÎÏ affected by man’s sin, Romans 8:0 , and to the angelic world affected by its partial fall); [52] the idea of á¼ÏοκαÏαλλάξαι , in presence of the all-embracing Ïá½° ÏάνÏα , is as it were of an elastic nature. [53] At the same time, however, á¼ÏοκαÏαλλ . is not to be made equivalent (Melanchthon, Grotius, Cornelius a Lapide, Flatt, Bähr, Bleek, and others) to á¼ÏοκεÏαλαιÏÏαÏθαι (Ephesians 1:10 ), which is rather the sequel of the former; nor is it to be conceived as merely completing the harmony of the good angels (who are not to be thought absolutely pure, Job 4:18 ; Job 15:15 ; Mark 10:18 ; 1 Corinthians 6:3 ) with God (de Wette), and not in the strict sense therefore restoring it an interpretation which violates the meaning of the word. Calvin, nevertheless, has already so conceived the matter, introducing, moreover, the element foreign to the literal sense of confirmation in righteousness: “quum creaturae sint, extra lapsus periculum non essent, nisi Christi gratia fuissent confirmati .” According to Ritschl, in the Jahrb. f. Deutsche Theol . 1863, p. 522 f., Paul intends to refer to the angels that had been active in the law-giving on Sinai (Deuteronomy 33:2 ; Ps. 67:18, LXX.), to whom he attributes “a deviation from God’s plan of salvation.” But this latter idea cannot be made good either by Colossians 2:15 , or by Galatians 3:19 , or by Ephesians 3:10 , as, indeed, there is nothing in the context to indicate any such reference to the angels of the law in particular. The exegetical device traditionally resorted to, that what was meant with respect to the angels was their reconciliation, not with God , but with men , to whom on account of sin they had been previously inimical (so Chrysostom, Pelagius, Theodoret, Oecumenius, Theophylact, Zanchius, Cameron, Calovius, Estius, Bengel, Michaelis, Böhmer, and others), is an entirely erroneous makeshift, incompatible with the language of the passage.
Îµá¼°Ï Î±á½ÏÏν ] is indeed to be written with the spiritus lenis , as narrating the matter from the standpoint of the author , and because a reflexive emphasis would be without a motive; but it is to be referred, not to Christ , who, as mediate agent of the reconciliation, is at the same time its aim (Bähr, Huther, Olshausen, de Wette, Reiche, Hofmann, Holtzmann, and others; comp. Estius, also Grotius: “ut ipsi pareant”), but to God , constituting an instance of the abbreviated form of expression very usual among Greek writers (Kühner, II. 1, p. 471) and in the N. T. (Winer, p. 577 [E. T. 776]), the constructio praegnans : to reconcile to Godward , so that they are now no longer separated from God (comp. á¼ÏηλλοÏÏ ., Colossians 1:21 ), but are to be united with Him in peace . Thus Îµá¼°Ï Î±á½Ï ., although identical in reality, is not in the mode of conception equivalent to the mere dative (Ephesians 2:16 ; Rom 5:10 ; 1 Corinthians 7:11 ; 2 Corinthians 5:18-20 ), as Beza, Calvin, and many others take it. The reference to Christ must be rejected, because the definition of the aim would have been a special element to be added to διʼ αá½Ïοῦ , which, as in Colossians 1:16 , would have been expressed by καὶ Îµá¼°Ï Î±á½ÏÏν , and also because the explanation which follows ( εἰÏηνοÏοιήÏÎ±Ï Îº . Ï . λ .) concerns and presupposes simply the mediate agency of Christ ( διʼ αá½Ïοῦ ).
εἰÏηνοÏοιήÏÎ±Ï , down to ÏÏÎ±Ï Ïοῦ αá½Ïοῦ , is a modal definition of διʼ αá½Ïοῦ á¼ÏοκαÏαλλάξαι (not a parenthesis): so that He concluded peace , etc., inasmuch, namely, as the blood of Christ, as the expiatory offering, is meant to satisfy the holiness of God, and now His grace is to have free course, Romans 5:1 ; Ephesians 6:15 . The aorist participle is, as Colossians 1:21 shows, to be understood as contemporary with á¼ÏοκαÏαλλ . (see on Ephesians 1:9 , and Kühner, II. 1, p. 161 f.; Müller in the Luther. Zeitschr . 1872, p. 631 ff.), and not antecedent to it (Bähr), as has been incorrectly held by Ernesti in consistency with his explanation of Colossians 1:19 (see on Colossians 1:19 ), who, moreover, without any warrant from the context, in accordance with Ephesians 2:14-16 , thinks of the conclusion of peace between Jews and Gentiles . The nominative refers to the subject; and this is, as in the whole sentence since the εá½Î´ÏκηÏεν , not Christ (Chrysostom, Theodoret, Oecumenius, Luther, Storr, Heinrichs, Flatt, Steiger, Hofmann, and many others), but God . The verb εἰÏηνοÏοιεá¿Î½ , occurring only here in the N. T., which has elsewhere Ïοιεá¿Î½ εἰÏήνην (Ephesians 2:15 ; James 3:18 ), and also foreign to the ancient Greek, which has εἰÏηνοÏÎ¿Î¯Î¿Ï , is nevertheless found in Hermes, ap. Stob. Ecl. ph . i. 52, and in the LXX. Proverbs 10:10 .
διὰ Ïοῦ αἵμ . Ï . ÏÏÎ±Ï Ïοῦ αá½Ïοῦ ] that is, by means of the blood to be shed on His cross , which, namely, as the sacrificial blood reconciling with God (comp. 2 Corinthians 5:21 ), became the causa medians which procured the conclusion of peace between God and the world. Romans 3:25 ; Romans 5:9 f.; Ephesians 1:7 . The reason, which historically induced Paul to designate the blood of Christ with such specific definiteness as the blood of His cross , is to be sought in the spiritualism of the false teachers, who ascribed to the angels a mediating efficacy with God. Hence comes also the designation so intentionally material of the reconciling sacrificial death, Colossians 1:22 , which Hofmann seeks to avoid as such, namely, as respects its definite character of a satisfaction. [54]
διʼ αá½Ïοῦ ] not with the spiritus asper , equivalent to διʼ á¼Î±Ï Ïοῦ , as those take it who refer εἰÏηνοÏοιήÏÎ±Ï to Christ as subject ( á¼Î±Ï Ïὸν á¼ÎºÎ´Î¿ÏÏ , Theophylact), since this reference is erroneous. But neither can διʼ αá½Ïοῦ be in apposition to διὰ Ïοῦ αἵμαÏÎ¿Ï Ï . ÏÏ . αá½Ïοῦ (Castalio, “per ejus sanguinem, h. e. per eum ”), for the latter , and not the former, would be the explanatory statement. It is a resumption of the above given διʼ αá½Ïοῦ , after the intervening definition εἰÏηνοÏοιήÏÎ±Ï Îº . Ï . λ ., in order to complete the discourse thereby interrupted, and that by once more emphatically bringing forward the διʼ αá½Ïοῦ which stood at the commencement; “ through Him ,” I say, to reconcile, whether they be things on earth or whether they be things in heaven. Comp. on Ephesians 1:11 ; Romans 8:23 .
εἴÏε Ïá½° á¼Ïá½¶ Ï . γ ., εἴÏε Ïá½° á¼Î½ Ï . οá½Ï .] divides, without “affected tautology” (Holtzmann), but with a certain solemnity befitting the close of this part of the epistle, the Ïá½° ÏάνÏα into its two component parts. As to the quite universal description, see above on Ïá½° ÏάνÏα ; comp. on Colossians 1:16 . We have, besides, to notice: (1) that Paul here (it is otherwise in Colossians 1:16 , where the creation was in question, comp. Genesis 1:1 ) names the earthly things first , because the atonement took place on earth, and primarily affected things earthly; (2) that the disjunctive expression εἴÏε ⦠εἴÏε renders impossible the view of a reconciliation of the two sections one with another (Erasmus, Wetstein, Dalmer, and others). To the category of exegetical aberrations belongs the interpretation of Schleiermacher, who understands earthly and heavenly things , and includes among the latter all the relations of divine worship and the mental tendencies of Jews and Gentiles relative thereto: “Jews and Gentiles were at variance as to both, as to the heavenly and earthly things, and were now to be brought together in relation to God, after He had founded peace through the cross of His Son.” The view of Baumgarten-Crusius is also an utter misexplanation: that the reconciliation of men (Jews and Gentiles) among themselves, and with the spirit-world, is the thing meant; and that the reconciliation with the latter consists in the consciousness given back to men of being worthy of connection with the higher spirits.
Lastly, against the reference to universal restoration , to which, according to Olshausen, at least the tendency of Christ’s atonement is assumed to have pointed, see on Ephesians 1:10 , remark 2. Comp. also Schmid in the Jahrb. f. D. Theol . 1870, p. 133.
[48] According to Holtzmann, p. 92, the author is assumed to have worked primarily with the elements of the fundamental passage 2 Corinthians 5:18 f., which he has taken to apply to the cosmical á¼ÏοκαÏαλλαγή . But, instead of apprehending this as the function of the risen Christ, he has by διὰ Ïοῦ αἵμαÏÎ¿Ï Îº . Ï . λ . occasioned the coincidence of two dissimilar spheres of conception, of which, moreover, the one is introduced as form for the other. The interpolator reproduces and concentrates the thought of Ephesians 1:7 ; Ephesians 1:10 ; Ephesians 2:13-17 , bringing the idea of a cosmical reconciliation (Ephesians 1:10 ) into expression in such a way “that he, led by the sound of the terminology, takes up at the same time and includes the thought of the reconciliation of the Jews and Gentiles.” In opposition to this view, the exegesis of the details in their joint bearing on the whole will avail to show that the passage with all its difficulty is no such confused medley of misunderstanding and of heterogeneous ideas, and contains nothing un-Pauline. The extension of the reconciliation to the celestial spheres, in particular, has been regarded as un-Pauline (see, especially, Holtzmann, p. 231 ff.). But even in the epistles whose genuineness is undisputed it is not difficult to recognise the presuppositions, from which the sublime extension of the conception to an universality of cosmic effect in our passage might ensue. We may add, that Ephesians 1:10 is not “the leading thought of the interpolation” at ver. 16 ff. (Holtzmann, p. 151); in ver. 16 ff. much more is said, and of other import.
[49] As if we might say in German, abversöhnen, that is: to finish quite the reconciliation. Comp. á¼ÏιλάÏκεÏθαι , Plat. Legg. ix. p. 873 A.
[50] God is the subject, whose hostility is removed, by the reconciliation (comp. on Romans 5:10 ); Ïá½° ÏάνÏα is the object, which was affected by this hostility grounded of necessity on the holiness and righteousness of God. If the hostile disposition of men towards God, which had become removed by the reconciliation, were meant (Ritschl in the Jahrb. f. Deutsche Theol. 1863, p. 515), the universal Ïá½° ÏάνÏα would not be suitable; because the whole universe might, indeed, be affected by the hostility of God against sin, but could not itself be hostilely disposed towards Him. See, moreover, on ver. 21.
[51] According to Ignatius, Smyrn. 6, the angels also, á¼á½°Î½ μὴ ÏιÏÏεÏÏÏÏιν Îµá¼°Ï Ïὸ αἷμα ΧÏιÏÏοῦ , incur judgment. But this conception of angels needing reconciliation, and possibly even unbelieving, is doubtless merely an abstraction, just as is the idea of an angel teaching falsely (Galatians 1:8 ). It is true that, according to 1 Corinthians 6:3 , angels also are judged; but this presupposes not believing and unbelieving angels, but various stages of moral perfection and purity in the angelic world, when confronted with the absolute ethical standard, which in Christianity must present itself even to the angels (Ephesians 3:10 ). Comp. on 1 Corinthians 6:3 .
[52] The idea of á¼ÏοκαÏαλλάξαι is not in this view to be altered, but has as its necessary presupposition the idea of hostility, as is clear from εἰÏηνοÏοίηÏÎ±Ï and from á¼ÏθÏοÏÏ , ver. 21, compared with Ephesians 2:16 ! Compare Fritzsche, ad Rom. I. p. 276 ff.; Eur. Med. 870: διαλλαγá¿Î½Î±Î¹ Ïá¿Ï á¼ÏθÏÎ±Ï , Soph. Aj. 731 (744): θεοá¿Ïιν á½¡Ï ÎºÎ±ÏαλλαÏθῠÏÏÎ»Î¿Ï , Plat. Rep. p. 566 E: ÏÏá½¸Ï ÏÎ¿á½ºÏ á¼Î¾Ï á¼ÏθÏÎ¿á½ºÏ Ïοá¿Ï μὲν καÏαλλαγῠ, ÏÎ¿á½ºÏ Î´á½² καὶ διαÏθείÏá¿ . This applies also against Hofmann’s enervating weakening of the idea into that of transposition from the misrelation into a good one, or of “an action, which makes one, who stands ill to another, stand well to him.” In such a misrelation (namely, to Christ, according to the erroneous view of εá½Î´ÏκηÏε ) stand, in Hofmann’s view, even the “spirits collectively,” in so far as they bear sway in the world-life deteriorated by human sin, instead of in the realization of salvation. Richard Schmidt, l.c. p. 195, also proceeds to dilute the notion of reconciliation into that of the bringing to Christ, inasmuch as he explains the καÏαλλάÏÏειν as effected by the fact that Christ has become the head of all, and all has been put in dependence on Him. Hilgenfeld, l.c. p. 251 f., justly rejects this alteration of the sense, which is at variance with the following context, but adheres, for his own part, to the statement that here the author in a Gnostic fashion has in view disturbances of peace in the heavenly spheres (in the ÏλήÏÏμα ).
[53] Comp. Philippi, Glaubensl. IV. 2, p. 269 f., Exodus 2:0 .
[54] According to Hofmann, Schriftbew. II. 1, p. 362 ff., by the blood of the cross, ver. 20, the death of Christ is meant to be presented as a judicial act of violence, and “what befell Him” as an ignominy, which He allowed to be inflicted on Him with the view of establishing a peace, which brought everything out of alienation from Him into fellowship of peace with Him. ver. 22 does not affirm the expiation of sin, but the transition of mankind, which had once for all been effected in Christ, from the condition involved in their sin into that which came into existence with His death. Christ has, in a body like ours, and by means of the death to which we are subject, done that which we have need of in order that we may come to stand holy before Him. Not different in substance are Hofmann’s utterances in his Heil. Schr. N. T. But when we find it there stated: “how far Christ has hereby (namely, by His having allowed Himself to be put to death as a transgressor by men) converted the variance, which subsisted between Him and the world created for Him, into its opposite, is not here specified in detail,” that is an unwarranted evasion; for the strict idea of reconciliation had so definite, clear, firm, and vivid (comp. ver. 14, Colossians 2:13 f.) a place in the consciousness of the apostle and of the church, which was a Pauline one, that it did not need, especially in express connection with the blood of the cross, any more precise mention in detail. Comp. Galatians 3:13 ; Romans 3:25 . Calvin well says: “Ideo pignus et pretium nostrae cum Deo pacificationis sanguis Christi, quia in cruce fusus.”
Verse 21
Colossians 1:21 . As far as Colossians 1:23 , an application to the readers of what had been said as to the reconciliation, in order to animate them, through the consciousness of this blessing, to stedfastness in the faith (Colossians 1:23 ).
καὶ á½Î¼á¾¶Ï κ . Ï . λ .] you also , not: and you , so that it would have to be separated by a mere comma from the preceding verse, and Î½Ï Î½á½¶ δὲ ⦠θανάÏÎ¿Ï would, notwithstanding its great importance, come to be taken as parenthetical (Lachmann), or as quite breaking off the discourse, and leaving it unfinished (Ewald). It begins a new sentence, comp. Ephesians 2:1 ; but observe, at the same time, that Ephesians 2:0 is much too rich in its contents to admit of these contents being here compressed into Colossians 1:20-21 (in opposition to Holtzmann, p. 150). As to the way in which Holtzmann gains an immediate connection with what precedes, see on Colossians 1:19 . The construction (following the reading á¼ÏοκαÏηλλάγηÏε , see the critical notes) has become anacoluthic , inasmuch as Paul, when he began the sentence, had in his mind the active verb (which stands in the Recepta ), but he does not carry out this formation of the sentence; on the contrary, in his versatility of conception, he suddenly starts off and continues in a passive form, as if he had begun with καὶ á½Î¼Îµá¿Ï κ . Ï . λ . See Matthiae, p. 1524; Winer, p. 527 ff. [E. T. 714]; and upon the aorist, Buttmann, Neut. Gr . p. 171 [E. T. 197].
á¼ÏηλλοÏÏ . κ . Ï . λ ] when ye were once in the state of estrangement , characterizes their heathen condition. As to á¼ÏηλλοÏÏ ., see on Ephesians 2:12 ; from which passage á¼Ïὸ Ïá¿Ï ÏολιÏÎµÎ¯Î±Ï Ï . ἸÏÏ . is here as unwarrantably supplied (Heinrichs, comp. Flatt), as is from Ephesians 4:14 Ïá¿Ï ζÏá¿Ï Ïοῦ Îεοῦ (Bähr). In conformity with the context, seeing that previously God was the subject as author of reconciliation, the being estranged from God ( Ïοῦ Îεοῦ ), the being excluded from His fellowship, is to be understood. Comp. á¼Î¸ÎµÎ¿Î¹ á¼Î½ Ï . κÏÏμῳ , Ephesians 2:12 . On the subject-matter, Romans 1:21 ff.
á¼ÏθÏοÏÏ ] sc. Ïá¿· Îεῷ , in a passive sense (comp. on Romans 5:10 ; Romans 11:28 ): invisos Deo , [55] as is required by the idea of having become reconciled, through which God’s enmity against sinful men, who were ÏÎκνα ÏÏÏει á½Ïγá¿Ï (Ephesians 2:3 ), has changed into mercy towards them. [56] This applies in opposition to the usual active interpretation, which Hofmann also justly rejects: hostile towards God, Romans 8:7 ; James 4:4 (so still Huther, de Wette, Ewald, Ritschl, Holtzmann), which is not to be combined with the passive sense (Calvin, Bleek).
Ïῠδιανοίᾳ and á¼Î ΤÎá¿Ï á¼Î¡ÎÎÎÏ Î¤ . Î . belong to both the preceding elements; the former as dative of the cause: on account of their disposition of mind they were once alienated from God and hateful to Him; the latter as specification of the overt, actual sphere of life, in which they had been so ( in the wicked works , in which their godless and God-hated behaviour had exhibited itself). Thus information is given, as to á¼Ïηλλ . and á¼Î§ÎΡÎÎÏ , of an internal and of an external kind. The view which takes ΤῠÎÎÎÎÎÎá¾¼ as dative of the respect (comp. Ephesians 4:18 ): as respects disposition (so, following older expositors, Huther, de Wette, Baumgarten-Crusius, Ewald), would no doubt suit the erroneous active explanation of á¼ÏÎ¸Ï ., but would furnish only a superfluous definition to it, as it is self-evident that the enmity towards God resides in the disposition . Luther incorrectly renders: “through the reason; ” for the διάν . is not the reason itself, but its immanent activity (see especially, Plato, Soph . p. 263 E), and that here viewed under its moral aspect; comp. on Ephesians 4:18 . Beza (“mente operibus malis intenta”), Michaelis, Storr, and Bähr attach á¼Î½ Ïοá¿Ï á¼ÏÎ³Î¿Î¹Ï Îº . Ï . λ . to ΤῠÎÎÎÎÎÎá¾¼ . This is grammatically admissible, since we may say ÎÎÎÎÎÎá¿Î£ÎÎÎ á¼Î , animo versari in (Psalms 73:8 ; Sir 6:37 ; Plato, Prot . p. 341 E), and therefore the repetition of the article was not necessary. But the badness of the disposition was so entirely self-evident from the context, that the assumed more precise definition by á¼Î½ Ïοá¿Ï á¼Ïγ . Ï . ÏÎ¿Î½Î·Ï . would appear tediously circumstantial.
The articles Τῠand ΤÎá¿Ï denote the disposition which they have had , and the works which they have done . In the latter case the subjoined attributive furnished with the article ( Ïοá¿Ï ÏονηÏοá¿Ï ) is not causal (“ because they were bad,” Hofmann), but emphatically brings into prominence the quality, as at Ephesians 6:13 ; 1 Corinthians 7:14 , and often (Winer, p. 126 [E. T. 167]).
Î½Ï Î½á½¶ δὲ á¼ÏοκαÏηλλάγηÏε ] as if previously á½ÎÎá¿Ï Î . Τ . Î . were used (see above): Ye also ⦠have nevertheless now become reconciled . On δΠafter participles which supply the place of the protasis, as here, where the thought is: although ye formerly, etc., see Klotz, ad Devar . p. 374 ff.; Maetzner, ad Antiph . p. 136; Kühner, ad Xen. Mem . iii. 7. 8, Anab . vi. 6. 16. On Î½Ï Î½Î¯ , with the aorist following, comp. Colossians 1:26 ; Romans 7:6 ; Ephesians 2:13 ; Plat. Symp . p. 193 A: ÏÏὸ Ïοῦ ⦠á¼Î½ ἦμεν , Î½Ï Î½á½¶ δὲ διὰ Ïὴν á¼Î´Î¹ÎºÎ¯Î±Î½ διῳκίÏθημεν á½Ïὸ Ï . θεοῦ . Ellendt, Lex Soph . II. p. 176; Kühner, II. 2, p. 672. It denotes the present time, which has set in with the á¼ÏοκαÏηλλ . (comp. Buttmann, Neut. Gr . p. 171 [E. T. 197]); and the latter has taken place objectively through the death of Christ, Colossians 1:22 , although realized subjectively in the readers only when they became believers whereby the reconciliation became appropriated to them, and there existed now for them a decisive contrast of their Î½Ï Î½Î¯ with their Î ÎΤΠ. [57] The reconciling subject is, according to the context (Colossians 1:19-20 ), not Christ (as at Ephesians 2:16 ), through whom (comp. Romans 5:10 ; 2 Corinthians 5:18 ) the reconciliation has taken place (see Colossians 1:20 ), but, as at 2 Corinthians 5:19 , God (in opposition to Chrysostom, Theodoret, Oecumenius, Beza, Calvin, Estius, Calovius, Heinrichs, and others, including de Wette and Ewald). For the reference to Christ even the reading á¼ÏοκαÏήλλαξεν would by no means furnish a reason, far less a necessity, since, on the contrary, even this active would have, according to the correct explanation of εá½Î´ÏκηÏε in Colossians 1:19 , to be taken as referring to God (in opposition to Hofmann).
[55] Compare the phrase very current in the classical writers, from Homer onward, á¼ÏθÏá½¸Ï Î¸ÎµÎ¿á¿Ï , quem Dii oderunt.
[56] See Fritzsche, ad Rom. I. p. 276 ff., who aptly explains καÏαλλάÏÏεÏθαί Ïινι : in alicujus favorem venire, qui antea succensuerit. Comp. Philippi, Glaubensl. IV. 2, p. 265 ff., Exodus 2:0 . The reconciliation of men takes place, when God, instead of being further angry at them, has become gracious towards them, when, consequently, He Himself is reconciled. Comp. Luke 18:13 ; 2 Corinthians 5:19 . So long as His wrath is not changed, and consequently He is not reconciled, men remain unreconciled. 2Ma 7:33 : ὠζῶν κÏÏÎ¹Î¿Ï â¦ Î²ÏαÏÎÏÏ á¼ÏÏÏγιÏÏαι καὶ Ïάλιν καÏαλλαγήÏεÏαι Ïοá¿Ï á¼Î±Ï Ïοῦ δοÏÎ»Î¿Î¹Ï , comp. 2Ma 8:29 , Malachi 1:5; Malachi 1:5 , 2Ma 5:20 ; Clem. Cor. I. 48: ἱκεÏεÏονÏÎµÏ Î±á½ÏÏν (God), á½ ÏÏÏ á¼µÎ»ÎµÏÏ Î³ÎµÎ½ÏÎ¼ÎµÎ½Î¿Ï á¼ÏικαÏαλλαγῠἡμá¿Î½ . In Constt. Apost. viii. 12. 14, it is said of Christ that He Ïá¿· κÏÏμῳ καÏήλλαξε God, and § 17, of God: Ïοῦ καÏαλλαγÎνÏÎ¿Ï Î±á½Ïοá¿Ï (with believers).
[57] Comp. Luthardt, vom freien Willen, p. 403.
Verse 22
Colossians 1:22 . á¼Î½ Ïá¿· ÏÏμαÏι κ . Ï . λ .] that, by means of which they have been reconciled; corresponding to the διʼ αá½Ïοῦ and διὰ Ïοῦ αἵμαÏÎ¿Ï Ïοῦ ÏÏÎ±Ï Ïοῦ αá½Ïοῦ of Colossians 1:20 : in the body of His flesh by means of death . Since God is the reconciling subject, we are not at liberty, with Elzevir, Scholz, and others, to read αá½Ïοῦ (with the spiritus asper ), which would not be justified, even though Christ were the subject. We have further to note: (1) διὰ Ï . θανάÏÎ¿Ï informs us whereby the being reconciled á¼Î½ Ïá¿· ÏÏμαÏι Ï . Ï . αὠ. was brought about , namely, by the death occurring, without which the reconciliation would not have taken place in the body of Christ. (2) Looking to the concrete presentation of the matter, and because the procuring element is subsequently brought forward specially and on its own account by διά , the á¼Î½ is not, with Erasmus and many others, to be taken as instrumental , but is to be left as local; not, however, in the sense that Christ accomplished the á¼ÏοκαÏαλλάÏÏειν in His body, which was fashioned materially like ours (Hofmann, comp. Calvin and others, including Bleek) which, in fact, would amount to the perfectly self-evident point, that it took place in His corporeally-human form of being, but, doubtless, especially as διὰ Ïοῦ θανάÏÎ¿Ï follows, in the sense, that in the body of Christ, by means of the death therein accomplished, our reconciliation was objectively realized, which fact of salvation, therefore, inseparably associated itself with His body; comp. á¼Î½ Ïá¿ ÏαÏκί Î¼Î¿Ï , Colossians 1:24 , see also 1 Peter 2:24 and Huther in loc . The conception of substitution, however, though involved in the thing (in the ἱλαÏÏήÏιον ), is not to be sought in á¼Î½ (in opposition to Böhmer and Baumgarten-Crusius). (3) The reason for the intentional use of the material description: “in the body which consisted of His flesh ” (comp. Colossians 2:11 ; Sir 23:16 ), is to be sought in the apologetic interest of antagonism to the false teachers , against whom, however, the charge of Docetism , possibly on the ground of Colossians 2:23 , can the less be proved (in opposition to Beza, Balduin, Böhmer, Steiger, Huther, and Dalmer), as Paul nowhere in the epistle expressly treats of the material Incarnation , which he would hardly have omitted to do in contrast to Docetism (comp. 1 John). In fact, the apostle found sufficient occasion for writing about the reconciliation as he has done here and in Colossians 1:20 , in the faith in angels on the part of his opponents, by which they ascribed the reconciling mediation with God in part to those higher spiritual beings (who are without Ïῶμα Ïá¿Ï ÏαÏκÏÏ ). Other writers have adopted the view, without any ground whatever in the connection, that Paul has thus written in order to distinguish the real body of Christ from the spiritual Ïῶμα of the church (Bengel, Michaelis, Storr, Olshausen). The other Ïῶμα of Christ, which contrasts with His earthly body of flesh (Romans 1:3 ; Romans 8:3 ), is His glorified heavenly body, Php 3:21 ; 1 Corinthians 15:47 ff. References, however, such as Calvin, e.g ., has discovered (“humile, terrenum et infirmitatibus multis obnoxium corpus”), or Grotius (“tantas res perfecit instrumento adeo tenui;” comp. also Estius and others), are forced upon the words, in which the form of expression is selected simply in opposition to spiritualistic erroneous doctrines. Just as little may we import into the simple historical statement of the means διὰ Ïοῦ θανάÏÎ¿Ï , with Hofmann, the ignominy of shedding His blood on the cross , since no modal definition to that effect is subjoined or indicated.
ÏαÏαÏÏá¿Ïαι á½Î¼á¾¶Ï κ . Ï . λ .] Ethical definition of the object aimed at in the á¼ÏοκαÏηλλ .: ye have been reconciled ⦠in order to present you , etc. The presenting subject is therefore the subject of á¼ÏοκαÏηλλ ., so that it is to be explained: ἵνα ÏαÏαÏÏήÏηÏε á½Î¼á¾¶Ï , ut sisteretis vos , and therefore this continuation of the discourse is by no means awkward in its relation to the reading á¼ÏοκαÏηλλάγηÏε (in opposition to de Wette). We should be only justified in expecting á¼Î±Ï ÏοÏÏ (as Huther suggests) instead of á½Î¼á¾¶Ï (comp. Romans 12:1 ) if (comp. Romans 6:13 ; 2 Timothy 2:15 ) the connection required a reflexive emphasis. According to the reading á¼ÏοκαÏήλλαξεν the sense is ut sisteret vos , in which case, however, the subject would not be Christ (Hofmann), but, as in every case since εá½Î´ÏκηÏε in Colossians 1:19 , God .
The point of time at which the ÏαÏαÏÏ . is to take place (observe the aorist ) is that of the judgment , in which they shall come forth holy, etc., before the Judge . Comp. Colossians 1:28 , and on Ephesians 5:27 . This reference (comp. Bähr, Olshausen, Bleek) is required by the context in Colossians 1:23 , where the ÏαÏαÏÏá¿Ïαι κ . Ï . λ . is made dependent on continuance in the faith as its condition; consequently there cannot be meant the result already accomplished by the reconciliation itself , namely, the state of δικαιοÏÏνη entered upon through it (so usually, including Hofmann). The state of justification sets in at any rate, and unconditionally, through the reconciliation; but it may be lost again, and at the Parousia will be found subsisting only in the event of the reconciled remaining constant to the faith, by means of which they have appropriated the reconciliation, Colossians 1:23 .
á¼Î³Î¯Î¿Ï Ï Îº . Ï . λ .] does not represent the subjects as sacrifices (Romans 12:1 ), which would not consist with the fact that Christ is the sacrifice, and also would not be in harmony with á¼Î½ÎµÎ³ÎºÎ» .; it rather describes without figure the moral holiness which, after the justification attained by means of faith, is wrought by the Holy Spirit (Romans 7:6 ; Romans 8:2 ; Romans 8:9 , et al .), and which, on the part of man, is preserved and maintained by continuance in the faith (Colossians 1:23 ). The three predicates are not intended to represent the relation “erga Deum , respectu vestri , and respectu proximi ” (Bengel, Bähr), since, in point of fact, á¼Î¼ÏÎ¼Î¿Ï Ï ( blameless , Ephesians 1:4 ; Ephesians 5:27 ; Herod, ii. 177; Plat. Rep . p. 487 A: οá½Î´Ê¼ á¼Î½ á½ Îá¿¶Î¼Î¿Ï ÏÏ Î³Îµ ÏοιοῦÏον μÎμÏαιÏο ) no less than á¼Î½ÎµÎ³ÎºÎ» . ( reproachless , 1 Corinthians 1:8 ) points to an external judgment: but the moral condition is intended to be described with exhaustive emphasis positively ( á¼Î³Î¯Î¿Ï Ï ) and negatively ( á¼Î¼Ïμ . and á¼Î½ÎµÎ³ÎºÎ» .). The idea of the moral holiness of the righteous through faith is thoroughly Pauline; comp. not only Ephesians 2:10 , Titus 2:14 ; Titus 3:8 , but also such passages as Romans 6:1-23 ; Romans 8:4 ff.; Gal 5:22-25 ; 1 Corinthians 9:24 ff.; 2 Corinthians 11:2 , et al .
καÏενÏÏιον αá½Ïοῦ ] refers to Christ , [58] to His judicial appearance at the Parousia, just as by the previous αá½Ïοῦ after ΣÎΡÎÎÏ Christ also was meant. The usual reference to God (so Huther, de Wette, Baumgarten-Crusius, Ewald, Bleek) is connected with the reading á¼ÏοκαÏήλλαξεν taken as so referring; comp. Jude 1:24 ; Ephesians 1:4 . The objection that ÎÎΤÎÎÎÎ ÎÎÎ elsewhere occurs only in reference to God , is without force; for that this is the case in the few passages where the word is used, seems to be purely accidental, since á¼Î½ÏÏιον is also applied to Christ (2 Timothy 2:14 ), and since in the notion itself there is nothing opposed to this reference. The frequent use of the expression “before God ” is traceable to the theocratically national currency of this conception, which by no means excludes the expression “before Christ .” So á¼Î¼ÏÏοÏθεν is also used of Christ in 1 Thessalonians 2:19 . Comp. 2 Corinthians 5:10 : á¼ÎΠΡÎΣÎÎΠΤÎῦ ÎÎÎÎΤÎÏ Î¤Îῦ ΧΡÎΣΤÎῦ , which is a commentary on our καÏενÏÏιον αá½Ïοῦ ; see also Matthew 25:32 .
[58] So also Holtzmann, p. 47, though holding in favour of the priority of Ephesians 1:4 , that the sense requires a reference to God, although syntactically the reference is made to Christ. But, in fact, the one is just as consistent with the sense as the other.
REMARK.
The proper reference of ÏαÏαÏÏá¿Ïαι κ . Ï . λ . to the judgment , as also the condition appended in Colossians 1:23 , place it beyond doubt that what is meant here (it is otherwise in Ephesians 1:4 ) is the holiness and blamelessness, which is entered upon through justification by faith actu judiciali and is positively wrought by the Holy Spirit, but which, on the other hand, is preserved and maintained up to the judgment by the self-active perseverance of faith in virtue of the new life of the reconciled (Romans 6:0 ); so that the justitia inhaerens is therefore neither meant alone (Chrysostom, Oecumenius, Theophylact, Calvin, and others), nor excluded (Theodoret, Erasmus, Beza, and others), but is included. Comp. Calovius.
Verse 23
Colossians 1:23 . Requirement, with which is associated not, indeed, the being included in the work of reconciliation (Hofmann), but the attainment of its blessed final aim, which would otherwise be forfeited, namely the ÏαÏαÏÏá¿Ïαι κ . Ï . λ . above described: so far at any rate as ye , i. e. assuming, namely, that ye, etc. A confidence that the readers will fulfil this condition is not conveyed by the εἴγε in itself (see on 2 Corinthians 5:3 ; Galatians 3:4 ; Ephesians 3:2 ), and is not implied here by the context; but Paul sets forth the relation purely as a condition certainly taking place , which they have to fulfil , in order to attain the ÏαÏαÏÏá¿Ïαι κ . Ï . λ . that “fructus in posterum laetissimus” of their reconciliation (Bengel).
Ïá¿ ÏίÏÏει ] belonging to á¼ÏιμÎν .: abide by the faith , do not cease from it. [59] See on Romans 6:1 . The mode of this abiding is indicated by what follows positively ( Ïεθεμ . κ . á¼Î´Ïαá¿Î¿Î¹ ), and negatively ( Î . Îá¿ ÎÎΤÎÎÎÎ . Î . Τ . Î . ), under the figurative conception of a building , in which, and that with reference to the Parousia pointed at by ÏαÏαÏÏá¿Ïαι κ . Ï . λ ., the hope of the gospel is conceived as the foundation , in so far as continuance in the faith is based on this, and is in fact not possible without it (Colossians 1:27 ). “Spe amissa perseverantia concidit,” Grotius. On Ïεθεμελ ., which is not interjected (Holtzmann), comp. Eph 3:17 ; 1 Peter 5:10 ; and on á¼ÎΡÎá¿ÎÎ , 1 Corinthians 15:58 . The opposite of ΤÎÎÎÎÎÎ . is ΧΩΡá¿Ï ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ¥ , Luke 6:49 ; but it would be a contrast to the ΤÎÎÎÎÎÎ . ÎÎá¿ á¼ÎΡÎá¿ÎÎ , if they were ÎÎΤÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ Î . Τ . Î . ; concerning ÎÎ , see Winer, p. 443 [E. T. 596]; Baeumlein, Part . p. 295.
μεÏακινοÏμ .] passively , through the influence of false doctrines and other seductive forces.
á¼ÏÏ ] away ⦠from , so as to stand no longer on hope as the foundation of perseverance in the faith. Comp. Galatians 1:6 .
The á¼Î»Ïá½¶Ï Ïοῦ εá½Î±Î³Î³ . (which is proclaimed through the gospel by means of its promises, comp. Colossians 1:5 , and on Ephesians 1:18 ) is the hope of eternal life in the Messianic kingdom, which has been imparted to the believer in the gospel. Comp. Colossians 1:4-5 ; Colossians 1:27 ; Romans 5:2 ; Romans 8:24 ; Titus 1:2 f., Colossians 3:7 .
ÎὠἨÎÎÎΣÎΤΠΠ. Τ . Î . ] three definitions rendering the Îá¿ ÎÎΤÎÎÎÎÎá¿Î£ÎÎÎ Î . Τ . Î . in its universal obligation palpably apparent to the readers; for such a μεÏακινεá¿Ïθαι would, in the case of the Colossians, be inexcusable ( ÎὠἨÎÎÎΣÎΤΠ, comp. Romans 10:18 ), would set at naught the universal proclamation of the gospel ( ΤÎῦ ÎÎΡΥΧΠ. Î . Τ . Î . ), and would stand in contrast to the personal weight of the apostle’s position as its servant ( Îá½ á¼ÎÎÎ . Î . Τ . Î . ). If, with Hofmann, we join ΤÎῦ ÎÎΡΥΧÎÎÎΤÎÏ as an adjective to ΤÎῦ Îá½ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ¥ , ÎὠἨÎÎÎΣÎΤΠ, we withdraw from the ÎὠἨÎÎÎΣÎΤΠthat element of practical significance, which it must have, if it is not to be superfluous. Nor is justice done to the third point, Îá½ á¼ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ Î . Τ . Î . , if the words (so Hofmann, comp. de Wette) are meant to help the apostle, by enforcing what he is thenceforth to write with the weight of his name, to come to his condition at that time . According to this, they would be merely destined as a transition. In accordance with the context, however, and without arbitrary tampering, they can only have the same aim with the two preceding attributives which are annexed to the gospel; and, with this aim, how appropriately and forcibly do they stand at the close! [60] λοιÏὸν Î³á½°Ï Î¼Îγα ἦν Ïὸ ΠαÏÎ»Î¿Ï á½Î½Î¿Î¼Î± , Oecumenius, comp. Chrysostom. Comp. on á¼ÎῺ Î ÎῦÎÎÏ , with a view to urge his personal authority, 2 Corinthians 10:1 ; Galatians 5:2 ; Ephesians 3:1 ; 1 Thessalonians 2:18 ; Philemon 1:19 . It is to be observed, moreover, that if Paul himself had been the teacher of the Colossians, this relation would certainly not have been passed over here in silence.
á¼Î Î ÎΣῠÎΤÎΣÎÎ (without Τῠ, see the critical remarks) is to be taken as: in presence of (coram , see Ast, Lex. Plat . I. p. 701; Winer, p. 360 [E. T. 481]) every creature , before everything that is created ( κÏίÏÎ¹Ï , as in Colossians 1:15 ). There is nothing created under the heaven, in whose sphere and environment (comp. Kühner, II. 1, p. 401) the gospel had not been proclaimed. The sense of the word must be left in this entire generality, and not limited to the heathen (Bähr). It is true that the popular expression of universality may just as little be pressed here as in Colossians 1:6 . Comp. Herm. Past . sim. viii. 3; Ignatius, Romans 2:0 . But as in Colossians 1:15 , so also here Ïá¾¶Ïα κÏίÏÎ¹Ï is not all creation , according to which the sense is assumed to be: “ on a stage embracing the whole world ” (Hofmann). This Paul would properly have expressed by á¼Î½ ÏάÏá¿ ÏῠκÏίÏει , or á¼Î Î ÎÎΤῠΤῷ ÎÎΣÎῼ , or á¼Î á½Îῼ Τῷ Î . ; comp. Colossians 1:6 . The expression is more lofty and poetic than in Colossians 1:6 , appropriate to the close of the section, not a fanciful reproduction betraying an imitator and a later age (Holtzmann). Omitting even ÎὠἨÎÎÎΣÎΤΠ(because it is not continued by Îá½ ÎÎá¿ á¼ÎÎ ), Holtzmann arrives merely at the connection between Colossians 1:23 and Colossians 1:25 : ÎÎ Ì ÎÎΤÎÎÎÎ . á¼Î Î Ì Î¤Îῦ Îá½ÎÎÎ . Îá½ á¼ÎÎÎ . á¼ÎῺ Î . ÎÎÎÎ . ÎÎΤᾺ Τá¿Î ÎἸÎÎÎ . Τ . ÎÎÎῦ Τá¿Î ÎÎÎÎá¿Î£ÎÎ ÎÎÎ Îá¼¸Ï á½Îá¾¶Ï , just as he then would read further thus: Î ÎÎΡῶΣÎΠΤ . ÎÎÎ . Τ . ÎÎÎῦ , Îá¼¸Ï á½ ÎÎá¿ ÎÎÎ Îá¿¶ á¼ÎΩÎÎÎÎÎ . ÎÎΤᾺ Τ . á¼ÎÎΡΠ. Îá½Î¤Îῦ Τá¿Î á¼ÎÎΡÎÎΥΠ. á¼Î á¼ÎÎÎ .
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÏ ] See on Ephesians 3:7 . Paul has become such through his calling, Galatians 1:15 f.; Ephesians 3:7 . Observe the aorist .
[59] In our Epistle faith is by no means postponed to knowing and perceiving (comp. Colossians 2:5 ; Colossians 2:7 ; Colossians 2:12 ), as Baur asserts in his Neut. Theol. p. 272. The frequent emphasis laid upon knowledge, insight, comprehension, and the like, is not to be put to the account of an intellectualism, which forms a fundamental peculiarity betokening the author and age of this Epistle (and especially of that to the Ephesians), as Holtzmann conceives, p. 216 ff.; on the contrary, it was owing to the attitude of the apostle towards the antagonistic philosophical speculations. Comp. also Grau, Entwickelungsgesch. d. N. T. II. p. 153 ff. It was owing to the necessary relations, in which the apostle, with his peculiarity of being all things to all men, found himself placed towards the interests of the time and place.
[60] According to Baur, indeed, such passages as the present are among those which betray the double personality of the author.
Verse 24
Colossians 1:24 . [61] A more precise description of this relation of service, and that, in the first place, with respect to the sufferings which the apostle is now enduring, Colossians 1:24 , and then with respect to his important calling generally, Colossians 1:25-29 .
á½Ï (see the critical remarks) ÎῦΠΧÎÎΡΩ Î . Τ . Î . : I who now rejoice , etc. How touchingly, so as to win the hearts of the readers, does this join itself with the last element of encouragement in Colossians 1:23 !
νῦν ] places in contrast with the great element of his past , expressed by οὠá¼Î³ÎµÎ½ . κ . Ï . λ ., which has imposed on the apostle so many sorrows (comp. Acts 9:16 ), the situation as it now exists with him in that relation of service on his part to the gospel. This present condition, however, he characterizes, in full magnanimous appreciation of the sufferings under which he writes, as joyfulness over them, and as a becoming perfect in the fellowship of tribulation with Christ, which is accomplished through them. It is plain, therefore, that the emphatic νῦν is not transitional (Bähr) or inferential (Lücke: “quae cum ita sint”); nor yet is it to be defined, with Olshausen, by arbitrary importation of the thought: now, after that I look upon the church as firmly established (comp. Dalmer), or, with Hofmann, to be taken as standing in contrast to the apostolic activity .
á¼Î½ Ïοá¿Ï Ïαθήμ .] over the sufferings; see on Philippians 1:18 ; Romans 5:3 . This joy in suffering is so entirely in harmony with the Pauline spirit, that its source is not to be sought (in opposition to Holtzmann) in 2 Corinthians 7:4 , either for the present passage or for Ephesians 3:13 ; comp. also Philippians 2:17 .
á½Ïá½²Ï á½Î¼á¿¶Î½ ] joins itself to Î ÎÎÎÎÎΣÎÎ so as to form one conception, without connecting article. Comp. on Colossians 1:1 ; Colossians 1:4 ; 2 Corinthians 7:7 ; Ephesians 3:13 ; Galatians 4:14 . Since á½Î ÎΡ , according to the context, is not to be taken otherwise than as in á½Î á¿Î¡ ΤÎῦ ΣÎÎ . Îá½Î¤Îῦ , it can neither mean instead of (Steiger, Catholic expositors, but not Cornelius a Lapide or Estius), nor on account of (Rosenmüller, Heinrichs, Flatt; comp. Ephesians 3:1 ; Philippians 1:29 ), but simply: in commodum , [62] namely, ἵνα á½Î¼á¾¶Ï á½ Ïελá¿Ïαι Î´Ï Î½Î·Î¸á¿¶ , Oecumenius, and that, indeed, by that honourable attestation and glorifying of your Christian state, which is actually contained in my tribulations; for the latter show forth the faith of the readers, for the sake of which the apostle has undertaken and borne the suffering, as the holy divine thing which is worthy of such a sacrifice. Comp. Philippians 1:12 ff.; Ephesians 3:13 . The reference to the example , which confirms the readers’ faith (Grotius, Wolf, Bähr, and others), introduces inappropriately a reflection, the indirect and tame character of which is not at all in keeping with the emotion of the discourse.
The á½Î¼á¿¶Î½ , meaning the readers , though the relation in question concerns Pauline Christians generally , is to be explained by the tendency of affectionate sympathy to individualize (comp. Philippians 1:25 ; Philippians 2:17 , et al. ). It is arbitrary, doubtless, to supply Ïῶν á¼Î¸Î½á¿¶Î½ here from Ephesians 3:1 (Flatt, Huther); but that Paul, nevertheless, has his readers in view as Gentile Christians , and as standing in a special relation to himself as apostle of the Gentiles , is shown by Colossians 1:25-27 .
καί ] not equivalent to ÎÎá¿ ÎÎΡ (Heinrichs, Bähr), but the simple and , subjoining to the subjective state of feeling the objective relation of suffering, which the apostle sees accomplishing itself in his destiny. It therefore carries on , but not from the special ( á½Î¼á¿¶Î½ ) “ad totam omnino ecclesiam” (Lücke), since the new point to be introduced is contained in the specific á¼ÎΤÎÎÎÎ ÎÎΡῶ ⦠ΧΡÎΣΤÎῦ , and not in á½Î á¿Î¡ Τ . ΣÎÎ . Îá½Î¤Îῦ . The connection of ideas is rather: “I rejoice over my sufferings, and what a holy position is theirs! through them I fulfil, ” etc. Hence the notion of ÏαίÏÏ is not, with Huther, to be carried over also to á¼ÎΤÎÎÎÎ ÎÎΡῶ : and I supplement with joy , etc. At the same time, however, the statement introduced by καί stands related to ΧÎÎΡΩ as elucidating and giving information regarding it.
á¼Î½ÏαναÏληÏá¿¶ ] The double compound is more graphic than the simple á¼Î½Î±ÏληÏá¿¶ , Philippians 2:30 ; 1 Corinthians 16:17 ( I fill up ), since á¼Î½Ïί ( to fill up over against ) indicates what is brought in for the making complete over against the still existing á½ÏÏεÏήμαÏα . The reference of the á¼Î½Ïί lies therefore in the notion of what is lacking; inasmuch, namely, as the incomplete is rendered complete by the very fact, that the supplement corresponding to what is lacking is introduced in its stead. It is the reference of the corresponding adjustment , [63] of the supplying of what is still wanting. Comp. Dem. 182. 22: á¼Î½ÏαναÏληÏοῦνÏÎµÏ ÏÏá½¸Ï Ïὸν εá½ÏοÏÏÏαÏον á¼Îµá½¶ ÏÎ¿á½ºÏ á¼ÏοÏÏÏάÏÎ¿Ï Ï (where the idea is, that the poverty of the latter is compensated for by the wealth of the former); so also á¼Î½ÏαναÏλήÏÏÏÎ¹Ï , Epicur. ap. Diog. L . x. 48; Dio Cass, xliv. 48: á½ Ïον ⦠á¼Î½Îδει , ÏοῦÏο á¼Îº Ïá¿Ï ÏαÏá½° Ïῶν á¼Î»Î»Ïν ÏÏ Î½ÏÎµÎ»ÎµÎ¯Î±Ï á¼Î½ÏαναÏληÏÏθῠ. Comp. á¼Î½ÏεμÏίÏλημι , Xen. Anab . iv. 5. 28; á¼Î½ÏαναÏλήθειν , Xen. Hell . ii. 4. 12; and á¼Î½ÏιÏληÏοῦν , Xen. Cyr . ii. 2. 26. The distinction of the word from the simple á¼Î½Î±ÏληÏοῦν does not consist in this, that the latter is said of him , who “ á½ÏÏÎÏημα a se relictum ipse explet,” and á¼Î½ÏαναÏλ . of him , who “alterius á½ÏÏÎÏημα de suo explet” (so Winer, de verbor. c. praepos. in N. T. usu , 1838, III. p. 22); nor yet in the endurance vieing with Christ, the author of the afflictions (Fritzsche, ad Rom . III. p. 275); but in the circumstance, that in á¼Î½ÏαναÏλ . the filling up is conceived and described as defectui respondens , in á¼Î½Î±Ïλ ., on the other hand, only in general as completio . See 1 Corinthians 16:17 ; Philippians 2:30 ; Plat. Legg . xii. p. 957 A, Tim . p. 78 D, et al . Comp. also Tittmann, Synon . p. 230.
Ïá½° á½ÏÏεÏήμαÏα ] The plural indicates those elements yet wanting in the sufferings of Christ in order to completeness. Comp. 1Th 3:10 ; 2 Corinthians 9:12 .
Ïῶν Î¸Î»Î¯Ï . Ïοῦ ΧÏιÏÏοῦ ] Ïοῦ Χ . is the genitive of the subject . Paul describes, namely, his own sufferings , in accordance with the idea of the κοινÏνεá¿Î½ Ïοá¿Ï Ïοῦ ΧÏιÏÏοῦ ÏαθήμαÏι (1 Peter 4:13 ; comp. Matthew 20:22 ; Hebrews 13:13 ), as afflictions of Christ , in so far as the apostolic suffering in essential character was the same as Christ endured (the same cup which Christ drank, the same baptism with which Christ was baptized). Comp. on Romans 8:17 ; 2 Corinthians 1:5 ; Philippians 3:10 . The collective mass of these afflictions is conceived in the form of a definite measure , just as the phrases á¼Î½Î±ÏιμÏλάναι κακά , á¼Î½Î±Ïλá¿Ïαι κακὸν οἶÏον , and the like, are current in classic authors, according to a similar figurative conception (Hom. Il . viii. 34. 354, 15:132), Schweigh. Lex. Herod . I. p. 42. He only who has suffered all , has filled up the measure. That Paul is now, in his captivity fraught with danger to life, on the point (the present á¼Î½ÏαναÏλ . indicating the being in the act, see Bernhardy, p. 370) of filling up all that still remains behind of this measure of affliction, that he is therefore engaged in the final full solution of his task of suffering, without leaving a single á½ÏÏÎÏημα in it, this he regards as something grand and glorious, and therefore utters the á¼Î½ÏαναÏληÏá¿¶ , which bears the emphasis at the head of this declaration, with all the sense of triumph which the approaching completion of such a work involves. “ I rejoice on account of the sufferings which I endure for you, and so highly have I to esteem this situation of affliction
I am in the course of furnishing the complete fulfilment of what in my case still remains in arrear of fellowship of affliction with Christ .” This lofty consciousness, this feeling of the grandeur of the case, very naturally involved not only the selection of the most graphic expression possible, á¼Î½ÏαναÏληÏá¿¶ , to be emphatically prefixed, but also the description, in the most honourable and sublime manner possible, of the apostolic afflictions themselves as the θλίÏÎµÎ¹Ï Ïοῦ ΧÏιÏÏοῦ , [64] since in their kind and nature they are no other than those which Christ Himself has suffered. These sufferings are , indeed, sufferings for Christ’s sake (so Vatablus, Schoettgen, Zachariae, Storr, Rosenmüller, Flatt, Böhmer, and others; comp. Wetstein), but they are not so designated by the genitive; on the contrary, the designation follows the idea of ethical identity , which is conveyed in the á¼°ÏÏμοιÏον εἷναι Ïá¿· ΧÏιÏÏá¿· , as in Philippians 3:10 . Nor are they to be taken, with Lücke (comp. Fritzsche, l.c. ), as: “afflictiones, quae Paulo apostolo Christo auctore et auspice Christo perferendae erant,” since there is no ground to depart from the primary and most natural designation of the suffering subject ( θλá¿ÏÎ¹Ï , with the genitive of the person, is always so used in the N. T., e. g . in 2 Corinthians 1:4 ; 2 Corinthians 1:8 ; 2 Corinthians 4:17 ; Ephesians 3:12 ; James 1:27 ), considering how current is the idea of the κοινÏνία of the sufferings of Christ. Theodoret’s comment is substantially correct, though not exhibiting precisely the relation expressed by the genitive: ΧΡÎÎ£Î¤á¿¸Ï Î¤á¿¸Î á½Î á¿Î¡ Τá¿Ï á¼ÎÎÎÎΣÎÎÏ ÎÎΤÎÎÎÎÎΤΠÎÎÎÎΤÎΠ⦠ÎÎῠΤᾺ á¼ÎÎÎ á½Î£Î á½Î ÎÎÎÎÎÎ , ÎÎá¿ á½ ÎÎá¿ÎÏ á¼Î ÎΣΤÎÎÎÏ á½©Î£ÎÎÎ¤Î©Ï á½Î á¿Î¡ Îá½Î¤á¿Ï á½Î ÎΣΤΠΤᾺ Î ÎÎÎÎÎÎ Î ÎÎÎÎÎΤΠ. Ewald imports more, when he says that Paul designates his sufferings from the point of view of the continuation and further accomplishment of the divine aim in the sufferings of Christ. Quite erroneous, however, because at variance with the idea that Christ has exhausted the suffering appointed to Him in the decree of God for the redemption of the world (comp. also John 11:52 ; John 19:30 ; Luke 22:37 ; Luke 18:31 ; Romans 3:25 ; 2 Corinthians 5:21 , et al .), is not only the view of Heinrichs: “ qualia et Christus passurus fuisset, si diutius vixisset ” (so substantially also Phot. Amphil . 143), but also that of Hofmann, who explains it to mean: the supplementary continuation of the afflictions which Christ suffered in His earthly life a continuation which belonged to the apostle as apostle of the Gentiles , and consisted in a suffering which could not have affected Christ, because He was only sent to the lost sheep of Israel . As if Christ’s suffering were not, throughout the N. T., the one perfect and completely valid suffering for all mankind , but were rather to be viewed under the aspect of two quantitative halves , one of which He bore Himself as Î´Î¹Î¬ÎºÎ¿Î½Î¿Ï ÏεÏιÏομá¿Ï (Romans 15:8 ), leaving the other behind to be borne by Paul as the ÎÎÎÎΣÎÎÎÎÏ á¼ÎÎá¿¶Î ; so that the first , namely, that which Jesus suffered, consisted in the fact that Israel brought Him to the cross , because they would not allow Him to be their Saviour; whilst the other , as the complement of the first, consisted in this, that Paul lay in captivity with his life at stake , because Israel would not permit him to proclaim that Saviour to the Gentiles. Every explanation, which involves the idea of the suffering endured by Christ in the days of His flesh having been incomplete and needing supplement, is an anomaly which offends against the analogy of faith of the N. T. And how incompatible with the deep humility of the apostle (Ephesians 3:8 ; 1 Corinthians 15:9 ) would be the thought of being supposed to supplement that, which the highly exalted One (Colossians 1:15 ff.) had suffered for the reconciliation of the universe (Colossians 1:20 ff.)! Only when misinterpreted in this fashion can the utterance be regarded as one perfectly foreign to Paul (as is asserted by Holtzmann, pp. 21 f., 152, 226); even Ephesians 1:22 affords no basis for such a view. As head of the Church, which is His body, and which He fills, He is in statu gloriae in virtue of His kingly office. Others, likewise, holding the genitive to be that of the subject , have discovered here the conception of the suffering of Christ in the Church , His body , [65] so that when the members suffer, the head suffers also . So Chrysostom and Theophylact (who compare the apostle with a lieutenant, who, when the general-in-chief is removed, takes the latter’s place and receives his wounds), Theodore of Mopsuestia, Augustine, Erasmus, Luther, Beza, Calvin, Melanchthon, Clarius, Cornelius a Lapide, Vitringa, Bengel, Michaelis, and others, including Steiger, Bähr, Olshausen, de Wette, Schenkel, Dalmer; comp. Grotius and Calovius, and even Bleek. But the idea of Christ suffering in the sufferings of His people (Olshausen: “Christ is the suffering God in the world’s history!”) is nowhere found in the N. T., not even in Acts 9:4 , where Christ, indeed, appears as the One against whom the persecution of Christians is directed , but not as affected by it in the sense of suffering . He lives in His people (Galatians 2:20 ), speaks in them (2 Corinthians 13:3 ); His heart beats in them (Philippians 1:8 ); He is mighty in them (Colossians 1:29 ), when they are weak (2 Corinthians 12:9 ), their hope, their life, their victory; but nowhere is it said that He suffers in them. This idea, moreover which, consistently carried out, would involve even the conception of the dying of Christ in the martyrs would be entirely opposed to the victoriously reigning life of the Lord in glory, with whose death all His sufferings are at an end, Acts 2:34 ff.; 1 Corinthians 15:24 ; Philippians 2:9 ff.; Luke 24:26 ; John 19:30 . Crucified á¼Î¾ á¼ÏÎ¸ÎµÎ½ÎµÎ¯Î±Ï , He lives á¼Î ÎÎ¥ÎÎÎÎÎ©Ï ÎÎÎῦ , 2 Corinthians 13:4 , at the right hand of God exalted above all the heavens and filling the universe (Ephesians 1:22 f., Colossians 4:10 ), ruling, conquering, and beyond the reach of further suffering (Hebrews 3:18 ff.). The application made by Cajetanus, Bellarmine, Salmeron, and others, of this explanation for the purpose of establishing the treasury of indulgences , which consists of the merits not merely of Christ but also of the apostles and saints , is a Jewish error ( 4Ma 6:26 , and Grimm in loc. ), historically hardly worthy of being noticed, though still defended, poorly enough, by Bisping.
á¼Î½ Ïá¿ ÏαÏκί Î¼Î¿Ï ] belongs to á¼ÎΤÎÎÎÎ Î . , as to which it specifies the more precise mode; not to Ïῶν Î¸Î»Î¯Ï . Ï . Χ . (so Storr, Flatt, Bähr, Steiger, Böhmer, Huther), with which it might be combined so as to form one idea, but it would convey a more precise description of the Christ-sufferings experienced by the apostle, for which there was no motive, and which was evident of itself. Belonging to á¼Î½ÏαναÏλ ., it contains with á½Î á¿Î¡ ΤÎῦ ΣÎÎ . á¼ . a pointed definition ( ÏάÏξ ⦠Ïῶμα ) of the mode and of the aim. [66] Paul accomplishes that á¼ÎΤÎÎÎÎ ÎÎΡÎῦΠin his flesh , [67] which in its natural weakness, exposed to suffering and death, receives the affliction from without and feels it psychically (comp. 2 Corinthians 4:11 ; Galatians 4:14 ; 1 Peter 4:1 ), for the benefit of the body of Christ, which is the church (comp. Colossians 1:18 ), for the confirmation, advancement, and glory of which (comp. above on á½Ïá½²Ï á½Î¼á¿¶Î½ ) he endures the Christ-sufferings. Comp. Ephesians 3:13 . The significant purpose of the addition of á¼Î ΤῠΣÎΡÎá¿ Î . Τ . Î . is to bring out more clearly and render palpable, in connection with the á¼ÎΤÎÎÎÎ ÎÎΡῶ Î . Τ . Î . , what lofty happiness he experiences in this very á¼Î½ÏαναÏληÏοῦν . He is therein privileged to step in with his mortal ΣÎΡΠfor the benefit of the holy and eternal body of Christ, which is the church.
[61] See upon ver. 24, Lücke, Progr. 1833; Huther in the Stud. u. Krit. 1838, p. 189 ff.
[62] So also Bisping, who, however, explains it of the meritoriousness of good works availing for others.
[63] Many ideas are arbitrarily introduced by commentators, in order to bring out of the á¼Î½Ïί in á¼Î½ÏαναÏλ . a reciprocal relation. See e.g. Clericus: “Ille ego, qui olim ecclesiam Christi vexaveram, nunc vicissim in ejus utilitatem pergo multa mala perpeti.” Others (see already Oecumenius) have found in it the meaning: for requital of that which Christ suffered for us; comp. also Grimm in his Lexicon. Wetstein remarks shortly and rightly: “ á¼Î½Ïá½¶ á½ÏÏεÏήμαÏÎ¿Ï succedit ÏλήÏÏμα ,” or rather á¼Î½Î±ÏλήÏÏμα .
[64] When de Wette describes our view of Î¸Î»Î¯Ï . Ï . Χ . as tame, and Schenkel as tautological, the incorrectness of this criticism arises from their not observing that the stress of the expression lies on á¼Î½ÏαναÏληÏá¿¶ , and not on Ï . θλ . Ï . Χ .
[65] Comp. also Sabatier, l’apôtre Paul, p. 213.
[66] Steiger rightly perceived that á¼Î½ Ï . ÏαÏκί μ . and á½Ïá½²Ï Ï . Ï . á¼ . belong together; but he erroneously coupled both with Ïῶν θλ . Ï . Χ . (“the sufferings which Christ endures in my flesh for His body”), owing to his incorrect view of the θλίÏÎµÎ¹Ï Ï . Χ
[67] Hofmann thinks, without reason, that, according to our explanation of á¼Î½ÏαναÏληÏá¿¶ κ . Ï . λ ., we ought to join á¼Î½ Ïá¿ ÏαÏκί Î¼Î¿Ï with Ïῶν Î¸Î»Î¯Ï . Ï . Χ ., as the latter would otherwise be without any reference to the person of the apostle. It has, in fact, this reference through the very statement, that the á¼Î½ÏαναÏληÏοῦν κ . Ï . λ . takes places in the flesh of the apostle.
Verse 25
Colossians 1:25 . That He suffers thus, as is stated in Colossians 1:24 , for the good of the church , is implied in his special relation of service to the latter; hence the epexegetical relative clause á¼§Ï á¼Î³ÎµÎ½Ïμην κ . Ï . λ . (comp. on Colossians 1:18 ): whose servant I have become in conformity with my divine appointment as preacher to the Gentiles ( καÏá½° Ï . οἰκον . κ . Ï . λ .). In this way Paul now brings this his specific and distinctive calling into prominence after the general description of himself as servant of the gospel in Colossians 1:23 , and here again he gives expression to the consciousness of his individual authority by the emphasized á¼Î³Ï . The relation of the testimony regarding himself in Colossians 1:25 to that of Colossians 1:23 is climactic , not that of a clumsy duplicate (Holtzmann).
καÏá½° Ïὴν οἰκονομ . κ . Ï . λ .] in accordance with the stewardship of God, which is given to me with reference to you . The οἰκονομία Ï . Îεοῦ is in itself nothing else than a characteristic designation of the apostolic office, in so far as its holder is appointed as administrator of the household of God (the οἰκοδεÏÏÏÏÎ·Ï ), by which, in the theocratic figurative conception, is denoted the church (comp. 1 Timothy 3:15 ). Comp. 1 Corinthians 9:17 ; 1 Corinthians 4:1 ; Titus 1:7 . Hence such an one is, in consequence of this office conferred upon him, in his relation to the church the servant of the latter (2 Corinthians 4:5 ), to which function God has appointed him, just because he is His steward. This sacred stewardship then receives its more precise distinguishing definition, so far as it is entrusted to Paul , by the addition of Îµá¼°Ï á½Î¼á¾¶Ï κ . Ï . λ . It is purely arbitrary, and at variance with the context ( Ïὴν δοθ . μοι ), to depart from the proper signification, and to take it as institution, arrangement (see on Ephesians 1:10 ; Ephesians 3:2 ). So Chrysostom and his successors (with much wavering), Beza, Calvin, Estius, Rosenmüller, and others. It is well said by Cornelius a Lapide: “in domo Dei, quae est ecclesia, sum oeconomus, ut dispensem ⦠bona et dona Dei domini mei.” Comp. on 1 Corinthians 4:1 .
Îµá¼°Ï á½Î¼á¾¶Ï ] although the office concerned Gentile Christians generally; a concrete appropriation, as in Colossians 1:24 . Comp. on Philippians 1:24 . It is to be joined with Ï . δοθεá¿Ïάν μοι , as in Ephesians 3:2 ; not with ÏληÏá¿¶Ïαι κ . Ï . λ . (Hofmann), with the comprehensive tenor of which the individualizing “ for you ” is not in harmony, when it is properly explained (see below).
ÏληÏá¿¶Ïαι κ . Ï . λ .] telic infinitive, depending on Ïὴν δοθεá¿Ïάν μοι Îµá¼°Ï á½Î¼á¾¶Ï , beside which it stands (Romans 15:15 f.); not on á¼§Ï á¼Î³ÎµÎ½ . διάκ . (Huther). Paul, namely, has received the office of Apostle to the Gentiles , in order through the discharge of it to bring to completion the gospel ( Ïὸν λÏγον Ï . Îεοῦ , 1Co 14:36 ; 2 Corinthians 2:17 ; 2 Corinthians 4:2 ; 1 Thessalonians 2:13 ; Acts 4:29 ; Acts 4:31 ; Acts 6:2 , and frequently), obviously not as regards its contents, but as regards its universal destination, according to which the knowledge of salvation had not yet reached its fulness, so long as it was only communicated to the Jews and not to the Gentiles also. The latter was accomplished through Paul , who thereby made full the gospel conceived, in respect of its proclamation in accordance with its destiny, as a measure to be filled just because the divine stewardship for the Gentiles had been committed to him. The same conception of ÏλήÏÏÏÎ¹Ï occurs in Romans 15:19 . Comp. Erasmus, Paraphr.; also Calovius. [68] Similarly Bengel: “ad omnes perducere; P. ubique ad summa tendit.” Partly from not attending to the contextual reference to the element, contained in Ï . δοθ . μοι Îµá¼°Ï á½Îá¾¶Ï , of the Î ÎÎΡΩΣÎÏ of the gospel which was implied in the Gentile-apostolic ministry, and partly from not doing justice to the verbal sense of the selected expression ÏληÏá¿¶Ïαι , or attributing an arbitrary meaning to it, commentators have taken very arbitrary views of the passage, such as, for example, Luther: to preach copiously; Olshausen, whom Dalmer follows: “to proclaim it completely as respects its whole tenor and compass;” Cornelius a Lapide: “ut compleam praedicationem ev., quam cocpit Christus; ” Vitringa, Storr, Flatt, Bähr: ÏληÏοῦν has after ××ר the signification of the simple docere; Huther: it means either to diffuse , or (as Steiger also takes it) to “realize, ” to introduce into the life, inasmuch as a doctrine not preached is empty; [69] de Wette: to “execute, ” the word of God being regarded either as a commission or (comp. Heinrichs) as a decree; Estius and others, following Theodoret: “ut omnia loca impleam verbo Dei ” (quite at variance with the words here, comp. Acts 5:28 ); Fritzsche, ad Rom . III. p. 275: to supplement , namely, by continuing the instruction of your teacher Epaphras . Others, inconsistently with what follows, have explained the λÏÎ³Î¿Ï Ï . Îεοῦ to mean the divine promise (“partim de Christo in genere, partim de vocatione gentium,” Beza, comp. Vatablus), in accordance with which ÏÎ»Î·Ï . would mean exsequi . Chrysostom has rightly understood Ï . λÏγ . Ï . Îεοῦ of the gospel , but takes ÏληÏá¿¶Ïαι , to which he attaches Îá¼¸Ï á½Îá¾¶Ï , as meaning: to bring to full, firm faith (similarly Calvin) a view justified neither by the word in itself nor by the context.
[68] Who rightly says: “Nimirum impletur ita verbum non ratione sui ceu imperfectum, sed ratione hominum, cum ad plures sese diffundit.”
[69] In a similarly artificial fashion, emptying the purposely chosen expression of its meaning, Hofmann comes ultimately to the bare sense: “to proclaim God’s word,” asserting that the word is a fact, and so he who proclaims the fact fulfils it.
Verse 26
Colossians 1:26 . Appositional more precise definition of the λÏÎ³Î¿Ï Ïοῦ Îεοῦ , and that as regards its great contents .
As to Ïὸ Î¼Ï ÏÏήÏιον κ . Ï . λ ., the decree of redemption , hidden from eternity in God, fulfilled through Christ, and made known through the gospel, see on Ephesians 1:9 . It embraces the Gentiles also; and this is a special part of its nature that had been veiled (see Ephesians 3:5 ), which, however, is not brought into prominence till Colossians 1:27 . Considering the so frequent treatment of this idea in Paul’s writings, and its natural correlation with that of the γνῶÏÎ¹Ï , an acquaintance with the Gospel of Matthew (Matthew 13:11 ) is not to be inferred here (Holtzmann). [70]
á¼Ïὸ Ïῶν αἰÏνÏν κ . á¼Ïὸ Ïῶν γενεῶν ] This twofold description, as also the repetition of á¼ÏÏ , has solemn emphasis: from the ages and from the generations . The article indicates the ages that had existed (since the beginning), and the generations that have lived. As to á¼Ïὸ Ïῶν αἰÏνÏν , comp. on Ephesians 3:9 . Paul could not write ÏÏὸ Ïῶν αἰÏν ., because while the divine decree was formed prior to all time (1 Corinthians 2:7 ; 2 Timothy 1:9 ), its concealment is not conceivable before the beginning of the times and generations of mankind, to whom it remained unknown. Expressions such as Romans 16:25 , ÏÏÏÎ½Î¿Î¹Ï Î±á¼°ÏÎ½Î¯Î¿Î¹Ï , [71] and Titus 1:2 (see Huther in loc .), do not conflict with this view. á¼Ïὸ Ï . γενεῶν does not occur elsewhere in the N. T.; but comp. Acts 15:21 . The two ideas are not to be regarded as synonymous (in opposition to Huther and others), but are to be kept separate ( times men ).
Î½Ï Î½á½¶ δὲ á¼ÏανεÏÏθη ] A transition to the finite tense, occasioned by the importance of the contrast. Comp. on Colossians 1:6 . Respecting ÎÎ¥ÎÎ , see on Colossians 1:21 . The ΦÎÎÎΡΩΣÎÏ has taken place differently according to the different subjects; partly by á¼ÏÎ¿ÎºÎ¬Î»Ï ÏÎ¹Ï (Ephesians 3:5 ; 1 Corinthians 2:10 ), as in the case of Paul himself (Galatians 1:12 ; Galatians 1:15 ; Ephesians 3:3 ); partly by preaching (Colossians 4:4 ; Titus 1:3 ; Romans 16:26 ); partly by both. The historical realization (de Wette; comp. 2 Timothy 1:10 ) was the antecedent of the ÏανÎÏÏÏÎ¹Ï , but is not here this latter itself, which is, on the contrary, indicated by ΤÎá¿Ï á¼ÎÎÎÎÏ Îá½Î¤Îῦ as a special act of clearly manifesting communication .
Ïοá¿Ï á¼ÎÎÎÎÏ Îá½Î¤Îῦ ] i.e . not: to the apostles and prophets of the N. T . (Flatt, Bähr, Böhmer, Steiger, Olshausen, Baumgarten-Crusius, following Estius and. older expositors, and even Theodoret, who, however, includes other Christians also), a view which is quite unjustifiably imported from Ephesians 3:5 , [72] whence also the reading á¼ÏοÏÏÏÎ»Î¿Î¹Ï (instead of á¼ÎÎÎÎÏ ) in F G has arisen. It refers to the Christians generally . The mystery was indeed announced to all (Colossians 1:23 ), but was made manifest only to the believers, who as such are the κληÏοὶ ἠγιοι belonging to God, Romans 1:7 ; Romans 8:30 ; Romans 9:23 f. Huther wrongly desires to leave ΤÎá¿Ï á¼ÎÎÎÎÏ indefinite , because the Î¼Ï ÏÏήÏιον , so far as it embraced the Gentiles also, had not come to be known to many Jewish-Christians. But, apart from the fact that the Judaists did not misapprehend the destination of redemption for the Gentiles in itself and generally, but only the direct character of that destination (without a transition through Judaism, Acts 15:1 , et al .), the á¼ÏανεÏÏθη Ïοá¿Ï á¼Î³Î¯Î¿Î¹Ï αá½Ïοῦ is in fact a summary assertion, which is to be construed a potiori , and does not cease to be true on account of exceptional cases, in which the result was not actually realized.
[70] Just as little ground is there for tracing καÏá½° Ïá½° á¼Î½ÏάλμαÏα κ . Ï . λ ., in Colossians 2:22 , to Matthew 15:9 ; οὠκÏαÏῶν , in Colossians 2:19 , to Matthew 7:3-4 ; á¼ÏάÏη , in Colossians 2:8 , to Matthew 13:22 ; and in other instances. The author, who manifests so much lively copiousness of language, was certainly not thus confined and dependent in thought and expression.
[71] According to Holtzmann, indeed, p. 309 ff., the close of the Epistle to the Romans is to be held as proceeding from the post-apostolic auctor ad Ephesios , a position which is attempted to be proved by the tones (quite Pauline, however) which Romans 16:15-27 has in common with Colossians 1:26 f.; Ephesians 3:20 ; Ephesians 3:9-10 ; Ephesians 5:21 ; and in support of it an erroneous interpretation of διὰ γÏαÏῶν ÏÏοÏηÏικῶν , in Romans 16:26 , is invoked.
[72] Holtzmann also, p. 49, would have the apostles thought of “first of all.” The resemblances to Ephesians 3:3 ; Ephesians 3:5 do not postulate the similarity of the conception throughout. This would assume a mechanical process of thought, which could not be proved.
Verse 27
Colossians 1:27 . Not exposition of the á¼ÏÎ±Î½ÎµÏ . Ïοá¿Ï á¼Î³ . αá½Ïοῦ , since the γνÏÏίÏαι has for its object not the Î¼Ï ÏÏήÏιον itself, but the glory of the latter among the Gentiles . In reality, Î¿á¼·Ï subjoins an onward movement of the discourse, so that to the general Ïὸ Î¼Ï ÏÏήÏιον á¼ÏανεÏÏθη Ïοá¿Ï á¼Î³ . αá½Ïοῦ a particular element is added: “The mystery was made manifest to His saints, to them, to whom ( quippe quibus ) God withal desired especially to make known that , which is the riches of the glory of this mystery among the Gentiles.” Along with the general á¼ÏανεÏÏθη Ïοá¿Ï á¼Î³Î¯Î¿Î¹Ï αá½Ïοῦ God had this special definite direction of His will. From this the reason is plain why Paul has written, not simply Î¿á¼·Ï á¼Î³Î½ÏÏιÏεν á½ ÎεÏÏ , but Î¿á¼·Ï á¼ Î¸ÎλεÏεν á½ ÎÎµá½¸Ï Î³Î½ÏÏίÏαι . The meaning that is usually discovered in ἠθÎληÏεν , free grace , and the like (so Chrysostom, Theodoret, Calvin, Beza, and many others, including Bähr, Böhmer, de Wette; Huther is, with reason, doubtful), is therefore not the aim of the word, which is also not intended to express the joyfulness of the announcement (Hofmann), but simply and solely the idea: “He had a mind.”
γνÏÏίÏαι ] to make known , like á¼ÏανεÏÏθη from which it differs in meaning not essentially, but only to this extent, that by á¼ÏÎ±Î½ÎµÏ . the thing formerly hidden is designated as openly displayed (Romans 1:19 ; Romans 3:21 ; Romans 16:26 ; Ephesians 5:13 , et al .), and by γνÏÏίÏαι that which was formerly unknown as brought to knowledge . Comp. Romans 16:26 ; Romans 9:22 ; Ephesians 1:9 ; Ephesians 3:3 ; Ephesians 3:5 ; Ephesians 3:10 ; Ephesians 6:19 ; Luke 2:15 , et al . The latter is not related to á¼ÏÎ±Î½ÎµÏ . either as a something more (Bähr: the making fully acquainted with the nature); or as its result (de Wette); or as entering more into detail (Baumgarten-Crusius); or as making aware, namely by experience (Hofmann).
Ïί Ïὸ ÏλοῦÏÎ¿Ï Ïá¿Ï δÏÎ¾Î·Ï Îº . Ï . λ .] what is the riches of the glory of this mystery among the Gentiles , i.e. what rich fulness of the glory contained in this mystery exists among the Gentiles , since, indeed, this riches consists in the fact ( á½ Ï á¼ÏÏι ), that Christ is among you, in whom ye have the hope of glory. In order to a proper interpretation, let it be observed: (1) Ïί occupies with emphasis the place of the indirect á½ Ïι (see Poppo, ad Xen. Cyrop . i. 2. 10; Kühner, ad Mem . i. 1. 1; Winer, p. 158 f. [E. T. 210]), and denotes “ quae sint divitiae” as regards degree : how great and unspeakable the riches, etc. Comp. on Ephesians 1:18 ; Ephesians 3:18 . The text yields this definition of the sense from the very connection with the quantitative idea Ïὸ ÏλοῦÏÎ¿Ï . (2) All the substantives are to be left in their full solemn force, without being resolved into adjectives (Erasmus, Luther, and many others: the glorious riches; Beza: “divitiae gloriosi hujus mysterii”). Chrysostom aptly remarks: ÏÎµÎ¼Î½á¿¶Ï Îµá¼¶Ïε καὶ á½Î³ÎºÎ¿Î½ á¼ÏÎθηκεν á¼Ïὸ Ïολλá¿Ï διαθÎÏεÏÏ , á¼ÏιÏάÏÎµÎ¹Ï Î¶Î·Ïá¿¶Ï á¼ÏιÏάÏεÏν . Comp. Calvin: “ magniloquus est in extollenda evangelii dignitate.” (3) As Ïá¿Ï δÏÎ¾Î·Ï is governed by Ïὸ ÏλοῦÏÎ¿Ï , so also is Ïοῦ Î¼Ï ÏÏηÏÎ¯Î¿Ï governed by Ïá¿Ï δÏÎ¾Î·Ï , and á¼Î½ Ïοá¿Ï á¼Î¸Î½ . belongs to the á¼ÏÏί which is to be supplied, comp. Ephesians 1:18 . (4) According to the context, the δÏξα cannot be anything else (see immediately below, ἡ á¼Î»Ïá½¶Ï Ïá¿Ï δÏÎ¾Î·Ï ) than the Messianic glory, the glory of the kingdom (Romans 8:18 ; Rom 8:21 ; 2 Corinthians 4:17 , et al .), the glorious blessing of the κληÏονομία (comp. Colossians 1:12 ), which before the Parousia (Romans 8:30 ; Colossians 3:3 f.) is the ideal ( á¼Î»ÏÎ¯Ï ), but after it is the realized, possession of believers. Hence it is neither to be taken in the sense of the glorious effects generally , which the gospel produces among the Gentiles (Chrysostom, Theophylact, and many others, including Huther, comp. Dalmer), nor in that specially of their conversion from death to life (Hofmann), whereby its glory is unfolded. Just as little, however, is the δÏξα of God meant, in particular His wisdom and grace, which manifest themselves objectively in the making known of the mystery, and realize themselves subjectively by moral glorification and by the hope of eternal glory (de Wette), or the splendor internus of true Christians, or the bliss of the latter combined with their moral dignity (Böhmer). (5) The genitive of the subject, Ïοῦ Î¼Ï ÏÏηÏÎ¯Î¿Ï ÏοÏÏÎ¿Ï , defines the δÏξα as that contained in the Î¼Ï Î±ÏήÏιον , previously unknown, but now become manifest with the mystery that has been made known, as the blessed contents of the latter. Comp. Colossians 1:23 : á¼Î»ÏÎ¯Ï Ïοῦ εá½Î±Î³Î³ÎµÎ»Î¯Î¿Ï . To take the δÏξα as attribute of the mystery , is forbidden by what immediately follows, according to which the idea can be none other than the familiar one of that glory, which is the proposed aim of the saving revelation and calling, the object of faith and hope (in opposition to Hofmann and many others); Colossians 3:4 . Comp. on Romans 5:2 .
á¼Î½ Ïοá¿Ï á¼Î¸Î½ÎµÏιν ] ÏαίνεÏαι δὲ á¼Î½ á¼ÏÎÏÎ¿Î¹Ï , Ïολλῷ δὲ ÏλÎον á¼Î½ ÏοÏÏÎ¿Î¹Ï á¼¡ Ïολλὴ Ïοῦ Î¼Ï ÏÏηÏÎ¯Î¿Ï Î´Ïξα , Chrysostom. “Qui tot saeculis demersi fuerant in morte, ut viderentur penitus desperati,” Calvin.
á½ Ï á¼ÏÏι ΧÏιÏÏá½¸Ï á¼Î½ á½Î¼á¿Î½ ] “ Christus in gentibus , summum illis temporibus paradoxon,” Bengel. According to a familiar attraction (Winer, p. 157 [E. T. 207]), this á½ Ï applies to the previous subject Ïὸ ÏλοῦÏÎ¿Ï Ïá¿Ï δÏÎ¾Î·Ï Ïοῦ Î¼Ï ÏÏ . Ï ., and introduces that, in which this riches consists . Namely: Christ among you , in this it consists , and by this information is given at the same time how great it is ( Ïί á¼ÏÏιν ). Formerly they were ÏÏÏá½¶Ï Î§ÏιÏÏοῦ (Ephesians 2:12 ); now Christ, who by His Spirit reigns in the hearts of believers (Romans 8:10 ; Ephesians 3:17 ; Gal 2:20 ; 2 Corinthians 3:17 , et al. ), is present and active among them . The proper reference of the relative to Ïὸ ÏλοῦÏÎ¿Ï Îº . Ï . λ ., and also the correct connection of á¼Î½ á½Î¼á¿Î½ with ΧÏιÏÏÏÏ (not with ἡ á¼Î»ÏÎ¯Ï , as Storr and Flatt think), are already given by Theodoret and Oecumenius (comp. also Theophylact), Valla, Luther, Calovius, and others, including Böhmer and Bleek, whereas Hofmann, instead of closely connecting ΧÏιÏÏá½¸Ï á¼Î½ á½Î¼á¿Î½ , makes this á¼Î½ á½Î¼á¿Î½ depend on á¼ÏÏί , whereby the thoughtful and striking presentation of the fact “ Christ among the Gentiles ” is without reason put in the background, and á¼Î½ á½Î¼á¿Î½ becomes superfluous. Following the Vulgate and Chrysostom, á½ Ï is frequently referred to Ïοῦ Î¼Ï ÏÏÎ·Ï . ÏοÏÏον : “this mystery consists in Christ’s being among you, the Gentiles,” Huther, comp. Ewald. The context, however, is fatal to this view; partly in general, because it is not the mystery itself, but the riches of its glory, that forms the main idea in the foregoing; and partly, in particular, because the way has been significantly prepared for á½ Ï á¼ÏÏι through Ïί , while á¼Î½ á½Î¼á¿Î½ corresponds [73] to the á¼Î½ Ïοá¿Ï á¼Î¸Î½ÎµÏιν referring to the Î ÎÎῦΤÎÏ , and the following Ἡ á¼ÎÎ á¿Ï Τá¿Ï ÎÎÎÎÏ glances back to the Î ÎÎῦΤÎÏ Î¤á¿Ï ÎÎÎÎÏ .
ΧΡÎΣΤÎÏ ] Christ Himself, see above. Neither Ἡ ΤÎῦ Χ . ÎÎῶΣÎÏ (Theophylact) is meant, nor the doctrine , either of Christ (Grotius, Rosenmüller, and others), or about Christ (Flatt). On the individualizing á½Î¼á¿Î½ , although the relation concerns the Gentiles generally, comp. á½Îá¾¶Ï in Colossians 1:25 . “Accommodat ipsis Colossensibus, ut efficacius in se agnoscant,” Calvin.
Ἡ á¼ÎÎ á¿Ï Τá¿Ï ÎÎÎÎÏ ] characteristic apposition (comp. Colossians 3:4 ) to ΧΡÎΣΤÎÏ , giving information how the ΧΡÎÎ£Î¤á¿¸Ï á¼Î á½Îá¿Î forms the great riches of the glory, etc. among the Gentiles, since Christ is the hope of the Messianic δÏξα , in Him is given the possession in hope of the future glory. The emphasis is on ἡ á¼Î»ÏÎ¯Ï , in which the probative element lies. Compare on the subject-matter, Romans 8:24 : Ïá¿ Î³á½°Ï á¼Î»Ïίδι á¼ÏÏθημεν , and the contrast á¼ÎÎ ÎÎÎ Îá¿ á¼Î§ÎÎΤÎÏ in Ephesians 2:12 ; 1 Thessalonians 4:13 ; and on the concrete expression, 1 Timothy 1:1 ; Ignat. Eph . 21; Magnes . 11; Sir 31:14 ; Thuc. iii. 57. 4; Aesch. Ch . 236. 776.
[73] Hence also to be rendered not in vobis (Luther, Böhmer, Olshausen), but inter vos. The older writers combated the rendering in vobis from opposition to the Fanatics.
Verse 28
Colossians 1:28 . Christ was not proclaimed by all in the definite character just expressed, namely, as “ Christ among the Gentiles, the hope of glory;” other teachers preached Him in a Judaistic form, as Saviour of the Jews, amidst legal demands and with theosophic speculation. Hence the emphasis with which not the simply epexegetic ὠν (Erasmus and others), but the ἡμεá¿Ï , which is otherwise superfluous, is brought forward; [74] by which Paul has meant himself along with Timothy and other like-minded preachers to the Gentiles ( we, on our part ). This emphasizing of ἡμεá¿Ï , however, requires the ὠν to be referred to Christ regarded in the Gentile-Messianic character, precisely as the ἡμεá¿Ï make Him known (comp. Philippians 1:17 f.), thereby distinguishing themselves from others; not to Christ generally (Hofmann), in which case the emphasizing of ἡμεá¿Ï is held to obtain its explanation only from the subsequent clause of purpose, ἵνα ÏαÏαÏÏ . κ . Ï . λ .
The specification of the mode of announcement Î½Î¿Ï Î¸ÎµÏοῦνÏÎµÏ and διδάÏκονÏÎµÏ , admonishing and teaching , corresponds to the two main elements of the evangelical preaching μεÏανοεá¿Ïε and ÏιÏÏεÏεÏε (Acts 20:21 ; Acts 26:18 ; Romans 3:3 ff.; Mark 1:15 ). Respecting the idea of Î½Î¿Ï Î¸ÎµÏεá¿Î½ , see on Ephesians 6:4 . It occurs also joined with διδάÏκ . [75] in Plato, Legg . viii. p. 845 B, Prot . p. 323 D, Apol . p. 26 A; Dem. 130. 2.
á¼Î½ ÏάÏá¿ ÏοÏίᾳ ] belongs to ÎÎÎ¥ÎÎΤ . and ÎÎÎÎΣΠ. :by means of every wisdom (comp. Colossians 3:16 ) which we bring to bear thereon. It is the Ïá¿¶Ï of the process of warning and teaching, comp. 1 Corinthians 3:10 , in which no sort of wisdom remains unemployed. The fact that Paul, in 1 Corinthians 1:17 , comp. Colossians 2:1 ; Colossians 2:4 , repudiates the ΣÎΦÎÎ ÎÎÎÎÎ¥ in his method of teaching, is not taking into consideration the sense in which ΣÎΦÎÎ there occurs at variance, but rather in keeping, with the present assertion, which applies, not to the wisdom of the world , but to Christian wisdom in its manifold forms.
The thrice repeated. ÏάνÏα á¼Î½Î¸ÏÏÏον (in opposition to the Judaizing tendency of the false teachers) “maximam habet ÎÎÎÎÎΤÎΤΠac vim,” Bengel. The proud feeling of the apostle of the world expresses itself. [76]
ἵνα ÏαÏαÏÏÎ®Ï . κ . Ï . λ .] The purpose of the ὠἡμεá¿Ï καÏαγγÎλλομεν down to ÏοÏίᾳ . This purpose is not in general, that man may so appear (Bleek), or come to stand so (Hofmann), but it refers, as in Colossians 1:22 , and without mixing up the conception of sacrifice (in opposition to Bähr and Baumgarten-Crusius), to the judgment (comp. on 2 Corinthians 4:14 ), at which it is the highest aim and glory (1 Thessalonians 2:19 f.) of the apostolic teachers to make every man come forward ÏÎλειον á¼Î½ Χ . á¼Î½ ΧÏιÏÏá¿· contains the distinguishing specialty of the ÏελειÏÏÎ·Ï , as Christian , which is not based on anything outside of Christ, or on any other element than just on Him. It is perfection in respect of the whole Christian nature; not merely of knowledge (Chrysostom, Theophylact, and others, including Böhmer), but also of life. Moreover, this á¼Î½ Χ . is so essential to the matter, and so current with the apostle, that there is no ground for finding in it an opposition to a doctrine of the law and of angels (Chrysostom, Theophylact, and others). Theophylact, however (comp. Chrysostom), rightly observes regarding the entire clause of purpose: Ïί λÎÎ³ÎµÎ¹Ï ; ÏάνÏα á¼Î½Î¸ÏÏÏον ; ναί , ÏηÏι , ÏοῦÏο ÏÏÎ¿Ï Î´Î¬Î¶Î¿Î¼ÎµÎ½ · εἰ δὲ μὴ γÎνηÏαι , οá½Î´á½²Î½ ÏÏá½¸Ï á¼¡Î¼á¾¶Ï .
[74] Without due reason, Holtzmann, p. 153, finds the use of the plural disturbing, and the whole verse tautological as coming after ver. 25. It is difficult, however, to mistake the full and solemn style of the passage, to which also the thrice repeated ÏάνÏα á¼Î½Î¸ÏÏÏον belongs.
[75] In Colossians 3:16 the two words stand in the inverse order, because there it is not the μεÏανοεá¿Î½ preceding the ÏίÏÏÎ¹Ï which is the aim of the Î½Î¿Ï Î¸ÎµÏία , but mutual improvement on the part of believers.
[76] Which Hofmann groundlessly calls in question, finding in ÏάνÏα á¼Î½Î¸ÏÏÏον the idea: “every one singly and severally.” This is gratuitously introduced, and would have been significantly expressed by Paul through á¼Î½Î± á¼ÎºÎ±ÏÏον (Acts 20:31 ), or through the addition of καθʼ á¼Î½Î± , or otherwise; comp. also 1 Thessalonians 2:11 . Calvin hits the thought properly: “ut sine exceptione totus mundus ex me discat.”
Verse 29
Colossians 1:29 . On the point of now urging upon the readers their obligation to fidelity in the faith (Colossians 2:4 ), and that from the platform of the personal relation in which he stood towards them as one unknown to them by face (Colossians 2:1 ), Paul now turns from the form of expression embracing others in common with himself , into which he had glided at Colossians 1:28 in harmony with its contents, back to the individual form (the first person singular ), and asserts, first of all, in connection with Colossians 1:28 , that for the purpose of the ÏαÏαÏÏá¿Ïαι κ . Ï . λ . ( Îµá¼°Ï á½ , comp. 1 Timothy 4:10 ) he also gives himself even toil ( κοÏιῶ , comp. Romans 16:6 ; Romans 16:12 ; 1 Corinthians 4:12 ), striving, etc.
καί ] also , subjoins the κοÏιᾶν to the καÏαγγÎλλειν κ . Ï . λ ., in which he subjects himself also to the former; it is therefore augmentative , in harmony with the climactic progress of the discourse; not a mere equalization of the aim and the striving (de Wette). Neither this καί , nor even the transition to the singular of the verb, especially since the latter is not emphasized by the addition of an á¼Î³Ï , can justify the interpretation of Hofmann, according to which Îµá¼°Ï á½ is, contrary to its position, to be attached to á¼Î³ÏνιζÏÎ¼ÎµÎ½Î¿Ï , and κοÏιῷ is to mean: “ I become weary and faint ” (comp. John 4:6 ; Revelation 2:3 , and Düsterdieck in loc .). Paul, who has often impressed upon others the μὴ á¼ÎºÎºÎ±ÎºÎµá¿Î½ , and for himself is certain of being more than conqueror in all things (Romans 8:37 ; 2 Corinthians 4:8 , et al. ), can hardly have borne testimony about himself in this sense, with which, moreover, the á¼Î³ÏνίζεÏθαι in the strength of Christ is not consistent. In his case, as much as in that of any one, the οá½Îº á¼ÎºÎ¿ÏίαÏÎ±Ï of Revelation 2:3 holds good.
á¼Î³ÏνιζÏÎ¼ÎµÎ½Î¿Ï ] Compare 1 Timothy 4:10 . Here, however, according to the context, Colossians 2:1 ff., the inward striving (comp. Luke 13:24 ) against difficulties and hostile forces, the striving of solicitude, of watching, of mental and emotional exertion, of prayer, etc., is meant; as respects which Paul, like every regenerate person (Galatians 5:17 ), could not be raised above the resistance of the ÏάÏξ to the Ïνεῦμα ruling in him. Comp. Chrysostom: καὶ οá½Ï á¼ÏÎ»á¿¶Ï ÏÏÎ¿Ï Î´Î¬Î¶Ï , ÏηÏιν , οá½Î´á½² á½¡Ï á¼ÏÏ Ïεν , á¼Î»Î»á½° κοÏιῶ á¼Î³ÏνιζÏÎ¼ÎµÎ½Î¿Ï Î¼ÎµÏá½° Ïολλá¿Ï Ïá¿Ï ÏÏÎ¿Ï Î´á¿Ï , μεÏá½° Ïολλá¿Ï Ïá¿Ï á¼Î³ÏÏ ÏÎ½Î¯Î±Ï . It is not: “tot me periculis ac malis objicere” (Erasmus, comp. Grotius, Estius, Heinrichs, Bähr, and others), which outward struggling, according to Flatt, de Wette, Baumgarten-Crusius, and others, should be understood along with that inward striving; Colossians 2:1 only points to the latter; comp. Colossians 4:12 .
καÏá½° Ïὴν á¼Î½ÎÏγειαν κ . Ï . λ .] for Paul does not contend, amid the labours of his office, according to the measure of his own strength, but according to the effectual working of Christ ( αá½Ïοῦ is not to be referred to God , as is done by Chrysostom, Grotius, Flatt, Baumgarten-Crusius, and others), which worketh in him . Comp. Philippians 4:13 . How must this consciousness, at once so humble and confident of victory, have operated upon the readers to stir them up and strengthen them for stedfastness in the faith!
Ïὴν á¼Î½ÎµÏÎ³Î¿Ï Î¼ .] is middle; see on 2 Corinthians 1:6 ; Galatians 5:6 ; Ephesians 3:20 . The modal definition to it, á¼Î½ Î´Ï Î½Î¬Î¼ÎµÎ¹ , mightily (comp. on Romans 1:4 ), is placed at the end significantly, as in 2 Thessalonians 1:11 ; it is groundlessly regarded by Holtzmann as probably due to the interpolator.